Setup Manual NT631 and NT631C - Support

Setup Manual NT631 and NT631C - Support
Cat. No. V063-E1-1
NT631 and NT631C
Programmable Terminals
Setup Manual
NT631 and NT631C
Programmable Terminals
Setup Manual
Produced July 2000
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
! WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
! Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
!
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers
to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PC” means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for anything else.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation
of the product.
1, 2, 3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
 OMRON, 2000
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any
form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is
constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change
without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no
responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
ii
About this Manual:
This manual describes connecting the NT-series NT631 and NT631C Programmable Terminals (PTs) to a
PC (Programmable Controller) or other host and peripheral devices, and the settings required for communications and applications. It includes the sections described below.
Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting
to install and operate the Programmable Terminal.
Section 1 provides fundamental information about the functions and features of the PTs, types of connection, communication methods, etc. This information will enable you to understand the applications of the
PTs.
Section 2 describes the connection methods that are possible with the PTs, and the functions of the parts
of PTs, as the required knowledge before connecting to the host and to the peripheral devices.
Section 3 describes the settings of the PTs and methods for connection to peripheral devices.
Section 4 describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS-232C port of the PT.
Section 5 describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS-422A/485 port of the PT.
Section 6 describes the operation of the System Menu, focusing on the procedure to start the PT. Functions that are convenient when using the PT and those that are useful for system maintenance are also
explained here.
Section 7 describes the action to take when errors occur in the PT, and how to carry out maintenance and
inspection to prevent the occurrence of errors.
The Appendices provide specifications, dimensions, procedures for using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit, procedures for transporting and storing the PT, information on cable preparation, information
on the relationship between the system program and hardware, and product lists.
! WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in
personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each
section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section
and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
iii
Related Manuals:
Related manuals are listed below.
The j symbol at the end of the catalog number is the revision number.
Connecting and Setting Up the Programmable Terminal
S NT631 and NT631C PT Setup Manual (V063-E1-j, this manual)
This manual describes connecting the Programmable Terminals to a host and
peripheral devices and settings required for communications and applications.
The functions and actual operating methods for the NT631 and NT631C PTs are
provided in the Reference Manual (V064-E1-j).
Programmable Terminal Functions and Operation
S NT31/31C/631/631C PT Reference Manual (V064-E1-j)
This manual is used for any of the following PTs: NT31, NT31C, NT631, and
NT631C. It describes screen configurations, part functions, host control methods, and other application information.
PT connection and setup procedures are described in the NT631 and NT631C
PT Setup Manual (V063-E1-j).
Creating and Transferring Screen Data, and Installing the System Program
S NT-series Support Tool for Windows Ver. 4.1 Operation Manual (V061-E1-j)
The screens displayed on the NT631 and NT631C PTs are created with the Support Tool and transferred to the PT. This manual describes how to create and
transfer screen data. It also describes how to download a system program to a
PT using the System Installer.
The NT-series Support Tool for Windows is normally referred to as merely the
Support Tool.
Connecting to Controllers Not Made by OMRON
S PC Connection Manual (V042-E1-j)
The NT631 and NT631C PTs can be connected to controllers in the following series: Mitsubishi A Series and FX Series. This manual describes the connection
and setup methods for these controllers.
The NT-series Support Tool for Windows Version 4.1 is required to connect the
NT631 and NT631C PTs to these controllers.
S NT31/NT631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual (V060-E1-j)
The NT631 and NT631C PTs can be connected to controllers in the following series: Allen-Bradley SLC 500 Series, GE Fanuc 90-20 and 90-30 Series, and Siemens S7-300 and S7-400 Series. This manual describes the connection and setup methods for these controllers.
iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
2
3
ix
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
x
x
x
SECTION 1 – General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1-1
Role and Operation of the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-1
Operation of an NT631/NT631C at an FA Production Site . . . . . . . .
1-1-2
Operations of the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions of the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-2
Comparison between NT631 and NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-3
Additional Functions of the V2 Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-4
Comparison between NT620S/NT620C/NT625C and
NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-5
Principal Functions of NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-6
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-1
Peripheral Devices That Can Be Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-2
Connecting to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication with the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-1
Direct Connection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-2
Host Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-3
NT Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-4
Connecting to Other Companies’ PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Using Memory Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-1
Memory Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-2
Comparison between Direct Connection and Memory Link . . . . . . .
1-5-3
Memory Link Online Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
8
10
15
15
16
16
16
17
17
18
19
19
19
20
21
SECTION 2 – Preparing for Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
2-1
2-2
2
2
3
4
4
5
5
Method for Connection to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Names and Functions of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
27
SECTION 3 – Hardware Settings and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1
Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-2
Installation in the Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-3
Power Supply Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-4
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1
Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-1
Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-2
Setting a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-3
Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-1
Installation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-2
Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-1
Installation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-2
Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
30
30
31
32
33
33
33
34
34
35
36
36
37
38
44
45
46
v
Table of contents
SECTION 4 – Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port . . . . . . . . .
4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1
Host Types and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-2
Connecting Directly between RS-232C Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52
52
76
SECTION 5 – Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port . . . . . .
81
5-1
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1
The Type of Host and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-2
1:1 Connection between RS-422A/485 at the PT and
RS-232C at the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-3
1:N Connection between RS-422A/485 at the PT and
RS-232C at the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-4
Recommended Connectors, Cables, and Crimp Terminals . . . . . . . . .
5-1-5
Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485 Communications .
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-1
Host Types and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2
Direct Connection between RS-422A Ports at Both Units . . . . . . . . .
5-2-3
Direct Connection between RS-485 Ports at Both Units . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-4
1:N Connection among RS-422A Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-5
1:N Connection among RS-485 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-6
Recommended Connectors, Cables and Crimp Terminals . . . . . . . . .
5-2-7
Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485 Communications .
88
92
94
95
96
112
115
116
118
120
121
SECTION 6 – System Menu Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
5-2
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
vi
51
System Menu Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-1
Operation at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation Modes and the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-1
Relationships among Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-2
Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-3
Operations with the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-1
Clearing Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-2
Initializing Display History Record Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-3
Initializing Alarm History Record Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-4
Initializing the Recipe Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-5
Initializing the Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-6
Initializing the Memory Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operations in the System Installer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-1
Setting the Display Language in the System Installer Mode . . . . . . .
6-5-2
Clearing/Installing the System Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-3
Changing the System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-4
Clearing Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmitting the Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
6-7-1
About Communication Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-2
Setting the Host Link Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-3
Setting the NT Link (1:1) Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-4
Setting the NT Link (1:N) Method (Standard/High-speed) . . . . . . . .
6-7-5
Setting the Memory Link Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-6
Setting the Communication Type for Serial Port B . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Various System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-1
Memory Switch Setting Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-2
Setting the Start-up Wait Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-3
Setting the Key Press Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-4
Setting the Buzzer Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-5
Setting the Printer Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-6
Setting the Print Method (NT631C Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
83
84
125
126
126
127
127
128
129
131
131
133
134
136
137
138
140
140
140
142
143
144
147
147
150
152
152
155
157
158
158
159
159
160
161
162
164
Table of contents
6-9-7
Setting Screen Saver Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-8
Setting the Screen Saver Start-up Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-9
Setting the History Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-10
Setting the Resume Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-11
Setting the Automatic Reset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-12
Setting the Time-out Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-13
Setting the Retry Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-1
I/O Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-2
Displaying/Setting the Calendar and Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-3
Checking the PT Setting Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-4
Displaying and Printing the Display History Record . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-5
Displaying and Printing the Alarm History Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-6
Checking Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-7
Device Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-8
Checking Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Console Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12-1
Usable Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12-2
Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12-3
Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Monitor Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13-1
Compatible Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13-2
Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13-3
Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14-1
Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
165
166
168
170
172
174
176
177
181
181
185
187
188
190
192
195
205
211
212
213
214
217
218
218
219
219
220
SECTION 7 – Troubleshooting and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
221
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
7-1
7-2
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Responding to Displayed Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-1
Errors Occurring at Start of Operation and Their Remedies . . . . . . .
7-2-2
Errors Occurring during Operation and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-3
Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization and Transmission . . .
7-2-4
Errors in the System Installer Mode and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . .
7-2-5
Communication Errors and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-1
Replacing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
222
225
225
227
228
229
229
231
237
238
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
241
A – Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B – Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C – Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D – Transporting and Storing the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E – Making the Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F – Making the Cable for Connecting a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G – Making the Cable for Connection to a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H – Making the Cable for Connection to a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I – Relationship between system program and hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J – Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K – Option List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
241
249
253
259
261
263
265
267
269
273
279
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
283
7-3
7-4
vii
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Terminal.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Programmable Terminal. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a
Programmable Terminal.
1
2
3
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
x
x
x
ix
3
Safety Precautions
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of introducing FA systems into production facilities.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of installing and connecting FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications
described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual
or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation
systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines and equipment that
may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult
your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the
systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for using the Programmable Terminal. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the software and keep this
manual close at hand for reference during operation.
! WARNING It is extremely important that Programmable Terminals and related devices be
used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in
applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult
with your OMRON representative before applying Programmable Terminals to
the above-mentioned applications.
! WARNING Do not use input functions such as PT touch switches for applications where
danger to human life or serious damage is possible, or for emergency switch
applications.
3
Safety Precautions
Read these safety precautions carefully and make sure you understand them
before using the Programmable Terminal so that you can use it safely and correctly.
Safety Conventions and
their Meanings
This operation manual uses the following conventions and symbols to indicate
cautions, warnings, and dangers in order to ensure safe use of the NT631/631C.
The cautions, warnings, and dangers shown here contain important information
related to safety. This instructions in these cautions, warnings, and dangers
must be observed.
The conventions used and their meanings are presented below.
! WARNING Indicates information that, if not heeded, could possibly result in loss of life or
serious injury.
x
3
Safety Precautions
! Caution
Indicates information that, if not heeded, could result in relatively serious or minor injury, damage to the product, or faulty operation.
WARNING
Do not attempt to take the unit apart and do not touch any internal parts while the power is being supplied. Doing either of
these may result in electrical shock.
WARNING
Switch OFF the NT631C power before replacing the backlight.
Otherwise you could sustain an electric shock.
xi
SECTION 1
General
This section provides fundamental information about the functions and features of the NT631/NT631C, types of connection,
communication methods, etc. This information will enable you to understand the applications of the NT631/NT631C.
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
Role and Operation of the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-1
Operation of an NT631/NT631C at an FA Production Site . . . . . . . . .
1-1-2
Operations of the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions of the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-2
Comparison between NT631 and NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-3
Additional Functions of the V2 Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-4
Comparison between NT620S/NT620C/NT625C and
NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-5
Principal Functions of NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-6
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-1
Peripheral Devices That Can Be Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-2
Connecting to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication with the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-1
Direct Connection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-2
Host Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-3
NT Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-4
Connecting to Other Companies’ PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Using Memory Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-1
Memory Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-2
Comparison between Direct Connection and Memory Link . . . . . . . . .
1-5-3
Memory Link Online Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
3
4
4
5
5
6
8
10
15
15
16
16
16
17
17
18
19
19
19
20
21
1
Section
Role and Operation of the NT631/NT631C
1-1
1-1
Role and Operation of the NT631/NT631C
The NT631/NT631C is a sophisticated display unit (programmable terminal)
which automatically displays information and can also be used for operations
when necessary. The following gives a general description of the role and operation of the NT631/NT631C for those using a programmable terminal (PT) for the
first time.
1-1-1 Operation of an NT631/NT631C at an FA Production Site
Production Line Status
Monitoring
The NT631/NT631C displays real-time information about the system and equipment operating status, etc. Its power of expression is enhanced by graphs and
other visuals, making the displays easy to understand.
Directions to Workers on
the Shop Floor
The NT631/NT631C warns of system or equipment failures and prompts the appropriate remedial action.
Alarm
Assembly line B
Positioning pin
is defective. Line stopped.
Check the following.
1. Defective pin L3
2. Position of dog M2
3. Mounting of photosensor P5
Panel Switch Functions
Setting touch switches on the NT631/NT631C allows workers to use the
NT631/NT631C as an operating panel; the results of the operations are transmitted to the host.
Electroplating control
Transport
Electr.
head
Wash.
head
Corr. prv.
head
Electrolyte
Wash
Corr.
prv.fluid
Clamp
Unclamp
Adv.
Int. stop
Rev.
2
Section
Role and Operation of the NT631/NT631C
1-1
1-1-2 Operations of the NT631/NT631C
Displays Screens
The information to be displayed (screen data) can be created on a computer using the Support Tool and stored in the NT631/NT631C. The screen data can be
displayed on the NT631/NT631C in response to instructions from the host or
touch switch operation.
Host
The screen data designated by
instructions from the host or touch
switch operation is displayed.
Receives Data from a
Host
The NT631/NT631C can be connected to the host by a host link or NT link and
receive necessary data from the host.
Host Link, NT link
Sends Data to a Host
Host
Data input using the touch panel (switch ON/OFF statuses, numeric values,
character strings) can be transmitted to the host.
Host
Touch panel
ON/OFF information, numeric
data, etc.
Screen Data
The screen data to be displayed on the NT631/NT631C can be created on a personal computer using the Support Tool. Connect the NT631/NT631C to the personal computer with an RS-232C cable and transmit the screen data to the
NT631/NT631C.
Create screen data.
RS-232C
Personal
computer
(Support Tool)
Screen data
When the host is connected at serial port A,
the personal computer is only connected
when communicating screen data between
the NT631/NT631C and Support Tool.
3
Section
Functions of the NT631/NT631C
1-2
1-2
Functions of the NT631/NT631C
The NT631/NT631C has the following features.
1-2-1 Features
Slim Body
• High-performance in a low-profile body (50 mm or less in the panel*).
• The communication cable connectors are housed in the unit so that they do not
protrude from the unit.
* When mounted in a panel of the recommended thickness (page 30).
Construction Best Suited to the FA Environment
• The panel is provided with a high-contrast monochrome EL display for
NT631-ST211j-EV2, an STN color LCD display with backlight for
NT631C-ST141j-EV2, and a TFT color LCD high definition display for
NT631C-ST151j-EV2.
• The backlight unit and battery can be replaced at the operation site.
• Waterproofed equivalent to the NEMA4 standard and to IP65F*.
* The panel may not be usable in environments where it is exposed to oil for long
periods.
640 dots
POWER
RUN
480 dots
Wide angle of visibility
Touch Switch Operation
Compatibility with Other PTs
Contrast and brightness are adjustable by touch switch operations (for
NT631C-ST141j-EV2 only).
• There is upward compatibility between the NT631/NT631C and the following
models for screen data and user programs: NT11S, NT20S, NT30, NT30C,
NT31, NT31 NT600S, NT610G, NT610C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C. (After
being read to the Support Tool, screens must be modified in accordance with
the screen size. Depending on the function used, partial modification of programs may also be necessary. For details on the compatibility of screen data,
refer to the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference
Manual and the NT-series Support Tool Operation Manual.
• The dimensions of the panel cut-out to accommodate the NT631/NT631C are
the same as for the NT625C.
Two Ports Featured as Standard:
Port A for Common Use by Support Tool/Host and Port B for Exclusive Use
by the Host
• Communication with the host is possible via another port while connected to
the Support Tool.
• Reading bar code data from a bar code reader is possible via another port
while communicating with the host.
Rapid System Program & Screen Data Changes Possible Using a Memory Unit.
• Installing a memory unit (type NT-MF261) on the rear of the NT631/NT631C
makes it easy to write screen data into the NT631/NT631C on site. This enables a rapid response to setup changes.
4
Section
Functions of the NT631/NT631C
1-2
• NT631/NT631C can store a system program into a memory unit. This enables
the system to handle more flexible setups.
Screen Data Check
Function
Screen data can be checked simply by operations at the NT631/NT631C system
menu, without connecting up to the Support Tool.
Large Increase in
Maximum Number of
Registered Elements
The number of elements that can be registered on one screen has been considerably increased, making it possible to create more expressive screens. For details, refer to Display Restrictions in Appendix A Specifications of the
NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.
Binary Data can be Read
to/Written from the Host
It is now possible to write binary data stored in words at the host directly to the
NT631/NT631C. This makes data conversion by a program at the host unnecessary, reducing the load on the host.
Character Display Using
High Definition Fonts
Any quadrupled characters are displayed with a 32 dot high-definition font.
Simple Version Upgrades
By using the system installer supplied with the Support Tool (Type NTZJCAT1-EV4), the system program at the NT631/NT631C can be changed easily from a personal computer.
Complies with
International Standards
The NT631/NT631C meets UL/CSA standards and EC directives.
Compatible with Other
Vendors’ Devices
Compatible with Sequencers in the following series: Mitsubishi A-series (Calculator Link) and FX-series (Programming Console), Allen-Bradley SLC 500 Series, GE Fanuc 90-20 and 90-30 Series, and Siemens S7-300 and S7-400 Series. Specialized system programs can be installed that allow the
NT631/NT631C to be controlled from other companies’ Sequencers.
Multiple Windows
Up to 3 windows can be displayed simultaneously in the normal screen. A
9-word window control area has been allocated to the host; the contents of these
9 words can be changed from the Host to open, close, and move windows.
1-2-2 Comparison between NT631 and NT631C
Two NT631 models — the NT631, which is capable of versatile graphic displays
(EL display, yellow), and the NT631C, which is also capable of color display —
are available. The differences between the NT631 and NT631C are tabled below:
Function
NT631-ST211j-EV1
NT631C-ST141j-EV1
NT631C-ST151j-EV1
Type
NT631-ST211-EV2 (Beige)
NT631-ST211B-EV2 (Black)
NT631C-ST141-EV2 (Beige)
NT631C-ST141B-EV2 (Black)
NT631C-ST151-EV2 (Beige)
NT631C-ST151B-EV2 (Black)
Display
panel
Monochrome EL display
STN color LCD display
(with white backlight)
TFT color LCD display
(with white backlight)
Beige and black are the front panel colors of each NT631/NT631C types.
1-2-3 Additional Functions of the V2 Versions
The V2 versions of NT631/NT631C are supplemented and enhanced by the following functions.
High-speed 1:N NT Link
The V2 versions are compatible with the high-speed 1:N NT Link as well as the
earlier standard 1:N NT Link.
Additional Mathematical
Functions
Operands (values referenced by formula) can be registered to allow the PT to
perform calculations automatically and write the results of those calculations to
numeral memory tables or words in the host.
Device Monitor Function
The new device monitor function can be used to change the PC’s operating
mode or display/change values in the PC’s memory areas. The present values
(PVs) of several words can be listed with the device monitor.
5
Section
Functions of the NT631/NT631C
1-2
Interlock Function
PT operations and inputs can be disabled from the PC if interlock bits have been
allocated in the PC for the corresponding PT touch switches, numeric inputs, or
string inputs.
Improved Lamp/Touch
Switch Labels
The following displays can be performed with lamp or touch switch labels:
• Display several lines of labels.
• Switch the display between different labels when OFF and ON.
• Display the numeral memory table contents as labels.
• Display the string memory table contents as labels.
NT30/NT30C and
NT620S/NT620C/NT625C
Emulation
The word configuration of the PT status control area and PT status notify area
can be set to emulate those of the NT30/NT30C or NT620S/NT620C/NT625C;
this mode is called NT30/620 compatible mode.
When the PT is operating in NT30/620 compatible mode, it will be equivalent to
an NT30/NT30C or NT620S/NT620C/NT625C in the functions listed below. The
PT retains full V2 functionality in all functions other than the ones listed below.
Refer to Appendix C in the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual for more details.
• Word configuration and functions of the PT status control area and PT status
notify area
• Image/library codes
• Insertion of image/library data into character strings
Additional CS1 Data
Areas Accessible
Data areas in CS1 PCs that were previously inaccessible can be accessed. The
data areas listed below can be accessed (read/written).
All banks in the EM area, timer completion flags (TU), counter completion
flags (CU), Work areas (WR), Task flags (TK), and the HR area.
Recipe Function
You can set the data (numeric values) for multiple words in record units using the
tabular elements on the PT screen, and write these settings in a single operation
to words on the host (i.e., PC or PT memory) using a touch switch operation on
the PT Unit. Also, multiple words of numeric data can be read from the host in
one operation. In this way, groups of parameter settings can be edited at the PT
Unit, and written to or read from the host.
Adjusting Contrast and
Brightness During PT
Operation
You can display the brightness and contrast adjustment screen using either the
touch switch or commands from the host, even while the PT is in operation.
1-2-4 Comparison between NT620S/NT620C/NT625C and NT631/NT631C
Item
NT620S/NT620C/NT625C
NT631/NT631C
Support Tool used
NT-ZJCAT1-EV4 or NT-ZA3AT-EV2
NT-ZJCAT1-EV4
DIP switches
On rear of unit
None (software settings)
Use of memory unit
Not possible
Possible
RS-232C interface
Connector (9-pin) also used as port for
screen data transfer.
- Serial port A connector (also used
for screen data transfer, 9-pin)
- Serial port B connector (for host
communications only, 9-pin)
RS-422A/485 interface
NT620S/NT620C: None
Terminal block (serial port B; memoryswitch selectable between RS232C
and RS-422A/485)
NT625C: Terminal block (DIP-switch
selectable between RS232C and
RS-422A/485)
Replacement backlight
NT620C-CFL01 (NT620C)
NT610C-CFL02 (NT625C)
NT631C-CFL01 (for ST151)
NT631C-CFL02 (for ST141)
NT631/NT631C system program
data
NT620-ZS3AT-EV1/EMV1
(including system installer)
The system installer and system program data are supplied with the Support Tool.
6
Section
Functions of the NT631/NT631C
Item
NT620S/NT620C/NT625C
1-2
NT631/NT631C
High-speed 1:N NT Link
Not possible
Possible*1
Memory
y Link
System program
Exclusive use by Memory Link
Same as OMRON connection
Screen data
Shared with OMRON connection
Exclusive use by Memory Link
LCD contrast adjustment
By a control on the rear of the unit
By touch panel operation
(Possible in the NT631-ST141j-V2
only.)
Backlight brightness adjustment
Not possible
By touch panel operation
(Possible in the NT631-ST141j-V2
only.)
Number of user-registered screens
Maximum of 2000
Maximum of 3999
1 MB
(User program memory)
NT620S: 512 KB
NT620C/NT625C: 1 MB
Numeral string data
Maximum of 1000
Maximum of 2000
Character string data
Maximum of 1000
Maximum of 2000
Bit data
256
Maximum of 1000
Mathematical tables
None
256 max.
Calculations can be executed
automatically in the PT.*1
Image data
Maximum of 224
Maximum of 4095*3
Library data
Maximum of 896
Maximum of 12288*3
Method for storing numeric values
(numeral memory data and PT status control area)
Fixed as BCD (binary coded decimal)
Selectable from BCD (binary coded
decimal) or binary
PT status control area size
4 words
5 words (partial change of contents)*3
PT status notify area size
3 words
2 words (partial change of contents)*3
Window control area size
None
9 CH*4
Registering continuous screen
Possible
Not possible (Use a screen switchover
as a substitute.)
Lamp/Touch switch labels
Fixed display (1 line only)
-
Interlock function
None
Operations can be disabled from the
PC by allocating interlock bits to the
corresponding touch switch, numeral
input, or character string input.*1
Device monitor function
Not possible
Possible*1
Recipe function
None
Possible
Accessible CS1 PC data areas
---
The data areas listed below can be
accessed in addition to the data areas
accessible with the NT30/NT30C.*5
- EM banks (EM_0 to EM_C)
- Timer completion flags (TU)
- Counter completion flags (CU)
- Work areas (WR)
- Task flags (TK)
- HR area
Screen data
capacity*2
Multiple lines can be displayed*1
ON/OFF switching is possible*1
Numeral display is possible*1
Character string display is possible*1
*1: These functions are available only in V2 versions of the NT631/NT631C.
*2: This is the capacity of the flash memory that stores screen data.
*3: The values are the same as the NT30/NT30C when the PT is in NT30/620 compatible mode.
*4: The window control area can be used only in the Vj versions of the NT631/NT631C.
For differences in programming, refer to Appendix B in the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.
7
Functions of the NT631/NT631C
Section
1-2-5 Principal Functions of NT631/NT631C
The following are the principal functions of the NT631/NT631C.
Functions relating to data display
Character display
Characters of various sizes can be displayed. Characters can be flashed and displayed in reverse
video. High grade fonts are available for the characters with their size enlarged.
Graphic display
Polylines, rectangles, polygons, circles, circular arcs, and sector shapes can be displayed. They can
also be tiled with various patterns, flashed, or displayed in reverse video.
Memory data display
The contents of character string memory tables and numeral memory tables can be displayed. The
contents of memory tables can be changed from the host.
Graph display
Not only bar graphs but also broken line graphs, trend graphs, and analogue meter graphs can be
displayed using numeral memory tables
Lamp display
Lamps can be turned on and flashed under the control of the host. It is also possible to display different
graphics in the ON and OFF states.
Alarm list/history display
Warning messages are automatically displayed in a list in response to the state of a host bit. The time
and the number of times of the messages appeared can also be displayed.
Functions relating to data output
Buzzer
A built-in buzzer can be sounded.
Screen printing
A hard copy of the currently displayed screen can be printed at the printer
connected to the NT631/NT631C.
8
1-2
Functions of the NT631/NT631C
Section
1-2
Functions relating to data input
Input by touch switches
Data can be input by simply touching touch switches displayed on the screen.
The possible functions of touch switches include sending data to the host and changing the screen display.
Inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when interlock bits have been allocated.
Pop-up window function
A window overlaying the currently displayed screen can be alternately opened and closed by pressing a touch switch.
In addition to fixed character and graphic displays, control keys and character keys created as touch switches can also be set
inside the window. A maximum of three windows can be displayed simultaneously. Since the window need only be opened when
input is required, the screen can be used efficiently.
Numeral/character string setting function
Numeric keys and character keys can be assigned to touch switches so that numeric values and character strings can be input at
the operation site.
The input data is written to numeral/character string memory tables and also sent to the host. It is also possible to disable input by
control from the host.
Recipe function
Several words of numeric data can be edited at the PT Unit, and written to or read from the host in one operation.
Input from a bar code reader
Data read with a bar code reader can be input to a character string input field.
Functions relating to communication
Communications with the host
The NT631/NT631C can communicate with the host by four methods: host link, 1:1 NT link, 1:N NT link (standard or
high-speed), and Memory link. Data can be read from the host, and data input by means of touch switches and numeral/character string settings can be sent to the host. It is also possible to connect with other model PCs.
Functions relating to the system
System menu
System settings and maintenance can be performed by selecting from system menus displayed on the screen.
Creation of screen data
Screen data created using the Support Tool at a personal computer can be transferred and stored in the built-in screen data
memory.
Resume function
The status and memory table contents of the NT631/NT631C immediately before its operation is stopped can be stored while
operation is stopped, or while the power is off, and then displayed on the screen again when operation is restarted.
Screen saver function
This function serves to extend the service life of the backlight and EL and prevent the formation of an afterimage on the screen.
Clock function
The time can be displayed in accordance with the internal clock data.
Programming Console function
When the NT631/NT631C is connected to a C series CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, or C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E programmable controller in an NT link (1:1) connection, and also is connected to CS1 series CS1G/CS1H in an NT link (1:N) connection, operations equivalent to those of a Programming Console (C200H-PR027-E) are possible.
Device Monitor function
When the PT is connected to a PC in a 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link, the PT can be used for operations such as changing the PC’s
operating mode, displaying or changing the PVs of words, or reading the error log.
System program install function
The system program of the NT631/NT631C can be changed by using the system installer supplied with the Support Tool (NTZJ3AT1/ZJCAT-EV2). It can also be installed by using a memory unit (NT-MF261).
Screen display history function/alarm history function
The screen display history function records the time at which specific screens are displayed and the number of times they are
displayed. The alarm history function records the time at which specific bits at the host are turned ON and the number of times
they are turned ON.
Trend graph logging function and background function
Changes in the contents of numeral memory tables displayed in trend graphs can be recorded (logging function). Also, the record
can be maintained even when the trend graph is not displayed (background function).
Mathematical function
This function allows calculations to be executed continuously during PT operation when mathematical table have been set in
screen data. Arithmetic operations, bit operations, logic operations, and comparison operations can be performed. Operations
with up to 5 terms are possible.
9
Section
Functions of the NT631/NT631C
1-2
1-2-6 Displays
The NT631/NT631C can display various kinds of elements such as characters,
numeric values, graphs, lamps, and touch switches, on a screen. The screen
data displayed by the NT631/NT631C are created by using the Support Tool at a
personal computer.
Characters
(fixed display)
Touch switches
Characters
(character string display)
Numeric values
(numeral display)
Bar graph
Lamps
Fixed Displays
Characters and various graphics (circles, circular arcs, sectors, polylines, polygons and rectangles) whose display does not have to be changed, and mark
data, image data, and library data that has already been registered, can be written directly onto the screen.
*
Circle
Arc
Sector
Polyline
Polygon
Rectangle
A continuous straight line
with up to 256 points can
be drawn.
*
A polygon with up to 255
vertices can be drawn.
Marks are graphics comprising 16 by 16 dots that can be used as characters.
They can be used as custom characters within character strings.
Image data are graphics comprising any required area of dots. They are registered in advance and as many as required can be displayed at any position on
the screen.
Windows bit map (BMP) data can be used for images.
There is a two-color mode, in which the display color and background color of the
image are specified when it is registered in a screen, and an eight-color mode in
which colors are assigned to the image in advance.
Since image data is composed of dots, it requires a large data size but offers
great powers of expression.
Library data are combinations of fixed display graphics registered as a single
graphic. They are registered in advance and as many as required can be displayed at any position on the screen.
10
Section
Functions of the NT631/NT631C
1-2
Since it is generated by combining graphics, library data has a small data size.
Mark
Lamps
Image data
Library data
These are graphics whose display status changes in accordance with the states
of bits at the host. Squares, circles, sectors and polygons can be used for lamps
(normal (standard) lamps). In accordance with the status of the host bit, they can
be lit (displayed in reverse video) or flashed (repeated alternation between normal and reverse video display states).
Lamps can also display different image/library data for the ON and OFF states of
the host bit (such lamps are called image/library lamps).
There are four standard lamp labels: fixed display character strings, ON/OFF
switching character strings, numeral displays, and character string displays.
When fixed display character strings or ON/OFF switching character strings are
used, several lines of labels can be displayed.
Normal (Standard) Lamps
ON
ON
Host
Unlit state
Lit state
Image/Library Lamps
ON
Unlit state
Touch Switches
Host
Lit state
These switches can be set at any location on the screen. Pressing a touch switch
on the screen where a touch switch has been set can have the following effects:
Notification to a host bit (input notification function)
Changing the displayed screen (screen switching function)
Input of a numeric value or character string (input key function)
Copying of a numeric value or character string (copy key function)
Shifting to another numeric value or character string input field (cursor moving key function)
Obtaining a hard copy of the screen (screen print function)
Opening / Closing a window
Moving a window
Touch switches can be made to light or flash in accordance with the status of a
host bit in the same way as lamps.
The following 8 types of display graphic can be used for touch switches:
Standard, shadow, 3-dimension, no display frame, rectangle, circle, polygon, sector
11
Section
Functions of the NT631/NT631C
1-2
When rectangle, circle, polygon, or sector is selected as the shape, the area
within which pressing of the touch switch is sensed (the touch switch area) can
be set independently of the position where the display graphic is set.
When this
position is
pressed...
Touch
switch area
Shown
in
reverse
video
Display
frame
Function executed
There are four touch-switch labels: fixed display character strings, ON/OFF
switching character strings, numeral displays, and character string displays.
When fixed display character strings or ON/OFF switching character strings are
used, several lines of labels can be displayed.
Numeral Display
Numeric values stored in the numeral memory tables are displayed. The displayed numerals can be changed by changing the data stored in the numeral
memory tables.
Hexadecimal values can also be displayed.
When decimal values are displayed, the number of digits for the integral part and
fractional part of displayed values can be specified in advance.
String Display
Character strings stored in the character string memory tables are displayed.
The displayed character strings can be changed by changing the data stored in
the character string memory tables.
Numeral Input
Numeric values can be input at the PT by using touch switches. The input numeric values can also be stored in a numeral memory table and notified to the
host.
Numeral inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when an interlock bit
has been allocated.
12345678
789
456
123
0. "
Input
Window
String Input
Character strings can be input at the PT by using touch switches, bar code readers, etc. The input character strings can also be stored in a character string
memory table and notified to the host.
String inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when an interlock bit
has been allocated.
Character string setting input field
Display
NT631C
Input
NT631C NT631 NT31C
Thumbwheel Switches
12
Numeric values can be input by incrementing or decrementing each digit with
the corresponding touch switch (+, –). The input numeric values can also be
stored in a numeral memory table and notified to the host.
Section
Functions of the NT631/NT631C
1-2
Thumbwheel switch inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when an
interlock bit has been allocated.
Graphs
These are graphics whose display changes in accordance with the numeric values stored in numeral memory tables. There are the following four types.
Bar graphs:
Bar graphs display the present value in a numeral memory table converted to a
percentage within the range –100% to +100% of a preset value.
60%
Analogue meter:
Analogue meters display, using a quarter, half, or full circle shape, the present
value in a numeral memory table converted to a percentage within the range
–100% to +100% of the preset value. Users can choose from moving pointer
type and filling area type displays. Users can also add graduation to the graph.
60%
Broken line graphs:
Broken line graphs display, in an easy-to-read form, a sequence of numeral
memory table values converted to a percentage within the range –100% to
+100% of a preset value.
100%
0%
–100%
Example showing a series of 11
numeral memory table values
(with a check mark set for the
display sign)
Trend graphs:
Trend graphs display chronological changes in the value in a numeral memory
table, converting the value to a percentage within the range –100% to +100% of
a preset value. The trend graph shifts position with the passage of time.
Past data can also be recorded, and the numeral memory table can be read
(sampled) even while the trend graph is not being displayed.
The user can choose to stop sampling, restart sampling, or display past data, by
pressing touch switches.
13
Section
Functions of the NT631/NT631C
Alarm List/History
1-2
The alarm list/history function displays messages in list form, or graphics
(image/library data), in accordance with changes in bit memory table statuses.
For the alarm list, a series of bit memory tables are monitored, and messages
(contents of character string memory tables) set for bit memory tables that come
ON are displayed.
For the alarm history, bit memory tables for which the history property is set are
continually monitored, and the time when they come ON and number of times
they come ON are recorded and displayed together with the message (character string) set for the bit memory table.
The NT631/NT631C allows selection of the display order as the newest record
first or the oldest record first by memory switch setting.
The alarm list function is used to determine which bits are ON at the present
time. The alarm history function is used to determine the times at which alarms
occurred in the past and how many times alarms have occurred
Alarm List
Message (character string table No. 32)
set for bit memory table No. 14
Character string table No. 32
Image/library
data 113C
No.13
Bit
Character string table No. 32
Image/library data 113C
No.14
Character string table No. 54
Image/library data 1125
No.15
0
1
0
Character string table No. 50
Image/library data 1002
HOST
A000000
L001003
D010015
1(ON)
When the message displayed is pressed, the image/library
data (113C) set for bit memory table No. 14 is displayed.
Alarm History
Message (character string table No. 13)
set for bit memory table No. 24
Recorded data
Character string table No. 13
Character string table No. 11
Image/library data 005F
No. 22
Bit memory table No. 24
97/12/04 11:19:20
Character string table No. 12
Image/library data 102A
No. 23
Bit memory table No. 23
97/12/04 11:25:12
Character string table No. 12
Image/library
data 102B
Character string table No. 13
Image/library data 102B
No. 24
When the upper message displayed is pressed, the image/library
data (102B) set for bit memory table No. 13 is displayed.
Recipe
14
You can set several words of numeric data at the PT in tabular format, and write it
to the host. You can also read several words of numeric data from the host and
display it on the PT screen.
Section
System Configuration
1-3
1-3
System Configuration
This section shows the configuration of a system that uses an NT631/NT631C.
For details on product models, refer to Appendix J Model List (page 273).
1-3-1 Peripheral Devices That Can Be Connected
The following peripheral devices can be connected to an NT631/NT631C.
Host
Controls the NT631/NT631C as required while controlling machines and
monitoring the production line.
Host Link:
CS1 series, C series, CVM1/CV series PC, SRM1
Can be connected to CPU units, host link units, and SRM1.
However, connection is not possible to some models of CPU
unit and SRM1 (pages 52 and 96).
NT link:
CS1G/CS1H, CPM1, CQM1, C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E,
CVM1/CV series PCs, SRM1
Can be connected to CPU units and SRM1. However,
connection is not possible to some models (pages 65, 69, 106
and 108).
Bar code reader
Bar codes can be read
as character strings.
RS-232C cable
(max. 15 m) or
RS-422A/485 cable
(max. 500 m)
Printer
Memory link: Can be connected to a personal computer, FA computer, etc.
Other companies’ PCs can also be connected.
Personal computer
For printing out the
currently displayed
NT631/NT631C screen.
Running Windows 95/98/NT
Support Tool
Used to create screens for the
NT631/NT631C at the personal
computer and transmit them to the
NT631/NT631C, and to make
NT631/NT631C settings.
System installer
Used to change the system
program of the NT631/NT631C.
Memory unit
NT631/NT631C
Can store screen data
and system program to
be read out
automatically at startup.
Displays production line monitoring and
instructions to the operation site, and
notifies the switch ON/OFF status and
numeric value inputs to the host.
When a 1:N NT Link is being used, up to
8 PTs can be connected to a single PC.
• Bar code reader (page 34)
• Recommended printers (page 33)
It is also possible to use printers that can emulate an NEC PC-PR201H (using the NEC PC-PR201PL control protocol), and printers that comply with
one of the following EPSON control standards: ESC/P 24-J83C (color), or
ESC/P 24-J82 (monochrome).
• Memory unit (pages 36 and 44)
• NT-MF261 (made by OMRON)
• Support Tool (page 33)
NT-series Support Tool Version 4.0 for Windows (Made by OMRON)
• NT-ZJCAT1-EV4 (CD-ROM version)
• System installer (page 33)
• System installer (made by OMRON)
The system installer is supplied as a standard accessory with the Support
Tool (NT-ZJCAT1-EV4).
15
Section
Communication with the Host
1-4
Reference: The following optional devices are available. All of them can be used either with
NT631 or NT631C.
Replacement backlight
Reflection-suppressing protective
sheet (5 pcs/set)
Chemical-resistant cover
Replacement battery
NT631C-CFL01 (for NT631C-ST151j)
NT631C-CFL02 (for NT631C-ST141j)
NT610C-KBA04
NT625-KBA01
3G2A9-BAT08
1-3-2 Connecting to the Host
The NT631/NT631C has the following two communication ports.
The serial port B is equipped with an RS-232C connector and an RS-422A/485
terminal block (selectable by memory switch).
Serial Port A:
D-SUB 9-pin connector
For RS-232C use only (The Support Tool and bar code readers can be connected here.)
Serial Port B:
D-SUB 9-pin connector for RS-232C use only (The Support Tool and bar code
readers can be connected here) or Terminal block for RS-422A/485 use only.
The host can be connected at either of these two ports.
The connection methods for each communication method at the PT and host
sides are indicated below. Make the settings in accordance with the communication method that can be used with the PC to be connected and the conditions at
the operation site.
Reference: When using an RS-232C/422A convertor unit (NT-AL001) with the host link or NT
link (1:1) communication method, RS-485 cannot be used. The connection must
be made with RS-232C or RS-422A.
1-4
Communication with the Host
The NT631/NT631C is connected to the host by one of the following communication methods.
The following communications can be used to connect an OMRON PC:
• Host Link
• 1:1 NT Link
• 1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed)
The following communications can be used to connect another companies’ PC
or FA computer:
• Communications protocol supported by the other company’s PC
• Memory link
In all of these communication methods that can be used with NT631/NT631C,
data communication with host is by direct connection (Memory link is, however,
a quasi-direct connection).
In the following, the host link and NT link that carry out the direct connection will
be discussed. Memory link will be explained in 1-5 Communications Using
Memory Links.
1-4-1 Direct Connection Function
With the NT631/NT631C, the bits and words referring to data required for display, and those for storing input data, can be allocated to any part of the PC
memory area.
16
Section
Communication with the Host
1-4
The NT631/NT631C can directly write to and read from such allocated bits and
words to change the display status of the elements on the PT screen, control the
PT operating status, and notify statuses to the host.
This function, which directly reads and writes the statuses of words and bits without using a PC program is called the direct connection function.
The words and bits allocated for direct connection are called the allocated words
and allocated bits.
The direct connection function allows the data to be displayed at the NT631/
NT631C to be read from the memory area in the PC and written to memory
tables in the NT631/NT631C. Also, the data input at the NT631/NT631C can be
written to the memory area in the PC. The NT631/NT631C screen can be
changed in accordance with statuses in the PC memory area, and the
NT631/NT631C’s status data can be written to the PC’s memory area.
NT631/NT631C
PC
DM area
I/O relay area
Auxiliary relay area Timers/counters
Features of the Direct
Connection Function
The direct connection function has the following features.
• The bits and words referring to operating status and work instruction information and those for storing input data can be freely allocated to almost any area
of the PC memory.
• Since the NT631/NT631C can directly refer to PC bit and word data without
using the program at the PC, it can be connected to the PC without changing
the PC program which controls the currently running production line.
• The area to control and notify the NT631/NT631C statuses, including display
screens, display/no display status, and buzzer output, can be freely allocated
to any part of the PC data area. This means that the PC status can be read and
controlled just by reading this area at the PC side, without preparing a special
communication program.
The direct connection function allows the NT631/NT631C to directly read and
write almost all bits and words in the PC and to automatically change the
NT631/NT631C screen display. This function can reduce the load on the PC so
that its program development efficiency is improved.
1-4-2 Host Link
The host is connected to a PT in a 1:1 connection, and the words and bits of the
host are read and displayed by host link communication. This method can be
used for connection to the majority of PC types.
1-4-3 NT Link
NT link is a method for high-speed communication with a PC using the direct
connection function. The PCs that can be connected with the NT link are as follows.
CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E,
CS1G/CS1H-E(V1), CVM1/CV-series PC (-EV1 or later version), SRM1
Besides the 1:1 NT link method, in which one PC is connected to one PT, the
NT631/NT631C can also use the 1:N connection NT link method, which allows a
maximum of eight PTs to be connected to one PC port.
PCs that can be connected with the 1:N connection NT Link method are as follows: CQM1H, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CS1G/CS1H-E(V1).
17
Communication with the Host
Section
1-4
The NT631/NT631C also supports OMRON’s high-speed 1:N NT Link that provides faster 1:N communications. The only PCs that support the high-speed 1:N
NT Link are the -EV1 and higher versions of the CS1G/CS1H PCs.
In the following sections, the term NT Link is used to refer to the NT Link communication method in general, the term 1:1 NT Link is used to refer specifically to
NT Links with a 1:1 connection, and the term 1:N NT Link is used to refer to both
standard and high speed NT Links with 1:N connections. When necessary, the
standard 1:N NT Link is distinguished from the high-speed 1:N NT Link.
Features of the NT Link
The NT link has the following features.
• High-speed communications with specific types of PCs can be executed. The
NT631/NT631C also supports OMRON’s high-speed 1:N NT Link.
• Writing in units of bits to the PC memory area is possible.
This enables the other bits of words to which a touch switch has been allocated to be allocated for other purposes (e.g. a lamp).
However, since data is written to the DM area in word units, the other bits of
words allocated to touch switches in this area cannot be used for other purposes.
• The NT link can be used even when the PC is in the RUN mode. (When the host
link method is used, the NT631/NT631C switches to the monitor mode when
the PC is in the RUN mode.)
• In the case of PTs that support the standard 1:N NT Link (NT20S, NT31,
NT31C, NT600S, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, NT631, NT631C) up to 8 PTs
can be connected to one port of the PC and used at the same time. Up to 8 PTs
(NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C) can also be connected simultaneously
when the high-speed 1:N NT Link is being used.
All of the PTs connected to a PC port must use either the standard or highspeed 1:N NT Link; the two communications systems cannot share a single
port.
• When using a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E PC and standard 1:N NT Links, up to
three 1:N NT Link systems (i.e., 24 PTs) can be connected by installing a communication board in the option slot of the CPU. (Only the standard 1:N NT Link
can be used.) For details on the Communications Board, refer to the SYSMAC
Communications Board Operation Manual (W304-E1-j).
• When using a CQM1H PC and standard 1:N NT Links, multiple 1:N NT Link
systems can be connected by installing Serial Communications Boards in the
Inner Board slots. For details on the Serial Communications Board, refer to the
CQM1H Serial Communications Board Operation Manual (W365-E1-j).
• When using CS1G/H, by installing a communication board in the INNER board
slot of the CPU or installing a serial communication unit in the base unit, multiple 1:N NT Link systems (standard or high-speed) can be connected. For details on the communication board/communication unit, refer to the CS1-series
Serial Communications Board/Unit Operation Manual (W336-E1-j).
• If the PC supports the Programming Console function, the NT631/NT631C
can be used as a Programming Console.
• If the PC supports the Device Monitor function, the NT631/NT631C can be
used to change the PC’s operating mode and read/change data in the PC’s
memory areas.
The NT link is compatible with the host link. The NT631/NT631C screen data
and PC programs used with the host link direct connection method can be used
with the NT link method as they are.
1-4-4 Connecting to Other Companies’ PCs
Installing a system program for multi-venders by using a specific system installer
enables the NT631/NT631C to be connected to the PCs of other models in direct
18
Section
Communications Using Memory Links
1-5
connection. This system installer is supplied with the Support Tool (NTZJCAT1-EV4).
Compatible PC
1-5
The NT631/NT631C can be connected to the following model PCs.
• Mitsubishi A series programmable controller (computer link module)
• Mitsubishi FX series programmable controller
• SLC 500 Series by Allen-Bradley
• 90-20 and 90-30 Series by GE Fanuc
• S7-300 and S7-400 Series by Siemens
For details on the procedure for connecting to other model PCs, refer to the PC
Connection Manual or NT31/631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual.
Communications Using Memory Links
In this section, a communication method other than the direct connection, called
the memory link, is discussed.
1-5-1 Memory Link
Memory link is a method to send and receive data between a personal computer
or a FA computer and the NT631/NT631C by using RS-232C/422A communication.
In memory link, there is an area called PT Memory, as shown below, inside the
NT631/NT631C, and this area is treated as a virtual area on the PC. This allows
PT memory and the display elements of the NT631/NT631C to make a quasi-direct connection. By sending a command for the memory link, the host can make
the NT631/NT631C execute processes through PT memory. Frequently used
commands are kept handy for read and write tasks of the numeral memory table,
character-string memory table, and bit memory table.
PT
PT memory
Numeral
memory
table
Lamp
Direct connection
RS-232C/422A
communication
In the memory link method, the only difference is that the NT631/NT631C finds
its communication target inside instead of outside. In the memory link method,
therefore, change of the target is all that is needed to be capable of using the
exact screen data that is acquired by the direct connection. (With the
NT631/NT631C, the Support Tool must be used to convert the data to screen
data for the memory link.)
When compared to the direct connection of the host link or NT link methods, the
memory link method has some restrictions regarding the use of some functions,
as described below.
• The Programming Console and Device Monitor functions cannot be used.
• The following strobes of PT status notify bits does not turn on (page 7 to 27).
• Screen switching strobe
• Numerals input strobe
• Character-string input strobe
• The usable area for allocation is the PT memory only.
1-5-2 Comparison between Direct Connection and Memory Link
The major differences between the direct connection and the memory link are as
follows:
19
Communications Using Memory Links
1, 2, 3...
Section
1-5
1. In the memory link method, the communication with the host should be carried out by using commands. Compared to the ordinal direct connection,
which can be used requiring almost no programs, the memory link method
requires a program that is necessary for interchange of commands.
This, however, gives advantages to the memory link method by using a
large variety of functions available in the direct connections from major models such as a personal computer and a FA computer equipped with
RS-232C/RS-422A communication means, allowing the PT to be suited for
larger usage.
2. Actual PCs have many kinds of areas, where as PT memory is a single area
with only one kind. When creating screen data by using the memory link
methods, it is always necessary to allocate display parts in the PT memory.
For communication between the host and the PT by the memory link method and
for handling screen display elements, refer to the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C
Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.
1-5-3 Memory Link Online Transfer Function
When memory link communications are being used, the NT631/NT631C can be
switched to Transmit mode from the host even if the NT631/NT631C is operating
and screen data can be written. (The NT631/NT631C can be returned to RUN
mode after the screen data is written.)
The memory link online transfer function can be used to replace screen data at a
fixed time each day or replace screen data with maintenance screen data for
maintenance.
For more details on the memory link online transfer function, refer to information
on the memory link online transfer function in the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C
Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.
20
Section
Before Operating
1-6
1-6
Before Operating
Follow the procedure given below to start the system of the NT631/NT631C.
Host
Support Tool
NT631/NT631C
Set the host settings.
• For the host link, refer to
pages 52 and 96, and
the manuals for the host
link unit and Programming Devices.
• For the NT link (1:1), refer to pages 65 and 106.
• For the NT link (1:N), refer to pages 69 and 108.
• For the high-speed NT
link (1:N), refer to pages
73 and 110.
• For the Memory link, refer to pages 69 and 112
Install the PT in the
operation panel.
Install the Support
Tool at the computer.
(Refer to the manual
for the Support Tool)
(page 30)
Connect the power supply.
(page 31)
Install the system program.*1
(refer to page 140 and the
Support Tool manual)
Make the settings in the
system installer mode.*2
(page 140)
Transmit the screen data.
Create the screens.
(Refer to the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C
Programmable Terminal Reference Manual
and the Support Tool Operation Manual.)
(page 144)
Set the memory switches.
(page 147)
Connect to the host.
Connect to the
NT631/NT631C.
When RS-232C used at the PT: refer to section 4
When RS-422A/485 used at the PT: refer to section 5
Create the host program.
Confirm the settings and
check communication.
Start operation.
*1: System program installation is only done in special circumstances, for example
when changing the system program, or to recover the original status of the
installed program. This operation is not normally necessary. When using other PC
models (sequencers), however, it is necessary to install specific system programs.
*2: Display of the system menu, and all change operations, can be inhibited. This
enables you to prevent the accidental deletion or alteration of screens and
settings.
Reference:
S For the system program, use the NT631/NT631C system program supplied as
an accessory with the NT-series Support Tool (NT-ZJCAT1-EV4).
S For the Support Tool, use NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.1).
Refer to the following manuals for the devices and software.
Device or Software
Manual Title
Manual Number
NT31/NT31C,
NT631/NT631C
Reference Manual
V064-E1-1
System Installer
NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.1) Operation Manual
V061-E1-j
Support Tool
NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.1) Operation Manual
V061-E1-j
21
Section
Before Operating
Device or Software
PCs
Manual Title
Manual Number
SYSMAC CPM1 Operation Manual
W262-E1-j
SYSMAC CPM1A Operation Manual
W317-E1-j
SYSMAC CPM2A Operation Manual
W352-E1-j
SYSMAC CPM2C Operation Manual
W356-E1-j
SYSMAC C200H Operation Manual (for CPU01/03/11) (programming)
W130-E1-j
SYSMAC C200H Operation Manual (for CPU21/23/31) (programming)
W217-E1-j
SYSMAC C200HS Installation Guide
W236-E1-j
SYSMAC C200HS Operation Manual (programming)
W235-E1-j
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) Installation Guide
W302-E1-j
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE Programming Manual
W303-E1-j
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE-Z Programming Manual
W322-E1-j
SYSMAC C1000H/C2000H Operation Manual (programming)
W140-E1-j
SYSMAC CQM1 Programming Manual
W228-E1-j
SYSMAC CQM1H Operation Manual
W363-E1-j
SYSMAC CVM1/CV500/CV1000/CV2000 Operation Manual: Ladder
Diagrams
W202-E1-j
CS1-series CS1G/H-CPU jj-E Programmable Controllers Operation
Manual
W339-E1-j
CS1-series Serial Communication Boards/Units Operation Manual
W336-E1-j
SYSMAC CQM1H Series Serial Communications Board Operation
Manual
W365-E1-j
CompoBus Master Control Unit
SRM1 Operation Manual
W318-E1-j
Programming
g
g Devices
SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: C-series PCs
W248-E1-j
SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: CVM1 PCs
W249-E1-j
SYSMAC CPT User Manual and Quick Start Guide
W332-E1-j
W333-E1-j
CX-Programmer User Manual
Host Link Units and
S i l Communications
Serial
C
i i
Boards
22
1-6
-
SYSMAC C-series Host Link Unit Operation Manual
W143-E1-j
SYSMAC CVM1/CV-series Host Link Operation Manual
W205-E1-j
SYSMAC C200HW-COM01 C200HW-COM02-V1 to C200HWCOM06-EV1 Serial Communications Board Operation Manual
W304-E1-j
SECTION 2
Preparing for Connection
This section describes the connection methods that are possible with the PT, and the functions of the parts of PT, as the required
knowledge before connecting to the host and to the peripheral devices.
2-1
2-2
Method for Connection to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Names and Functions of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
27
23
Section
Method for Connection to the Host
2-1
2-1
Method for Connection to the Host
This section describes the methods for connection to the host used with the
NT631/NT631C, and the relationship between the connection method and the
communication method.
NT631/NT631C Communication Ports and Communication Methods
The NT631/NT631C has two communication ports. Their uses are indicated in
the table below.
Communication Port
Usable Communication Methods
Communication Type
Serial port A
Host link
NT Link (1:1)
NT Link (1:N)
Memory link
(Support Tool connection)
(bar code reader input function)
RS-232C
Serial port
B
Host link
NT Link (1:1)
Connector
NT Link (1:N)
Memory link
RS-232C
(select between connector and terminal block)
Host link
NT Link (1:1)
NT Link (1:N)
RS-422A/485
(select between connector and terminal block)
Terminal
block
* There are two NT Link (1:N) communications rates: standard and high-speed.
Communication Methods That Can Be Used with the Host
The following communication methods can be used with the hosts that can be
connected to the NT631/NT631C.
• RS-232C
• RS-422A
• RS-485
The communication types that are actually supported differ depending on the
host unit. For details, refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the
RS-232C Port and Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.
Converting the Communication Type with an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor
Unit
The following communication type conversions are possible by using an
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001, made by OMRON).
• RS-232C ⇔ RS-422A
• RS-232C ⇔ RS-485
24
Section
Method for Connection to the Host
2-1
Combinations of Communication Method and Connection Method
The connection methods that can be used depending on the communication
method used and the communication type for communication between the
NT631/NT631C and the host are indicated in the table below.
Communica
Communication Type at
PT
Usable Communication
Method
Communica
Communication Type at
Host
Usable Connection Method
Details
Host
link
NT
Link
(1:1)
NT
Link
(1:N)
Memory
link
f
f
f
f
76
f
f
f
f
84
Direct 1:1 connection
PT
RS-232C
Host
RS-232C
RS-232C (max. 15 m)
1:1 connection via a convertor unit
PT
Convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
Host
RS-232C
(max. 2 m)
RS-422A
(max. 500 m)
1:N connection via a convertor unit
RS-232C
PT
Convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
RS-422A
(total length 500 m)
Host
88
f
RS-232C
(max. 2 m)
RS-422A
Direct 1:1 connection
PT
Host
f
f
f
f
112
RS-422A (max. 500 m)
1:N connection
RS-422A
PT
Host
RS-422A (total length 500 m)
f: Connection possible
f
116
: Connection not possible
25
Section
Method for Connection to the Host
Communica
Communication Type at
PT
2-1
Usable Communication
Method
Communica
Communication Type at
Host
Usable Connection Method
Host
link
NT
Link
(1:1)
NT
Link
(1:N)
Details
Memory
link
1:1 connection via a convertor unit
PT
Convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
RS-485
(max. 500 m)
Host
f
84
f
88
f
115
f
118
RS-232C
(max. 2 m)
1:N connection via a convertor unit
RS-232C
PT
Convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
RS-485
(total length 500 m)
Host
RS232C
(max. 2 m)
RS
485
RS-485
Direct 1:1 connection
PT
Host
RS-485 (max. 500 m)
1:N connection
RS-485
PT
Host
RS-485 (total length 500 m)
f: Connection possible
: Connection not possible
• The RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001) requires +5 V, 150 mA at
pin 6 of the RS-232C connector. Check the signals of the RS-232C connector
at the host.
• +5 V is not output from serial port B of the NT631/NT631C. When connecting
an NT-AL001 at serial port B, a separate power supply is required for the NTAL001.
• The cable of an NT-AL001 cannot be connected or disconnected while the
power is ON. Always connect or disconnect the cable while the power supply
from the RS-232C cable is OFF (while the host power supply is OFF).
• NT Link (1:N) connection is possible even when RS-232C is used at the
NT631/NT631C side for communication with the host, but in this case one NTAL001 unit is required for each NT631/NT631C. In this case, it is convenient to
use serial port A of the NT631/NT631C. +5 V is not output from serial port B.
26
Section
Names and Functions of Parts
2-2
2-2
Names and Functions of Parts
Before starting operation, the names and functions of the parts of the
NT631/NT631C are described here as a confirmation. A method of hardware
settings is also described.
Front View
POWER LED
Lit in green when the power is supplied.
POWER
RUN
RUN LED
• Lit in green while the unit
is in the RUN mode.
• Lit in orange or red when
the battery is low (orange
in the RUN mode, red in
other modes).
Display
Depending on the model, different display types are used.
• NT631-ST211j-EV2: Monochrome EL display
• NT631C-ST141j-EV2: STN color LCD display with backlight
• NT631C-ST151j-EV2: TFT color LCD high intensity display with backlight
The whole area of the screen is a touch panel which works as an input device.
Reference: The NT631/NT631C comes in two body colors.
NT631 (EL)
NT631C (STN)
NT631C (TFT)
Body Color
NT631-ST211-EV2
NT631C-ST141-EV2
NT631C-ST151-EV2
Beige
NT631-ST211B-EV2
NT631C-ST141B-EV2
NT631C-ST151B-EV2
Black
27
Section
Names and Functions of Parts
2-2
Rear View
Serial port B terminal block
Connect the cable for
RS-422A/485 connection to the
host here. Depending on the
setting made at the NT631/NT631C
system menu, communications
through RS-422A/485 are
available.
It is not possible to use this
terminal block and the serial port B
connector (9-pin) at the same time.
Reset switch (inside the cover)
Used to initializes all the statuses of the NT631/NT631C.
However, registered data such as screen data, and memory
switch settings, retain their statuses before initialization.
Warning label
Expansion interface connector
(under the label)
When using an expansion
interface unit such as a memory
unit, peel off the label and
connect it here.
RESET
RDA
TRM
RDB
SDA
SDB
GR terminal
Grounding terminal to prevent
malfunction due to noise.
RSA
RSB
24V
+DC
PRINTER
PORT B
PORT A
Power input terminals
Connect the power to
the NT631/NT631C at
these terminals.
Battery cover
The battery is secured
underneath this cover.
Serial port A connector
Connect the cable for connection to the
host or Support Tool here. A bar code
reader can also be connected here. This is
a 9-pin connector for RS-232C use only.
Serial port B connector
Connect the cable for RS-232C connection to the host here. Depending
on the setting made at the NT631/NT631C system menu,
communications through RS-232C are available. This is a 9-pin
connector for RS-232C use only.
It is not possible to use this connector and the serial port B terminal
block at the same time.
Printer connector
Connect the printer cable here. Output
conforms to Centronics specifications.
Note Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF or resetting.
28
SECTION 3
Hardware Settings and Connections
This section describes the settings of the NT631/NT631C and methods for connection to peripheral devices.
For details on the method for connection to the host, refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1
Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-2
Installation in the Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-3
Power Supply Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-4
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1
Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-1
Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-2
Setting a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-3
Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-1
Installation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-2
Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-1
Installation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-2
Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
30
30
31
32
33
33
33
34
34
35
36
36
37
38
44
45
46
29
Section
Installation
3-1
Note On unpacking the NT631/NT631C and peripheral devices, check their external
appearance and confirm that there is no damage. Also confirm that there is no
abnormal noise on shaking the unit lightly.
3-1
Installation
Install the NT631/NT631C in the operation panel and connect the power to the
NT631/NT631C as described below.
3-1-1 Installation Environment
Observe the following points when installing the PT in an operation panel.
Note
1. Do not install the unit at sites subject to the following conditions.
• Severe temperature variations
• Temperatures or humidities outside the ranges stated in the specifications
• High humidity, condensation
• Splashing chemical agents
• Severe oil splashing
• Corrosive or flammable gases
• Strong vibrations or shocks
• Direct exposure to wind and rain (outdoor sites)
• Strong ultra-violet irradiation
2. Take adequate measures to ensure shielding if the unit is used at a location
subject to any of the following conditions.
• Static electricity, or noise from other equipment
• Strong electromagnetic fields
• Nearby power cables
• Potential exposure to radioactivity
3-1-2 Installation in the Operation Panel
The NT631/NT631C is mounted in an operation panel by embedding it in the
panel.
Use the panel fittings and tool (Philips screwdriver) included in the product package and follow the procedure below.
1, 2, 3...
1. Open a hole of the dimensions shown below in the panel and install the
NT631/NT631C from the front side of the panel.
238
303
+ 0.5 mm
0 mm
+ 0.5 mm
0 mm
2. Attach the panel fittings at the following positions shown below, from the rear
of the NT631/NT631C.
Fit the hook of the fitting in the square hole in the body and tighten the screw
with the Philips head screwdriver while lightly pulling the fitting.
30
Section
Installation
3-1
Fittings at the two (:) positions are not necessary if you do not need it dust
proof and waterproof.
(:)
PRINTER
PORT B
PORT A
(:)
Note
1. During work at the panel, take care to ensure that no metal scraps enter the
unit.
2. The thickness of applicable operation panel is 1.6 mm to 4.8 mm. All fittings
must be tightened uniformly to a torque of 0.5 to 0.6 N⋅m in order to ensure
water- and dust-resistance. Front sheet of NT631/NT631C may be warped
if the tightening is too strong or not uniformity. The panel must not be soiled
or warped, and must be able to support an installation that will remain secure and strong.
3-1-3 Power Supply Connection
Connect a 24 VDC power supply to the power input terminals.
Note
1. Depending on how the power is switched ON/OFF, the entire system may
stop. Follow the correct procedure when switching the power ON/OFF.
2. Carefully check the wiring before switching ON the power.
3. Do not connect AC power to the DC terminals.
4. Use DC power supplies with low voltage fluctuation.
5. Do not perform a dielectric strength test.
6. If complying with EC directives (low voltage directives), the following points
must be noted (compliance with EC directives):
a) Use a power supply with reinforced insulation.
b) When installing NT631-ST211(B)-EV2 on the ultimate system, the rear
of the NT631 must be placed within an enclosure to restrict the operators’ use only to the front panel.
7. When using NT631-ST211(B)-EV2, warm-up time of the power supply must
be 200 ms or less. If longer than this, NT631 may not boot up.
24 VDC
Breaker
24 VDC
power supply
31
Section
Installation
3-1
Power Supply
The applicable power supply specifications are as follows.
Item
Value
Power supply
24 VDC
Allowable power supply voltage
fluctuation range
20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC (24 VDC –15%, +10%)
Power supply voltage capacity
NT631-ST211 (B)-V2:
30 W or more (Power supply warm-up
time within 200 ms.)
NT631C-ST141 (B) /ST151 (B)-V1 :
18 W or more
Parts Used for Connection
Note For the connection to the power supply terminal block, twisted wires of 2 mm2 or
greater cross sectional area and M3.5 size crimp terminals must be used.
Tighten the screws on the terminal block to a torque of 0.8 N⋅m.
Fork type
Round type
7 mm or less
7 mm or less
Recommended Terminals
Type
(fork type)
Type
(round type)
Japan Solderless Terminal MFG
2-YS3A
2-3.5
Fuji Terminal
2-YAS3.5
V2-S3.5
Nichifu Terminal
2Y-3.5
2-3.5
Maker
Applicable Wire
(stranded wire)
2.0 to 2.63 mm2
3-1-4 Grounding
The NT631/NT631C has a functional ground terminal (
).
Carry out wiring under the following conditions.
1, 2, 3...
1. In cases where the distance between the NT631/NT631C is small and it is
assumed that there is no potential difference between grounds, ground as
shown in Fig. (a) below.
2. In cases where there is a potential difference between the grounds of the
NT631/NT631C and the host, ground as shown in Fig. (b). If there is some
distance between the NT631/NT631C and host and grounding at a single
point is difficult, do not connect the functional ground terminal ( ) of the
NT631/NT631C.
3. If the NT631/NT631C is installed in the same panel as equipment that generates noise, such as a motor or inverter, do not ground the functional
ground terminal ( ) of the NT631/NT631C.
NT631/
NT631C
Host
Ground to
100 Ω max.
Fig. (a)
NT631/
NT631C
Host
Grounding at a single point
Fig. (b)
Note Carry out grounding correctly in order to prevent operating errors due to noise.
32
Section
Connecting a Printer
3-2
3-3
Connecting to the Support Tool
In order to install the system program in the NT631/NT631C, or to transmit
screen data created with the Support Tool to the NT631/NT631C, the
NT631/NT631C must be connected to a personal computer with an RS-232C
cable.
The NT631/NT631C connects the RS-232C cable from a personal computer at
serial port A. When the host is connected at serial port B, the connection with the
host can be maintained as it is while the NT631/NT631C is connected to the
RS-232C cable from a personal computer.
However, when a bar code reader is being used, it must be disconnected, so that
the RS-232C cable can be connected, since they both use serial port A.
PRINTER
PORT B PORT A
Serial port A
(RS-232C, 9-pin)
Communication Conditions
The communication conditions are automatically set when the system installer
and Support Tool are started.
Recommended Connector Cable
Use the cable indicated below.
• CV500-CN228 (length: 2 m), made by OMRON
(D-SUB 9-pin, male ⇔ D-SUB 25-pin, male)
• XW2Z-S001 (conversion cable), made by OMRON
(D-SUB 25-pin, female ⇔ half pitch 14-pin, male)
• XW2Z-S002 (length: 2 m), made by OMRON
(D-SUB 9-pin, male ⇔ D-SUB 9-pin, female)
For details on making a connector cable, refer to Appendix F Making the Cable
for Connecting a PC (page 263).
3-3
Connecting a Printer
Connecting a printer to the NT631/NT631C enables printing of hard copies of
the currently displayed screen (printing of screen images), and, by system menu
operations, printing of the screen display history and alarm history.
The following types of data can be printed, depending on the printer connected
to the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to the pages cited.
• Hard copies of the screen (Refer to information on printing data and checking
the printer status in the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.)
• Screen display history record data (page 188)
• Alarm history record data (page 190)
3-3-1 Connection Method
Connect the printer to the NT631/NT631C with a Centronics cable, as shown
below. The length of the cable should not exceed 1.5 m.
33
Section
Connecting a Bar Code Reader
3-4
Reference: If the connector cable is connected or disconnected while the power to the printer
is on, the NT631/NT631C may malfunction. Always turn off the power to the printer before connecting or disconnecting the cable.
PRINTER
PORT B
PORT A
Recommended Connector Cable
The following connection cables are recommended.
NT-CNT121 (1.5 m, 20-pin to 36-pin), made by OMRON
Recommended Printers
When using a printer, use one that can emulate an NEC PC-PR201H (using
the NEC PC-PR201PL control protocol) or complies with one of the following EPSON control standards: ESC/P 24-J83C (color), or ESC/P 24-J82
(monochrome).
When using a monochrome printer with an NT631C, set Tone printing with
the NT631C memory switches (page 164).
3-4
Connecting a Bar Code Reader
Connecting a bar code reader to the NT631/NT631C enables bar code data to
read as character strings into character string input fields, and set in character
string memory tables.
In order to use a bar code reader, the Comm. A Method memory switch must be
set to Bar-Code Reader.
For details on the method for inputting character strings with a bar code reader,
refer to 3-7 Input of Numeric values and Character Strings in the NT31/NT31C/
NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.
Note Make sure that the power supply to the bar code reader and the power supply to
the PT are both OFF before connecting or disconnecting the cable.
3-4-1 Connection Method
Connect the bar code reader to serial port A of the NT631/NT631C, as shown in
the figure below.
NT631/NT631C
Bar code reader
PRINTER
9-pin connector
PORT B PORT A
Serial port A
(RS-232C, 9-pin)
Connector cable
Bar code reader cable
Bar code reader must match the communication setting (3-4-2 Setting a Bar
Code Reader, page 35) and data format (3-4-3 Data Format, page 36) in order to
connect to the NT631/NT631C. Please confirm the specification of the bar code
reader before using.
34
Section
Connecting a Bar Code Reader
3-4
For details on making a connector cable, refer to Appendix G Making the Cable
for Connection to a Bar Code Reader (page 265).
Reference: The bar code reader must be connected to serial port A. This means that it cannot
be connected at the same time as the Support Tool. Note also that when a bar
code reader is used, the host must be connected at serial port B.
3-4-2 Setting a Bar Code Reader
After connecting a bar code reader, set the communication conditions and other
settings for it by selection from the system menu.
Settings at the
NT631/NT631C
At the NT631/NT631C, set the communication conditions for communication
with the bar code reader by using the memory switches, selecting from the options indicated in the table below.
For more detailed information on the actual system menu operations, refer to
6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function (page 177).
Item
Settings at the Bar Code
Reader
Possible Settings
Default Setting
Data bits
7 or 8 bits
7 bits
Stop bit(s)
1 or 2 bits
2 bits
Parity
None, odd, even
Even
Communications speed 4800, 9600, 19200 bps
9600 bps
Input Method
Manual
Manual, Auto
Make the settings shown in the table below at the bar code reader. Make sure
that the communications speed, parity, stop bit, and data bit settings match the
communication settings made at the NT631/NT631C. For details on the setting
method, refer to the instruction manual for the bar code reader used.
Item
Possible Settings
Communications speed
4800, 9600, 19200 bps
Parity
EVEN, ODD, NONE
Stop bits
1 or 2 bits
Data bits
7 or 8 bits
Preamble
STX
Postamble
ETX
RS/CS control
Available
Communication protocol
No-protocol mode
Transmission of number of bar code label digits
Transmission prohibited
Transmission of ID characters
Transmission prohibited
Bar code types
Multi-reading (all types can be
read)
Trigger switch setting
Automatic reading mode
About RS/CS Control
During bar code reading, the NT631/NT631C performs RS/CS control. When
the Input Method setting of the NT631/NT631C is set to Auto, the RS signal is
turned OFF, prohibiting the next input, until the read data has been notified to the
host.
Because of this, when the Auto setting is made, the next input is not possible
until the data has been notified to the host.
However, when the setting is Auto and the RS/CS signals of the cable are
shorted, RS/CS control is ineffective. Consequently, data input from the bar
code reader to the NT631/NT631C is updated regardless of whether or not the
data is notified to the host.
35
Section
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
3-5
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the bar code reader used.
3-4-3 Data Format
The data format for communication when using the bar code input function of the
NT631/NT631C is shown below.
STX
Data
Data
Data
(02H)
ETX
(03H)
The characters which are effective as data are hexadecimal codes from 20 to
7FH, and the maximum data length is 40 bytes.
Data which does not follow the data format described above is invalidated and
discarded.
3-5
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
This section discusses the use of a memory unit with a V1 or V2 version of
an NT631/NT631C PT (NT631-ST211j-EVj/NT631C-ST141j-EVj/
NT631C-ST151j-EVj).
Reference: Depending on the PT model and the system program which is installed, the function and using method of memory unit varies as follows.
PT Model
Without
Vj suffix
With Vj
suffix
System Program
Function of Memory Unit
Earlier than Ver. 2
Conventional memory unit function. (Refer to 56.)
(System programs can not be transmitted using
memory unit.)
Ver. 2 or later
Earlier than Ver. 2
Ver. 2 or later
New memory unit function.
(System programs can be transmitted using
memory unit.)
The memory unit functions are determined by the model of PT being used, regardless of the version of the system program installed in the PT.
By installing a memory unit (NT-MF261) on the NT631/NT631C, the screen data
in the NT631/NT631C can be recorded (backed up) in the memory unit.
In addition, the screen data in the memory unit can be automatically read into the
NT631/NT631C when it starts up. This means that system program and screen
data can be changed easily at the operation site without connecting to the Support Tool.
The data in the memory unit is retained without backup by a battery or other
means.
In systems where there are frequent setup changes, by preparing a number of
memory units in advance and recording screen data in them in accordance with
the control performed in each case, the NT631/NT631C screen data can be
changed simply by installing the memory unit, without connecting to the Support
Tool.
In addition, even if NT631/NT631C is replaced, the previous status can be maintained simply by installing the memory unit that retains the system program and
screen data of the previous NT631/NT631C.
By using the following combinations, data can be stored (backed up) to a
memory unit.
• Screen data for two PTs.
• System program for two PTs.
• System program and screen data for one PT.
36
Section
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
3-5
One memory unit can store the screen data for two PTs.
Note
1. Make sure that the power supply to the PT is OFF before connecting or disconnecting a memory unit.
After mounting a memory unit, be sure to tighten its two screws.
2. During data transmission, do not turn off the power supply to the
NT631/NT631C or reset it.
3. Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) with bare hands.
Reference:
S When a memory unit is mounted, the NT631/NT631C cannot be set to the operating status. On completion of data transmission with a memory unit, always
disconnect the memory unit from the NT631/NT631C before starting
NT631/NT631C operation.
S Memory units (NT-MF261) can be used in common for the following PT models: NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C (with and without Vj). One memory
unit can store screen data for up to two PTs of different models. However, since
the data compatibility is not complete between NT31/NT31C and
NT631/NT631C, an error may occur if an attempt is made to read NT631C data
with an NT31C. (The data must be converted using the Support Tool.)
Note also that although there is data compatibility between the NT31 and
NT31C, and between the NT631 and NT631C, the display may not be correct since these models have different numbers of colors.
S One memory unit can store a system program for up to two PTs of different
models. In order to transmit a system program from the memory unit to the
NT631/NT631C, the system program must be compatible to the target PT
model.
S The statuses of memory switch settings and system settings can be recorded
to the memory unit besides screen data. When the data in the memory unit is
written into the NT631/NT631C, make sure that these settings can be adapted
to the NT631/NT631C used before transmission.
3-5-1 Installation Method
Install the memory unit (NT-MF261) at the expansion interface connector at the
rear of the NT631/NT631C as shown in the figure below (the expansion interface
connector is located underneath the note label.).
Mounting screws
37
Section
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
3-5
3-5-2 Method of Use
As shown in the figure below, a memory unit has two sets of four DIP switches,
and the operation is determined by the DIP switches that are set at startup.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Factory setting is turned all to off.
OFF
OFF
SW1
Note
SW2
1. Always confirm that the power to the NT631/NT631C is off before setting the
DIP switches.
2. Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) directly with bare hands.
DIP Switch Functions
The functions of the DIP switches on the memory unit are indicated in the table
below.
SW1
Switch
Function
SW1 1
SW1-1
Automatic transmission (writing from the memory
unit to the PT)
OFF: Not executed
SW1 2
SW1-2
Automatic transmission (writing from the PT to the
memory unit)
OFF: Not executed
SW1 3
SW1-3
Manual transmission (Direction of transmission and
bank used selected at the PT touch panel)
OFF: Not executed
SW1-4
Data type to transfer
ON : Executed
ON : Executed
ON : Executed
OFF: Screen data
ON : System program
SW2
Switch
Function
SW2 1
SW2-1
Disable/enable writing to PT
SW2 2
SW2-2
Disable/enable writing to the memory unit
SW2 3
SW2-3
Area (bank) selection of automatic transmission
transmission. *
SW2 4
SW2-4
System/Screen simultaneous transmission
OFF: Disable
ON : Enable
OFF: Disable
ON : Enable
OFF: Bank 0
ON : Bank 1
OFF: Disable
ON : Enable
* The memory unit stores system program or screen data for one PT in each of
areas (bank 0, bank 1). (The total data storage is for two PTs.) SW2-3 sets which
of these two banks is used for automatic transmission.
Reference:
38
S The DIP switch function of the memory unit is supplemented to
NT631/NT631C With Vj.
Section
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
Reference:
3-5
S The DIP switch function of the memory unit is supplemented in the
NT631/N6T31C PTs with the Vj suffix.
S In the following cases, a mode setting error occurs.
• More than one of the SW1-1 to SW1-3 switches are set to ON.
• None of the SW1-1 to SW1-3 switches are set to ON.
S In the following case, a protect setting error occurs.
Transmitting to the write destination has been disabled by the setting for
SW2-1 or SW2-2.
S In the following cases, a data transmission error occurs.
• An attempt is made to transmit data other than the system program to PT
system program area.
• An attempt is made to transmit the system program to PT screen data
area.
S For details on mode setting errors and protect setting errors, refer to Errors
When Using a Memory Unit (page 43).
Writing Screen Data to a
Memory Unit Using
Automatic Transmission
(PT to Memory Unit)
In this mode, system program or the screen data in the NT631/NT631C is forcibly written to the memory unit irrespective of the setting status of the
NT631/NT631C.
This mode is convenient if the touch panel is broken and touch switch operation
is not possible, or if someone unfamiliar with touch switch operation at the operation site is using the system.
Reference: When screen data is written to the memory unit, the data that has been stored in
the specified area up until that point is lost (if the data is written into only one
Bank, the other Bank will not be affected).
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the NT631/NT631C to
the memory unit by automatic transmission.
1, 2, 3...
1. Check that the power supply to the NT631/NT631C is OFF, then set the DIP
switches of the memory unit as follows after installing memory unit to
NT631/NT631C.
SW1
SW2
SW2-4 ON: System/Screen transmitted simultaneously
OFF: System/Screen not transmitted simultaneously
SW2-3 ON: Bank 1
OFF: Bank 0
SW1-4 ON: System program
OFF: Screen data
It is not strictly necessary to set SW2-1 to OFF (to disable writing to the PT),
but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the event of operating
errors.
Reference:
S Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables
the setting of SW1-4.
S Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables
the setting of SW2-3, writes the system program into bank 0, and the screen
data into bank 1 at all times.
39
Section
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
3-5
2. Switch the NT631/NT631C power ON.
The screen data is automatically written into the memory unit. The screen
data in the NT631/NT631C is preserved.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying, and Finished are displayed on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing.
At the same time, the progress of the data writing status is displayed by the
means of the number of bytes and blocks (1 bank = 16 block = 1024k byte).
RUN LED operates as follows according to the processing status.
Preparing
Transmitting
Verifying
Finished
: flashes at intervals of 1 second
: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
: lights up
3. Switch the NT631/NT631C power OFF, remove the memory unit.
To operate NT631/NT631C continuously, switch the NT631/NT631C power
back ON.
Writing Screen Data to
the PT Using Automatic
Transmission (Memory
Unit to PT)
In this mode, the system program or screen data in the memory unit is forcibly
written to NT631/NT631C irrespective of the setting status of the
NT631/NT631C.
Since data transmission by this method is faster than when the Support Tool or
system installer is used, it can save a lot of time. When transmitting the same
system program or screen data to multiple NT631/NT631C, this mode becomes
convenient.
Reference: When data is written to the NT631/NT631C, the data that has been stored up until that point is lost. When the system program is changed, the operation of
NT631/NT631C also changes.
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the memory unit to the
NT631/NT631C by automatic transmission.
1, 2, 3...
1. Check that the NT631/NT631C power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on
the memory unit as follows after installing memory unit to NT631/NT631C.
SW1
SW2
SW2-4 ON: System/Screen transmitted simultaneously
OFF: System/Screen not transmitted simultaneously
SW2-3 ON: Bank 1
OFF: Bank 0
SW1-4 ON: System program
OFF: Screen data
It is not strictly necessary to set SW2-2 to OFF (to disable writing to the
memory unit), but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the
event of operating errors.
40
Section
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
Reference:
3-5
S Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables
the setting of SW1-4.
S Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables
the setting of SW2-3. In this case, the data transmission becomes possible
only if the data inside memory unit is in either of following combinations.
Bank 0: system program, Bank 1: other than system program
Bank 0: other than system program, Bank 1: system program
If the combination is not as listed above, a data transmitting error occurs.
S When writing the system program into the NT631/NT631C, the type of system
program inside memory unit and the type of PT unit must be corresponding.
2. Switch the NT631/NT631C power ON.
The screen data is automatically written into the PT.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying and Finished are displayed on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing.
At the same time, the progress of data writing status is displayed by the
means of the number of bytes and blocks (1 bank = 16 block = 1024k byte).
The RUN LED operates as follows according to the processing status.
Preparing
Transmitting
Verifying
Finished
: flashes at intervals of 1 second
: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
: lights up
3. Switch the NT631/NT631C power OFF, remove the memory unit.
To operate NT631/NT631C continuously, switch the NT631/NT631C power
back ON.
Reading and Writing Data
by Manual Transmission
In this method, the direction of transmission and area of the memory unit used
are set by touch switch operations at the NT631/NT631C. Transmission can be
executed while checking the settings.
Reference: When data is written to the NT631/NT631C or memory unit, the data that has
been stored up until that point is lost.
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to write screen data using manual transmission.
1, 2, 3...
1. Check that the NT631/NT631C power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on
the memory unit as follows.
SW1
SW2
Setting of SW2-4 not relevant
Setting of SW2-3 not relevant
Setting of SW1-4 not relevant
In order to avoid loss of data in the event of operating errors, it is advisable to
set SW2-1 and SW2-2 so as to disable writing to the unit from which the data
is to be read.
2. Switch the NT631/NT631C power ON.
41
Section
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
3-5
Display language select screen appears.
3. Press the Japanese or English touch switches to select the display language.
The following descriptions are for when English is selected.
The screen shown below is displayed.
Current PT Screen Data, System
The first line:
Compatible PT type for the system program inside PT.
The second line: System program name and Version for the system program
inside PT.
(The second line may not be displayed in the kind of system program.)
Current PT Screen Data, Screen
The comment for the screen data in the NT631/NT631C is displayed here.
Current Memory Unit Screen Data
• In the case of system program:
The first line:
Compatible PT type for the system program inside the
memory unit.
The second line: System program name and Version for the system program inside the memory unit.
(The second line may not be displayed in the system program for some
models.)
• In the case of screen data:
The comment for the screen data in the NT631/NT631C is displayed here.
The available transmitting destinations are altered depending on the settings of
the origin of transmitting as described in the table below.
Source
PT screen
Destination
Memoryy unit Bank 0
PT system
PT system/screen
42
Memory unit Bank 0/1 (fixed)
Memoryy unit Bank 1
Section
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
Source
Memory unit Bank 0
Memory unit Bank 1
Memory unit Bank 0/1
Reference:
3-5
Destination
S If system program is selected
PT system
y
((fixed))
S If screen data is selected
PT screen (fixed)
PT system/screen (fixed)
S When transmitting the system program and screen data simultaneously from
the PT to the memory unit, the setting of banks is Bank 0: system program,
Bank 1: screen data, and when transmitting them from the memory unit to the
PT, either of the following combinations must be used.
Bank 0: system program, Bank 1: other than system program
Bank 0: other than system program, Bank 1: system program
S When writing the system program into the NT631/NT631C, the type of system
program inside memory unit and the type of PT unit must be corresponding.
4. Press Execute.
The data is transmitted.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying, and Finished are displayed in accordance with the progress of data transmission. At the same
time, the progress of data transmitting status is displayed by the means of
the number of bytes and blocks (1 bank = 16 block = 1024k byte).
When the data transmission is operated manually, RUN LED remains OFF.
5. Switch the NT631/NT631C power OFF, remove the memory unit, then
switch the NT631/NT631C power back ON.
Errors When Using a
Memory Unit
If an error occurs when using the memory unit, the NT631/NT631C operates as
follows.
• The details of the error and remedial action are displayed on the screen.
Each screen has touch switches to change the display language from one to
the other. When the manual data transmission is operating, the content of
error and remedial action are shown with selected language. When the automatic transmission is operating, it is displayed in Japanese.
• The continuous buzzer sounds.
• The RUN LED flashes.
If a protect setting error occurs when executing manual transmission, it is possible to return to the memory unit manual transmission screen by pressing the
OK touch switch, but in the case of other errors, the status described above remains in effect until the NT631/NT631C power is turned OFF or reset.
When an error occurs, take remedial action by referring to the table below.
Error
Probable Cause
Remedial Action
Mode setting error
DIP switches SW1-1 to
SW1-3 are all OFF, or
more than one is ON.
Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, set the memory unit DIP
switches correctly, then turn the
NT631/NT631C power back ON.
Protect setting error
(automatic
transmission)
Writing to the data write
destination has been
prohibited by the setting
of SW2-1 or SW2-2.
Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, set the memory unit DIP
switches correctly, then turn the
NT631/NT631C power back ON.
43
Section
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)
3-6
3-6
Error
Probable Cause
Remedial Action
Protect setting error
(manual
transmission)
Writing to the data write
destination has been
prohibited by the setting
of SW2-1 or SW2-2.
Perform either of the following
procedures.
S Press the OK touch switch to return to the memory unit manual
transmission screen, make the
correct settings, then try again.
S Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, correct the DIP switches
settings of the memory unit, then
turn the power back ON.
Flash memory error
An error occurred during
initialization of the
NT631/NT631C or
memory unit flash
memory, or during write
processing.
Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, then back ON. If the error
recurs, the flash memory at the
write destination may be faulty. In
this case, replace the unit.
Verify error
An error occurred during
verification processing at
the flash memory of the
NT631/NT631C or the
memory unit.
Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, then back ON. If the error
recurs, the flash memory at the
write destination may be faulty. In
this case, replace the unit.
Transmitting data
error
(The automatic
transmission only)
An attempt is made to
transmit data other than
a system program or the
system program of a
different PC model into
the NT631/NT631C as
the system program.
An attempt is made to
write a system program
into the NT631/NT631C
as screen data.
Perform either of the following
procedures.
S Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, correct the DIP switch settings of the memory unit, and
then turn the power back ON.
S Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, set the DIP switch settings
to the manual transmission, and
then check the data inside the
memory unit.
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)
This section discusses the use of a memory unit with the basic versions of the
NT631/NT631C PTs (NT631-ST211j-E, NT631C-ST141j-E, and
NT631C-ST151j-E.)
Reference: In this case, the function and use of the memory unit are the same as ones for the
NT631/NT631C without Vj. (The system program transmission by using a
memory unit cannot be processed.)
By installing a memory unit (NT-MF261) on the NT631/NT631C, the screen data
in the NT631/NT631C can be recorded (backed up) in the memory unit.
In addition, the screen data in the memory unit can be automatically read into the
NT631/NT631C when it starts up. This means that screen data can be changed
easily at the operation site without connecting to the Support Tool.
The data in the memory unit is retained without backup by a battery or other
means.
In systems where there are frequent setup changes, by preparing a number of
memory units in advance and recording screen data in them in accordance with
the control performed in each case, the NT631/NT631C screen data can be
changed simply by changing the memory unit, without connecting to the Support
Tool.
One memory unit can store the screen data for two PTs.
44
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)
Note
Section
3-6
1. Make sure that the power supply to the PT is OFF before connecting or disconnecting a memory unit. After mounting a memory unit, be sure to tighten
its two screws.
2. During data transmission, do not turn off the power supply to the
NT631/NT631C or reset it.
3. Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) with bare hands.
Reference:
S When a memory unit is mounted, the NT631/NT631C cannot be set to the operating status. On completion of data transmission with a memory unit, always
disconnect the memory unit from the NT631/NT631C before starting
NT631/NT631C operation.
S Memory units (NT-MF261) can be used in common for the following PT models: NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C (with and without Vj). One memory unit
can store screen data for up to two PTs of different models. However, since the
data compatibility is not complete between NT31/NT31C and NT631/NT631C,
the data of NT631 cannot be used in NT31C without putting it through a conversion (the data must be converted using the Support Tool).
Note also that although there is data compatibility between the NT31 and
NT31C, and between the NT631 and NT631C, the display may not be correct
since these models have different numbers of colors.
The screen data for NT631/NT631C PTs with system program Ver. 2 or later
cannot be used with PTs with system program earlier than Ver. 2.
S The statuses of memory switch settings and system settings can be recorded
to the memory unit besides screen data. When the data in the memory unit is
written into the NT631/NT631C, make sure that these settings can be adapted
to the NT631/NT631C used before transmission.
3-6-1 Installation Method
Install the memory unit (NT-MF261) at the expansion interface connector at the
rear of the NT631/NT631C as shown in the figure below. (The expansion interface connector is located underneath the note label.)
Mounting screws
45
Section
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)
3-6
3-6-2 Method of Use
As shown in the figure below, a memory unit has two sets of four DIP switches,
and the operation is determined by the DIP switches that are set at startup.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Factory setting is turned all to off.
OFF
OFF
SW1
Note
DIP Switch Functions
SW2
1. Always confirm that the power to the NT631/NT631C is off before setting the
DIP switches.
2. Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) directly with bare hands.
The functions of the DIP switches on the memory unit are indicated in the table
below.
SW1
Switch
Function
SW1 1
SW1-1
Automatic transmission (writing from the memory
unit to the PT)
OFF: Not executed
SW1 2
SW1-2
Automatic transmission (writing from the PT to the
memory unit)
OFF: Not executed
SW1 3
SW1-3
Manual transmission (Direction of transmission and
bank used selected at the PT touch panel)
OFF: Not executed
SW1-4
Reserved for system use (must be set to OFF)
ON : Executed
ON : Executed
ON : Executed
SW2
Switch
Function
SW2 1
SW2-1
Disable/enable writing to PT
SW2 2
SW2-2
Disable/enable writing to the memory unit
SW2 3
SW2-3
Area (bank) selection of automatic transmission
transmission.
OFF: Disable
ON : Enable
OFF: Disable
ON : Enable
OFF: Bank 0
ON : Bank 1
SW2-4 Reserved for system use (must be set to OFF)
* The memory unit stores screen data for one PT in each area (bank 0, bank 1).
(The total data storage is for two PTs.) SW2-3 sets which of these two banks is
used for automatic transmission.
Reference:
S In the following cases, a mode setting error occurs.
• More than one of the SW1 switches are set to ON.
• None of the SW1 switches are set to ON.
S In the following case, a protect setting error occurs.
Writing to the write destination has been disabled by the setting for SW2-1 or
SW2-2.
S For details on mode setting errors and protect setting errors, refer to Errors
When Using a Memory Unit (page 3 to 25).
Writing Screen Data to a
Memory Unit Using
Automatic Transmission
(PT to Memory Unit)
46
In this mode, the screen data in the NT631/NT631C is forcibly written to the
memory unit irrespective of the setting status of the NT631/NT631C.
This mode is convenient if the touch panel is broken and touch switch operation
is not possible, or if someone unfamiliar with touch switch operation at the operation site is using the system.
Section
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)
3-6
Reference: When screen data is written to the memory unit, the data that has been stored in
the specified area up until that point is lost (there is no effect on the other area).
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the NT631/NT631C to
the memory unit by automatic transmission.
1, 2, 3...
1. Check that the power supply to the NT631/NT631C is OFF, then set the DIP
switches of the memory unit as follows after installing the memory unit in
NT631/NT631C.
1
2
3 4
1
2
3
4
OFF
OFF
SW1
SW2
SW2-3
ON: Bank 1
OFF: Bank 0
It is not strictly necessary to set SW 2-1 to OFF (to disable writing to the
memory unit), but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the
event of operating errors.
2. Switch the NT631/NT631C power ON.
The screen data is automatically written into the memory unit. The screen
data in the NT631/NT631C is preserved.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying, and Finished are displayed on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing.
When messages Preparing, Transmitting, and Verifying are displayed, the
RUN LED flashes, and when the message Finished is displayed, the RUN
LED lights.
3. Switch the NT631/NT631C power OFF, remove the memory unit. To operate NT631/NT631C continuously, switch the NT631/NT631C power back
ON.
Writing Screen Data to
the PT Using Automatic
Transmission (Memory
Unit to PT)
In this mode, screen data is forcibly written from the memory unit to the
NT631/NT631C irrespective of the setting status of the NT631/NT631C.
Since data transmission by this method is faster than when the Support Tool is
used, it can save a lot of time. When transmitting the same system program or
screen data to multiple NT631/NT631C, this mode becomes convenient.
Reference: When data is written to the NT631/NT631C, the data that has been stored up until that point is lost.
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the memory unit to the
NT631/NT631C by automatic transmission.
1, 2, 3...
1. Check that the NT631/NT631C power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on
the memory unit as follows after installing the memory unit in
NT631/NT631C.
1
2
3 4
1
2
3
4
OFF
OFF
SW1
SW2
SW2-3
ON: Bank 1
OFF: Bank 0
It is not strictly necessary to set SW2-2 to OFF (to disable writing to the
memory unit), but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the
event of operating errors.
47
Section
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)
3-6
2. Switch the NT631/NT631C power ON.
The screen data is automatically written into the PT.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying and Finished are displayed on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing.
When messages Preparing, Transmitting, and Verifying are displayed, the
RUN LED flashes, and when the message Finished is displayed, the RUN
LED lights.
3. Switch the NT631/NT631C power OFF, and remove the memory unit.
To operate NT631/NT631C continuously, switch the NT631/NT631C power
back ON.
Reading and Writing Data
by Manual Transmission
In this method, the direction of transmission and area of the memory unit used
are set by touch switch operations at the NT631/NT631C. Transmission can be
executed while checking the settings.
Reference: When data is written to the NT631/NT631C or memory unit, the data that has
been stored up until that point is lost.
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to read and write screen data using manual transmission.
1, 2, 3...
1. Check that the NT631/NT631C power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on
the memory unit as follows.
1
2
3 4
1
2
3
4
OFF
OFF
SW1
SW2
Setting of SW2-3 not relevant
In order to avoid loss of data in the event of operating errors, it is advisable to
set SW2-1 and SW2-2 so as to disable writing to the unit from which the data
is to be read.
2. Switch the NT631/NT631C power ON.
The screen shown below is displayed.
(Example)
Current PT Screen Data
The comment for the screen data in the NT631/NT631C is displayed here.
Current Memory Unit Screen Data
The comments for the screen data in each area are displayed here.
Pressing the Trans. Direction Change and Bank Change touch switches changes the selections for the direction of transmission and the area of the memory
unit used.
3. Press Execute.
The data is transmitted.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying, and Finished are displayed in accordance with the progress of data transmission.
48
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)
Section
3-6
4. Switch the NT631/NT631C power OFF, remove the memory unit, then
switch the NT631/NT631C power back ON.
Errors When Using a
Memory Unit
If an error occurs when using the memory unit, the NT631/NT631C operates as
follows.
• The details of the error and remedial action are displayed on the screen.
• The continuous buzzer sounds.
• The RUN LED flashes.
If a protect setting error occurs when executing manual transmission, it is possible to return to the memory unit manual transmission screen by pressing the
OK touch switch, but in the case of other errors, the status described above remains in effect until the NT631/NT631C power is turned OFF or reset.
When an error occurs, take remedial action by referring to the table below.
Error
Probable Cause
Remedial Action
Mode setting error
DIP switches SW1-1 to
SW1-3 are all OFF, or
more than one is ON.
Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, set the memory unit DIP
switches correctly, then turn the
NT631/NT631C power back ON.
Protect setting error
(automatic
transmission)
Writing to the data write
destination has been
prohibited by the setting
of SW2-1 or SW2-2.
Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, set the memory unit DIP
switches correctly, then turn the
NT631/NT631C power back ON.
Protect setting error
(manual
transmission)
Writing to the data write
destination has been
prohibited by the setting
of SW2-1 or SW2-2.
Perform either of the following
procedures.
S Press the OK touch switch to return to the memory unit manual
transmission screen, make the
correct settings, then try again.
S Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, correct the DIP switches
settings of the memory unit, then
turn the power back ON.
Flash memory error
An error occurred during
initialization of the
NT631/NT631C or
memory unit flash
memory, or during write
processing.
Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, then back ON. If the error
recurs, the flash memory at the
write destination may be faulty. In
this case, replace the unit.
Verify error
An error occurred during
verification processing at
the flash memory of the
NT631/NT631C or the
memory unit.
Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, then back ON. If the error
recurs, the flash memory at the
write destination may be faulty. In
this case, replace the unit.
49
SECTION 4
Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port
This section describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS-232C port of the PT.
4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1
Host Types and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-2
Connecting Directly between RS-232C Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52
52
76
51
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
The method for connecting between the RS-232C port of the PT and the
RS-232C port of the host is as follows.
The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON PCs
(By using the memory link method, a connection can be made to any arbitrary
RS-232 unit). When making a connection to a host other than OMRON PCs, refer to the PC Connection Manual (V042-E1-j) or NT31/631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual (V060-E1-j).
Direct Connection Between The RS-232C Ports Using an RS-232C Cable
(Page 106)
This is the easiest connection method. Depending on the host to which the connection is to be made, it may be possible to use OMRON cables with connectors.
NT631/NT631C
Host
RS-232C cable (max. 15 m)
Reference: The CS1 series CPU cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT Link method. Use the 1:N connection NT Link method instead to make the 1:1 connection.
For details, refer to Using the NT Link (1:N) Method (page 69) or Using the Highspeed NT Link (1:N) Method (page 73).
4-1-1 Host Types and Settings
The types of host that can be connected to a PT by using the RS-232C ports of
both units, and the settings to be made at the host, are described here.
When Using the Host Link Method
Compatible Host Units
Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the host link function built in.
In the CS1-series or CQM1H PCs, the host link method can be used by installing
a Serial Communication Board. In addition, some C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E have
an integral CPU that can be connected in the host link method by installing a
Communication Board.
Check the model and series of the PC, the type of installed Serial Communication Board, Serial Communication Unit, or Host Link Unit before making a connection.
The host units that can be connected to the NT631/NT631C by the host link
method using the RS-232C ports of both units are indicated in the table below.
52
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
PLC Series
CS1 Series
Units with Built-in Host Link
Function
CPUs Connectable with Host
Link Units or Expansion Communication Board
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C200HS-CPU01/03/21/23/
31/33-E
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-E
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-ZE
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64
65/85-ZE
Host Link Unit/
Communication
Board
CS1W-SCU21
CS1W-SCB21
CS1W-SCB41
CS1G
CS1H
C1000H
C2000H
C200H-LK201-EV1
C200HS
C200HE
C200HE-Z
C200HG
C200HG-Z
C200HX
C200HX-Z
C200HS
C200HE-CPU42-E
C20HE-CPU42-ZE
C200HG-CPU43/63-E
C200HG-CPU43/63-ZE
C200HX-CPU44/64-E
C200HX-CPU44/64/65/85-ZE
C Series
Connectable to
C120-LK201-EV1
C200HS-CPU21/23/31/33-E
C200HE-CPU32/42-E
C200HE-CPU32/42-ZE
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64/
65/85-ZE
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000HF-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C200HE
C200HE-Z
C200HW-COM02/04/
C200HG
05/06
EV1 C200HG-Z
05/06-EV1
C200HX
C200HX-Z
C500-LK201-EV1
C1000H
C2000H
C500-LK203
C1000H (F)
C2000H
CPM1-10/20/30CDR-j
+CPM1-CIF01
CPM1A-10/20/30/40CDj-j
+CPM1-CIF01
CPM2A-30/40/60CDjj-j
+CPM1-CIF01
(Peripheral port connection)
CPM2C-10/20jjjjjj-j
CPM1
CPM2A
CPM2C
(*1)
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41/42/43/44-EV1
CQM1H-CPU11/21/51/61(*2)
CQM1H-CPU51/61
CQM1H-SCB41
CQM1H
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV500-LK201
CV500
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV1000
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000
CVM1 Series
(*1)
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CompoBus/S
master control unit
SRM1-C02-V1
CV Series
(*1)
4-1
CQM1
CV500-LK201
CVM1
SRM1
*1: Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11
RS-422A Adapter to connect.
*2: The CQM1H-CPU11 does not have a built-in RS-232C port, so connect to the peripheral port to the PT with a
CS1W-CN118 Connecting Cable.
*3: CPUs of CVM1/CV-series PCs without the suffix -EVj cannot be connected.
Settings at The Host
When using the host link method, the settings shown below must be made at the
host (depending on the unit, some of these settings may not be necessary, or
settings not shown here may be necessary).
53
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Item
4-1
Switch Setting
I/O port
RS-232C
Communications speed
Set the same speed as for the NT631/NT631C. (*1)
Transfer code
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits
Parity
Even
1-to-1/1-to-N
1-to-N(*2)
Instruction level
Level 1, 2, 3
Unit #
00
*1: Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to Setting the Host Link
Method (page 150).
*2: The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually
possible to connect more than one NT631/NT631C in a single host link.
The setting methods for each type of unit are described in the following.
Connecting to a C-series Host Link Unit
C200H/C200HS/C200HE/HG/HX (-Z)E Backplane mounted type:
C200H-LK201-V1
Setting the Front Switches
Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the
setting value window agree with the following.
LK201
XMT
RUN
RCV
ERROR
@ Unit # (SW1, SW2)
Set these switches to 0.
SW1
SW2
0
0
SW3
@ Instruction level, parity, and transfer code (SW4)
Set this switch to 2.
SW4
5
2
@ Communications speed (SW3)
Set this switch to 5 to select 9600 bps.
Set this switch to 6 to select 19200 bps.
Setting the Rear Switches
ON
CTS selector switch
External
0V (ON)
54
1
2
3
4
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP switch)
Set #3 to ON.
@ CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to 0V (ON).
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
C1000H(F)/C2000H Backplane mounted type: 3G2A5-LK201-EV1
Setting the Front Switches
Local
Host
@ Mode control (key switch)
Set this to host link.
Setting the Rear Switches
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.
I/O port
@ Unit # (DIP SW1)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0).
8
RS-422A
RS-232C
7
6
5
4
Synchronization
SW1
3
Internal
External
2
1
ON
Terminator
@ Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to Internal.
8
OFF
ON
7
6
5
4
CTS
3
0V
External
2
1
ON
SW2
@ Communications speed
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to 0010 to select
19,200 bps.
Set these switches to 1010 to select
9,600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to 0V (ON).
55
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
C1000H/C2000H Backplane mounted type: C500-LK203
Setting the Rear Switches
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.
5V supply
ON
OFF
@ Unit #, parity, and transfer code
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-7)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-7 to OFF (0).
8
7
I/O port
6
RS-422A
RS-232C
5
4
SW1
3
2
Synchronization
Internal
External
1
ON
Terminator
@ Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to Internal.
8
OFF
ON
7
6
5
4
CTS
3
0V
External
2
1
ON
SW2
@ Communications speed
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to 0010 to select
19,200 bps.
Set these switches to 1010 to select
9,600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to 0V (ON).
C200H/C1000H/C2000H CPU mounting type: 3G2A6-LK201-EV1
Setting the Rear Switches
@ Unit #, parity, and transfer code
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-5)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0).
* Parity is fixed at Even Parity. Transfer code is
fixed at ASCII 7 data bits and 2 stop bits.
@ Communications speed (DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to 0010 to select 19200 bps.
Set these switches to 1010 to select 9600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
SW1
SW2
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
SW3
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ CTS selection (DIP SW3-1 and SW3-2)
Set SW3-1 to ON (1), and SW3-2 to OFF (0).
(Set this always to 0V.)
@ Synchronization (DIP SW3-3 to SW3-6)
Set SW3-3, SW3-5, and SW3-6 to ON (1), and
SW3-4 to OFF (0). (Set these to Internal.)
Connecting to a CVM1/CV Series Host Link Unit
CVM1/CV series backplane mounted type: CV500-LK201
A CVM1/CV series host link unit (CV500-LK201) has two connectors (communication ports 1 and 2). Either of these ports can be used for connection to an
56
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
NT631/NT631C by the RS-232C method. However, since the connectors at
these ports are of different types, a cable that matches the connector must be
prepared.
• Communication port 1
Communication port 1 is a 25-pin connector for RS-232C use only.
• Communication port 2
Communication port 2 is a 9-pin connector which allows selection of the
RS-232C or RS-422A method. When this port is used with the RS-232C method, the I/O port selector switch on the front of the unit must be set to RS-232C
(the upper position).
CPU Bus Unit Settings
When connecting to a CVM1/CV series host link unit, set the following communication conditions for the CPU bus unit settings.
Item
Setting at Host
Communications speed
Set the same speed as set at the NT631/NT631C(*1)
Transfer code
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits
Parity
Even
1-to-1, 1-to-N
1-to-N(*2)
Instruction level
Level 1, 2, 3
*1: Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to Setting the Host Link
Method (page150).
*2: The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually
possible to connect more than one NT631/NT631C in a single host link.
Set the CPU bus unit settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g. CX-Programmer).
For details on the CPU bus unit settings, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV-series
Host Link Unit Operation Manual (W205-E1-j).
57
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Setting The Front Switches
@ Unit # (SW3, SW4)
When using communication port 2, set these
switches to 0.
Communications port 1
(RS-232C)
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.
Communications port 2
(RS-232C/RS-422A)
@ CTS selection (DIP SW2 and SW3)
Set SW2 or SW3 to ON. (Set this always to 0V.)
To use communication port 1, set SW2. To use
communication port 2, set SW3.
I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
RS-422A
@ Communication condition setting (DIP SW1)
Set this switch to OFF.
Communication is executed in accordance with the
CPU bus unit system settings made at the PC. The
initial values for the system settings are as follows.
- Communications speed: 9600 bps
- Parity: Even
- Xon/Xoff control: Not executed
- Communication method: Full duplex
- Stop bits: 2 stop bits
- Data length: 7 bits
Connecting to a CS1-series Serial Communication Unit
CS1 series Backplane mounted type: CS1W-SCU21
Setting The Front Switches
Set the unit number of the serial communication unit by using the rotary switch
located on the front panel. Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that
the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following.
SCU21
RDY
ERH
SD2
RD2
RUN
ERC
SD1
RD1
UNIT
0
No. 3241
FE
D
C
567 9AB
8
Set the unit number to 0 through F so that
it will not overlap with the numbers used
in other units.
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of
the CPU. After the settings are written, they become effective by turning the
power ON, restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of
the STUP command.
58
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the settings
are shown.
m=DM30000+100×unit # (CH)
Allocation DM area (CH)
Port 1
Port 2
m
m+10
m+1
m+11
m+2
m+6
Writing Value
Val e
Settings
8000
host link mode, 2 stop bits, even parity, data
length 7 bits
0000
Communication speed 9600 bps.
0007
Communication speed 19200 bps.
m+12
0000
Transmit delay time 0 ms.
m+16
0000
No CTS control Unit No.0 for host link
Connecting to a CPU Unit
CV-series and CVM1/CV-series (-EVj) CPU Units
CV500-CPU01-EV1/CV1000-CPU01-EV1/CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV2/CVM1-CPU11-EV2/CVM1-CPU21-EV2
PC Setup
When connecting to a CVM1/CV series CPU, set the following communication
conditions for the PC Setup.
Item
Setting at Host
Communications speed
Set the same speed as set at the NT631/NT631C(*1)
Stop bit
2 stop bits
Parity
Even
Data length
ASCII 7 bits
Unit #
00
*1: Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to Setting the Host Link
Method (page 150).
Either set PC Setup directly from a Programming Device (e.g. CX-Programmer),
or transmit the PC Setup made at a Programming Device to the CPU.
For details on the PC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV500/1000/2000 Operation Manual: Ladder Diagrams (W202-E1-j).
59
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Setting the Front Switches
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.
I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
RS-422A
@ System setting (DIP SW4)
To effect the existing DIP switch
settings, set SW4 to ON.
To effect the existing PC Setup, set
SW4 to OFF.
Note
For CPUs manufactured before or
during June 1995 (lot No. jj65), the
existing DIP switch settings differ from
the existing PC Setup as follows.
- DIP switch settings:
2,400 bps, 1 stop bit, even parity, 7 bit
data length
- PC Setup:
9,600 bps, 2 stop bits, even parity, 7
bit data length
For CPUs manufactured from July 1995
onward (lot No. jj75), the stipulated
values in the DIP switch settings also
are 9,600 bps and 2 stop bits.
C-series C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1,
CPM1H CPUs, SRM1
The connection method depends upon the model of PC being used, as shown in
the following table.
PC model
Connection method
C200HS, CQM1
Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
• Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.
• Connect to one of the RS-232C ports (port A or port B) on a
Serial Communications Board.
CQM1H
• Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.
• Connect to the peripheral port through a CS1W-CN118
Connecting Cable.
• Connect to the RS-232C port (port 1) on a Serial Communications Board.
CPM1
Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF01
RS-232C Adapter.
• Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.
• Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF01
RS-232C Adapter.
CPM2A, SRM1
CPM2C
Connect to the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port or the peripheral
port through a Connecting Cable (CPM2C-CN111,
CS1W-CN118, or CS1W-CN114).
(The CPM2C-CN111 splits the Unit’s Communication Port
into a RS-232C port and a peripheral port. A CPM1-CIF01
RS-232C Adapter is also required to connect to this
peripheral port.)
PC Setup Area Settings
When connecting to a C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A,
CPM2C, CQM1, or CQM1H CPU, or SRM1, set the following communication
conditions for the PC Setup area.
60
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Item
4-1
Setting at Host
Communication mode
Host link mode
Communications speed
Set the same speed as set at the NT631/NT631C(*1)
Stop bit
2 stop bits
Parity
Even
Data length
ASCII 7 bits
Unit #
00
*1: Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to Settings the Host Link
Method (page150).
Set the PC Setup area settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g. CXProgrammer).
For details on operations relating to the PC Setup area, refer to the manual for
the PC which is used.
The PC Setup area word numbers and settings to be made depending on the
unit and port to which the connection is made are shown below.
CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1H, or SRM1: Peripheral port connection
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
DM6650
0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6651
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
DM6653
C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H (other than
the CPU11), or SRM1: Built-in RS-232C port connection
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
DM6645
0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6646
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
DM6648
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E: Serial Communications Board port A
CQM1H: Serial Communications Board port 1
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
DM6555
0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6556
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
DM6558
61
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
When using port B of the communication board of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
DM6550
0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6551
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
DM6553
When using a CPM1
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
DM6650
0001
Host link mode
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6651
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
DM6653
Connecting to a CPM2C
The CPM2C PCs do not have the same kind of port connectors found on
CS1-series PCs. The CPM2C’s communication port handles both RS-232C and
peripheral port connections which are divided internally. Therefore, when using
the CPM2C, it is necessary to select RS-232C or peripheral port connections,
according to the kind of cable and port (on the cable) used, as shown in the following table. Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual for more details.
Port connecting to PT
PC Setup
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CPM2C-CN111
Built-in RS-232C port settings
Peripheral port of CPM2C-CN111
Peripheral port settings
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CS1W-CN118
Built-in RS-232C port settings
Peripheral port of CS1W-CN114
Peripheral port settings
Peripheral port
CPM2C-CN111
RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)
CPM2C
CS1W-CN118
CPM2C
RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)
CS1W-CN114
CPM2C
Peripheral port
Setting the DIP Switches of a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1 or CQM1H
When using a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1, or CQM1H the DIP switches on the
front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the settings in the PC
Setup area (data memory) effective.
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CQM1
CQM1H
RS-232C port communication condition setting
Set DIP SW5 to OFF to make the settings
made in PC Setup effective.
62
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
When using the CQM1H’s built-in peripheral port, turn ON SW7.
Setting the Switches of a CPM2A
When using a CPM2A, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown
below in order to make the PC Setup settings effective.
Set the Communications
switch to OFF (down
position).
Setting the Switches of a CPM2C
When using a CPM2C, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown
below in order to make the PC Setup settings effective.
The settings for SW1 and SW2 depend upon the usage of the
peripheral port and RS-232C port.
S Connecting PT to peripheral port
S Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port
(A device that requires non-standard communications settings
is connected to the peripheral port.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: ON
S Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port
(A Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: OFF
Setting the Switches on a RS-232C Adapter
When using a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, set the mode switch as shown in
the following diagram.
CPM1CIF01
CPM1
Set the mode setting switch to HOST (upper position).
CS1 series CPU type : CS1G/H-CPUjj-EV1
Connect to the built-in RS-232C port of the CPU, or the RS-232C port of the
communication board. Note that the connection to a peripheral port must be
made via an RS-232C adapter (CS1W-CN118) specially designed for connecting to a peripheral port.
PC Setup
When connecting to a CS1 series CPU, set the following communication conditions for the PC Setup area. Since the settings shown below are the PC default
settings for the CPU, no change to the PC Setup is necessary as long as the
communication speed is maintained at 9600 bps.
63
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Item
4-1
Setting at Host
Communication speed
Set the same speed as set at the NT631/NT631C(*1)
Stop bits
2 stop bits
Parity
Even
Data length
ASCII 7 bits
Unit No. for the host link
00
*1: Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to Settings the Host Link
Method (page 150).
When the communication speed is set to 19200 bps., the PC Setup of the CPU
need to be changed.
Either set the PC Setup directly from a Programming Device (Programming
Console), or transmit the PC Setup made at a Programming Device (CX-Programmer) to the CPU.
For details on PC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CS1-series Operation Manual
(W339-E1-j).
When using the built-in RS-232C port of CS1G/H
Word #
160
161
166
Writing Value
Settings
8000
Host link mode, data length 7 bits,
2 stop bits, even parity
0000
Communication speed: 9600 bps.
0007
Communication speed: 19200 bps.
0000
Unit #00
When using the peripheral port of CS1G/H
Word #
144
145
150
64
Writing Value
Settings
8000
Host link mode, data length 7 bits,
2 stop bits, even parity
0000
Communication speed: 9600 bps.
0007
Communication speed: 19200 bps.
0000
Unit #00
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Setting the Front Switches
Set the CPU DIP switches to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT631/NT631C is
connected to.
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL/COMM
SYSMAC
CS1G
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
CPU42
Peripheral port
DIP switches (inside the battery storage)
OPEN
This is used mainly for
connection to the
Programming Device.
(This also supports the
RS-232C unit connection.)
MCPWR
BUSY
OPEN
• Set SW4 to ON (establishing communication in accordance with PC Setup) when connecting the
NT631/NT631C to a peripheral port.
• Set SW5 to OFF (establishing communication in accordance with PC Setup) when connecting the
NT631/NT631C to a peripheral port.
PERIPHERAL
RS-232 port
This is used mainly for
connection to the
RS-232C unit.
(This also supports the
CX-Programmer.)
PORT
Connecting to CS1 Series Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS-232C port for CS1-series
CPU Units: CS1W-SCB41/21
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of
the CPU. After the settings are written, they become effective by turning the
power ON, restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of
the STUP command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the settings
are shown.
Allocation DM area (CH)
Port 1
Port 2
DM32000
DM32010
DM32001
DM32011
DM32002
DM32012
DM32006
DM32016
Writing Value
Val e
Settings
8000
Host link mode, 2 stop bits, even parity, data
length 7 bits
0000
Communication speed 9600 bps.
0007
Communication speed 19200 bps.
0000
Transmit delay time 0 ms.
0000
No CTS control Unit No.0 for host link
When Using the NT Link (1:1) Method
Compatible Host Units
Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the NT link (1:1) function built in.
With CQM1H PCs, a Serial Communications Board can be added to provide 1:1
NT Link communications. Some C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E CPUs can be connected
by the NT link (1:1) method by installing a Communication Board.
Check the model and series of the PC against the type of CPU before making the
connections.
The host units that can be connected to the NT631/NT631C by the NT Link (1:1)
method using the RS-232C ports of both units are indicated in the table below.
65
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
PC Series
CPUs with Built-in
NT Link Function
CPUs Connectable with
Expansion
Communication
Board(*1)
C200HS-CPU21-E, -EC
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
C series
Connectable
to
C200HS
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HE (-ZE)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HG (-ZE)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
X200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
C200HX (-ZE)
CPM1-10CDR-j (*2)
CPM1-20CDR-j (*2)
CPM1-30CDR-j (*2)
CPM1A-10CDj-j (*2)
CPM1A-20CDj-j (*2)
CPM1A-30CDj-j (*2)
CPM1A-40CDj-j (*2)
CPM1
CPM2A-30CDjj-j
CPM2A-40CDjj-j
CPM2A-60CDjj-j
CPM2A
CPM2C-10jjjjjj-j (*3)
CPM2C-20jjjjjj-j (*3)
CPM2C
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1-CPU45-EV1
CQM1
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
CQM1H-CPU51 (*4)
CQM1H-CPU61 (*4)
CQM1H
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV500
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV1000
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000
(*5)
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CVM1
CompoBus/S
master
control unit
SRM1-C02-V1
SRM1
CV series
C
se es (*5)
CVM1 series
4-1
*1: One of the following communication boards is required:
C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-EV1.
*2: A CPM1-CIF01 adapter is required.
*3: Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, CPM1-CIF01
RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter to connect.
*4: A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required.
*5: CPUs of CVM1/CV series PCs without the suffix -EVj cannot be connected.
Reference: CS1 series CPUs cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT link method.
Use the 1:N connection NT link method (standard or high-speed) instead to
make the 1:1 connection. For details, refer to Using the NT Link (1:N) Method
(page 69) or Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method (page 73).
66
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Settings at the Host
The setting methods for each unit are as follows.
Connecting to a C-series C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A,
CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H or SRM1 PC
PC Setup Area Settings
Write the PC Setup area (data memory) settings directly from a Programming
Device (e.g. CX-Programmer) in accordance with the host model and port.
Host Model
Word #
RS-232C port of C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM2A,
CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, SRM1
Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E (*1)
Port 1 of
CQM1H (*2)
Writing Value
Setting
DM6645
Port B of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E (*1)
DM6550
CPM1
DM6650
Use NT link
(1:1)
4000
DM6555
*1: RS-232C port of the Communication Board
*2: RS-232C port of the Serial Communications Board
For details on operations relating to the PC Setup area, refer to the manual for
the PC which is used.
Connecting to a CPM2C
The CPM2C PCs do not have the same kind of port connectors found on
CS1-series PCs. The CPM2C’s communication port handles both RS-232C and
peripheral port connections which are divided internally. Therefore, when using
the CPM2C, it is necessary to select RS-232C or peripheral port connections,
according to the kind of cable and port (on the cable) used, as shown in the following table. Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual for more details.
Port connecting to PT
PC Setup
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CPM2C-CN111
Built-in RS-232C port settings
Peripheral port of CPM2C-CN111
Peripheral port settings
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CS1W-CN118
Built-in RS-232C port settings
Peripheral port of CS1W-CN114
Peripheral port settings
Peripheral port
CPM2C-CN111
RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)
CPM2C
CS1W-CN118
CPM2C
RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)
CS1W-CN114
CPM2C
Peripheral port
Setting the DIP Switches of a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1, or CQM1H
When using a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1, or CQM1H, the DIP switches on
the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the settings in the
PC Setup area (data memory) effective.
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CQM1
CQM1H
RS-232C port communication condition setting
Set DIP SW5 to OFF to make the settings
made in PC Setup effective.
67
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Setting the Switches of a CPM2A
When using a CPM2A, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown
below in order to make the PC Setup settings effective.
Set the Communications
switch to OFF (down
position).
Setting the Switches of a CPM2C
When using a CPM2C, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown
below in order to make the PC Setup settings effective.
The settings for SW1 and SW2 depend upon the usage of the
peripheral port and RS-232C port.
S Connecting PT to peripheral port
S Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port
(A device that requires non-standard communications settings
is connected to the peripheral port.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: ON
S Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port
(A Programming Console is connected to the peripheral
port.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: OFF
Setting the Switches on an RS-232C Adapter
When using a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, set the mode switch as shown in
the following diagram.
CPM1CIF01
Set the mode setting switch to NT (lower position).
68
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Connecting to CVM1/CV Series (-EVj)
Set the DIP switches on the front panel as follows.
I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.
DIP switch setting (SW3)
6
5
4
3
2
1
OFF
Set SW3 to use NT Link
(ON, right side).
ON
When using the CVM1/CV series, CPU execution processing (execution control
2) in the PC Setup must be set to Simultaneous processing.
Using the NT Link (1:N) Method
Compatible Host Units
The OMRON PCs that can be connected using the NT link (1:N) method are the
CS1-series CS1G/H and the C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1H, and
SRM1 only. With the CS1-series PCs, it is possible to connect a 1:N NT Link using a CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit.
Check the model and series of the PC as well as the model of Serial Communications Board or Unit being used before making the connections.
The host units that can be connected to the NT631/NT631C by the NT link (1:N)
method using the RS-232C ports of both units are indicated in the table below.
69
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
PC
Series
CPUs with Built-in NT Link
Function
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1(*1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/
66/67-EV1*1)
66/67-EV1
CS1
series
C series
Compo
Bus/S
Master
Control
Unit
CPUs Connectable with
Communication Board/Unit
4-1
Connectable
to
CS1G
CS1H
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*2)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E(*2)
C200HE (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE(*2)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE(*2)
C200HX (-Z)E
---
CQM1H-CPU51(*3)
CQM1H-CPU61(*3)
CQM1H
SRM1-C02-V2
---
SRM1
*1: A CS1W-SCB21 or CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communication Board or
CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit is required.
*2: One of the following Communication Boards is required:
C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06 (-EV1)
*3: A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communication Board is required.
Reference: The -V1 versions of CS1-series PCs support the high-speed 1:N NT Link as well
as the standard 1:N NT Link. Furthermore, the high-speed 1:N NT Link can be
used in earlier versions of CS1-series PCs by installing a new version of Serial
Communications Board or Unit. For details, refer to Using the High-speed NT
Link (1:N) Method (page 73).
Settings at the Host
The Settings required for each Unit are described below.
• Connecting a C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1H, or SRM1
PC Setup Area Settings
Write the PC Setup area (data memory) settings directly from a Programming
Device (e.g. CX-Programmer) in accordance with the host model and port.
Connection to
Word #
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, SRM1
Built-in RS-232C port
Writing
Value
DM6645
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Communication Board port
A*1
DM6555 5j00
CQM1H port 1*2
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Communication Board port B*1
Setting
Use NT link (1:N)
j = highest unit number of
the connected PTs (1 to 7)
((*3))
DM6550
*1: RS-232C port on the Communications Board
*2: RS-232C port on the Serial Communications Board
*3: When using a C200HE(-Z)E, the maximum PT unit number is 3.
70
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Refer to the PC’s operation manual for details on changing PC Setup settings.
Setting the DIP Switches of a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
When using a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, the DIP switches on the front panel must
be set as shown below in order to make the settings in the PC Setup area (data
memory) effective.
RS-232C port communication condition setting
Set DIP SW5 to OFF to make the settings made in PC
Setup effective.
Connecting to CS1-series CPU Units
CS1-series CPU Unit: CS1G/H-CPUjj-E(V1)
PC Setup Area Settings
When connecting to a CS1 series CPU, set the following communication conditions for the PC Setup area, in accordance with the communication port to be
used.
When using the built-in RS-232C port of CS1G/H
Word #
160
Writing Value
8200
161
0000 to 0009
166
000j
Settings
NT link (1:N) mode
(*1)
Communications baud rate (standard)
j = The largest model number of the
connected PT (0 – 7)
*1: Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between
0000 and 0009 Hex.
When using the peripheral port of CS1G/H
Word #
144
Writing Value
8200
145
0000 to 0009
150
000j
Settings
NT link (1:N) mode
(*1)
Communications baud rate (standard)
j = The largest model number of the
connected PT (0 – 7)
*1: Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between
0000 and 0009 Hex.
When connecting PT with its model number 0, 2-5 to the built-in RS-232C port,
for example, set the value 8200 Hex to 160 CH, and 0005 Hex to 166CH.
Either set PC Setup directly from a Programming Device (Programming Console), or transmit the PC Setup made at a Programming Device (CX-Programmer) to the CPU.
For details on PC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CS1-series Operation Manual
(W339-E1-j).
71
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Setting the Front Switches
Set the CPU DIP switch to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT631/NT631C is
connected to.
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL/COMM
SYSMAC
CS1G
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
CPU42
DIP switches (inside the battery storage)
Peripheral port
OPEN
This is used mainly for
connection to the
Programming Device.
(This also supports the
RS-232C unit connection.)
MCPWR
BUSY
OPEN
• Set SW4 to ON (establishing communication in accordance with PC Setup) when connecting the
NT631/NT631C to a peripheral port.
• Set SW5 to OFF (establishing communication in accordance with PC Setup) when connecting the
NT631/NT631C to a peripheral port.
PERIPHERAL
RS-232 port
This is used mainly for
connection to the
RS-232C unit.
(This also supports the
CX-Programmer.)
PORT
Connecting to CS1 Series Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS-232C port for CS1-series
CPU Units: CS1W-SCB41/21
CPU Allocation DM Area Settings
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or CXProgrammer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the
CPU. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,
restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP
command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are
shown.
Allocation DM area (CH)
Port 1
Port 2
DM32000
DM32010
Val e
Writing Value
8200
DM32001
DM32011
0000 to 0009
DM32006
DM32016
000j
Settings
NT link (1:N) mode
(*1)
Communications baud rate
(standard)
j = The largest model number of
the connected PT (0 – 7)
*1: Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between
0000 and 0009 Hex.
When connecting PTs with model numbers 3 to 6 to port 1, for example, set the
value 8200 Hex to DM32000, 0000 Hex to DM32001, and 0006 Hex to
DM32006.
Connecting to CS1 Series Serial Communication Unit
A CS1 series backplane mounted type : CS1W-SCU21
Setting the Front Switches
Set the unit number of the serial communication unit by using the rotary switch
72
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
located on the front panel. Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that
the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following.
SCU21
RDY
ERH
SD2
RD2
RUN
ERC
SD1
RD1
Set the unit number to 0 through F so
that it will not overlap with the numbers
used in other units.
UNIT
0
No. 3241
FE
D
C
567 9AB
8
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or CXProgrammer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the
CPU. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,
restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP
command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are
shown.
m=DM30000+100*unit number (CH)
Allocation DM area (CH)
Port 1
m
Port 2
m+10
Writing Value
Val e
8200
m+1
m+11
0000 to 0009
m+6
m+16
000j
Settings
NT link (1:N) mode
(*1)
Communications baud rate
(standard)
j = The largest model number of
the connected PT (0 - 7)
*1: Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between
0000 and 0009 Hex.
Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method
Compatible Host Units
Only the -V1 versions of OMRON’s CS1H and CS1G PCs support the highspeed 1:N NT Link directly. Other CS1-series PCs can use the high-speed 1:N
NT Link indirectly through a CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit. (If a
Serial Communications Unit is used, even CS1-series Units without the “-V1”
suffix can be connected via high-speed 1:N NT Link.)
Be sure to check the model number of the PC and Serial Communications
Board/Unit before trying to establish the high-speed 1:N NT Link.
The following table shows which CS1-series PCs can be connected to an
NT631/NT631C with the high-speed 1:N NT Link.
CPU Units with Built-in
NT Link Function
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1 (*1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1 (*1)
CPUs Connectable only through a
Serial Communication Board or Unit
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1) (*2)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1) (*2)
*1: The high-speed 1:N NT Link is not supported in a direct connection to the CPU
Unit of a CS1-series PC without the -V1 suffix.
*2: A CS1W-SCB21 or CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communication Board or
CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit is required.
Settings at the Host
The Settings required for each Unit are described below.
• Connecting CS1-series CPU Units
CS1 series CPU type : CS1G/H-CPUjj-EV1
PC Setup
When connecting to a CS1 series CPU, set the following communication condi-
73
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
tions for the PC Setup area, in accordance with the communication port to be
used.
When using the built-in RS-232C port of CS1G/H
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
160
8200
NT link (1:N) mode
161
000A
Communications baud rate (high-speed)
166
000j
j = The largest model number of the
connected PT (0 – 7)
When using the peripheral port of CS1G/H
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
144
8200
NT link (1:N) mode
145
000A
Communications baud rate (high-speed)
150
000j
j = The largest model number of the
connected PT (0 – 7)
When connecting PTs with model numbers 0, 2, 3, 4, and 5 to the built-in
RS-232C port, for example, set the value 8200 Hex to word 160, 000A Hex to
word 161, and 0005 Hex to word 166.
Either set PC Setup directly from a Programming Device (Programming Console), or transmit the PC Setup made at a Programming Device (CX-Programmer) to the CPU.
For details on PC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CS1-series Operation Manual
(W339-E1-j).
Reference: When using the CX-Programmer to set the high-speed 1:N NT Link, set the communications baud rate to 115,200 bps.
Setting The Front Switches
Set the CPU DIP switch to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT631/NT631C is
connected to.
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL/COMM
SYSMAC
CS1G
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
CPU42
DIP switches (inside the battery storage)
Peripheral port
OPEN
This is used mainly for
connection to the
Programming Device.
(This also supports
connection of RS-232C
devices.)
RS-232 port
This is used mainly for
connection of RS-232C
devices.
(This also supports
connection of the
CX-Programmer.)
MCPWR
OPEN
BUSY
• Set SW4 to ON (establishing communication in accordance with PC Setup) when connecting the
NT631/NT631C to the peripheral port.
• Set SW5 to OFF (establishing communication in accordance with PC Setup) when connecting the
NT631/NT631C to the RS-232C port.
PERIPHERAL
PORT
Connecting to a CS1 Series Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS-232C port for CS1-series
CPU Units: CS1W-SCB41/21
74
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Reference: Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units with lot number 991220 (12/20/99) and later support the high-speed 1:N NT Link. Boards and
Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used.
CPU Allocation DM Area Settings
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or CXProgrammer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the
CPU. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,
restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP
command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are
shown.
Allocation DM area (CH)
Writing
Value
Settings
Port 1
Port 2
DM32000
DM32010
8200
NT link (1:N) mode
DM32001
DM32011
000A
Communications baud rate (high-speed)
DM32006
DM32016
000j
j = The largest model number of the
connected PT (0 – 7)
For example, when connecting PTs with model numbers 3, 4, 5, and 6 to port 1,
set the value 8200 Hex to DM32000, 000A Hex to DM32001, and 0006 Hex to
DM32006.
Connecting to a CS1 Series Serial Communication Unit
A CS1 series Backplane mounted type : CS1W-SCU21
Reference: Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units with lot number 991220 (12/20/99) and later support the high-speed 1:N NT Link. Boards and
Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used.
Setting the Front Switches
Set the unit number of the serial communication unit by using the rotary switch
located on the front panel. Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that
the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following.
SCU21
RDY
ERH
SD2
RD2
RUN
ERC
SD1
RD1
UNIT
0
No. 3241
FE
D
C
567 9AB
8
Set the unit number to 0 through F so
that it will not overlap with the numbers
used in other units.
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or CXProgrammer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the
CPU. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,
restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP
command.
In the following table, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are shown.
75
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Word m = DM30000 + (100 × unit number)
Allocation DM area (CH)
Port 1
When Using the Memory
Link Method
Port 2
Writing
Value
Settings
m
m+10
8200
NT link (1:N) mode
m+1
m+11
000A
Communications baud rate (high-speed)
m+6
m+16
000j
j = The largest model number of the
connected PT (0 - 7)
In the memory link method, the connection can be made to a personal computer
with RS-232 and an FA computer, etc.
When connecting to the host in the memory link method, it is necessary to create
a program for the memory link at the host side.
The following are the communication conditions that can be used in the memory
link method. For the host (a personal computer, an FA computer, etc.), its setting
should be compatible to one of the communication conditions listed in the following table. Set the same communication conditions at the NT631/NT631C by the
memory switch. (page 155).
Item
Settings at the host
Input/Output port
RS-232C
Communication speed
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps.
Data bits length
7 bits, 8 bits
Stop bits length
1 bits, 2 bits
Parity
None, even, odd
Flow control
None, RS/CS, XON/XOFF
4-1-2 Connecting Directly between RS-232C Ports
The method for connection between the RS-232C ports of the NT631/NT631C
and the host is described here.
Host link unit/CPU
NT631/NT631C
SYSMAC
C-series PC,
CVM1/CV-series PC,
SRM1
9-pin connector
Serial port A or B
(RS-232C, 9-pin type)
9-pin connector
or
25-pin connector
Cable with RS-232C connectors
Recommended Connector Cable
When making the connector cable, as far as possible use the recommended
connectors, connector hoods, and cables indicated in the table below. Some
units come supplied with one connector and one connector hood.
Check the required components and prepare them in advance.
76
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Name
Model
Remarks
4-1
Delivered with
CS1-series CS1G/CS1H
C-series CQM1,
C200HS,
9-pin
Made by OMRON
XM2A-0901
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E,
CVM1/CV-series CPUs
CV500-LK201
Connector
XM24-2501
25-pin
Made by OMRON
C500-LK203
CV500-LK201
C200H-LK201-EV1
DB-25P
25-pin
Made by JAE
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
C-series CQM1,
C200HS,
9-pin
Made by OMRON
XM2S-0911
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E,
CVM1/CV-series CPUs
CV500-LK201
Connector
hood
Cable
XM2S-0913
9-pin
Made by OMRON
XM2S-0911-E
9-pin
Made by OMRON
XM2S-2511
25-pin
Made by OMRON
C500-LK203
CV500-LK201
C200H-LK201-EV1
DB-C2-J9
25-pin
Made by JAE
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
AWG28 5P
IFVV-SB
Multi-core shielded cable
Made by Fujikura, Ltd.
CO-MA-VV-SB
5P 28AWG
Multi-core shielded cable
Made by Hitachi Cable,
Ltd.
CS1-series CS1G/CS1H
Note After connecting a communication cable, always secure it with the screws.
OMRON Cables with Connectors
When a connection is made at serial port A in other than the memory link method, OMRON cables with connectors shown below are available.
Model
Cable Length
XW2Z-200S
2m
XW2Z-500S
5m
XW2Z-200T
2m
XW2Z-500T
5m
Connector Specification
9 pin ⇔ 25 pin
9-pin
9 pin ⇔ 9-pin
9-pin
9 pin
When a connection is made to a personal computer at serial port A in the
memory link method, OMRON cable with connectors shown below are available.
Model
Cable Length
Connector Specification
CV500-CN228
2m
9-pin ⇔ 25 pin
XW2Z-S002
2m
9-pin ⇔ 9 pin
Note The cable’s tensile load is 30 N. Do not subject it to loads greater than this.
Wiring for a Host Link
Unit (25-pin) Connection
Applicable units: C200H-LK201-EV1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
77
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
C500-LK203
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
CV500-LK201 (communication port 1)
Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port A:
XW2Z-200S (9-pin ⇔ 25-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-500S (9-pin ⇔ 25-pin, 5 m)
CVM1/CV-series host link units (CV500-LK201) have two types of connector; a
25-pin connector (communication port 1), and a 9-pin connector (communication port 2). When using communication port 2, refer to Wiring for Other Connections (Other Than the Memory Link Method) (page78).
Serial Port A, B
1
6
NT631/NT631C
Abbreviation
FG
RS-232C
interface
Pin
number
Connector
hood
9
Shielding wire
Pin
number
Abbreviation
1
FG
1
2
SD
SD
2
3
RD
RD
3
4
RS
RS
4
5
CS
CS
5
+5V
6
SG
5
PC (host link unit)
(9-pin type)
*
6
–
7
SG
7
8
–
8
–
–
9
–
–
–
–
–
ER
1
14
13
25
RS-232C
interface
(25-pin type)
* For units that have a CTS setting selector switch, RS and CS do not have to be
shorted if this switch is set to 0V.
Wiring for Other
Connections
78
Applicable units :
CV500-LK201 (communication port 2)
CS1W-SCU21
CPM1-10CDR-j
CPM1-20CDR-j
CPM1A-10CDj-j
CPM1A-20CDj-j
CPM1A-30CDj-j
CPM1A-40CDj-j
CPM2A-30CDjj-j
CPM2A-40CDjj-j
CPM2A-60CDjj-j
CPM2C-10jjjjjj-j CPM2C-20jjjjjj-j
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1H-CPU11
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
C200HS-CPU21-E, -EC
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
SRM1-C02-V2
Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port A:
XW2Z-200T (9-pin ⇔ 9-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-500T (9-pin ⇔ 9-pin, 5 m)
CPUs of CVM1/CV-series PCs without the suffix -EVj cannot be connected by
any connection method.
Serial Port A, B
1
6
NT631/NT631C
RS-232C
interface
5
PC (Host link unit)
1
Pin
Abbreviation number
Connector
FG
hood
9
Wiring for a Memory Link
Connection
Shielding wire
1
6
5
9
Pin
Abbreviation
number
Connector
FG
hood
–
1
2
SD
SD
2
3
RD
RD
3
4
RS
RS
4
5
CS
CS
5
6
–
+5V
6
7
–
–
7
8
–
–
8
9
SG
SG
9
RS-232C
interface
(9-pin type)
(9-pin type)
Cables with connectors that can be used:
CV500-CN228 (9-pin⇔25-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-S002 (9-pin⇔9-pin, 2 m)
Serial Port A, B
Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the following diagram.
Host side
NT631/NT631C
1
6
Abbreviation Pin number
RS-232C
connector
5
9
Shielding wire
Abbreviation
Connector
hood
FG
Connector
hood
−
1
SD
SD
2
RD
RD
3
RS
RS
4
CS
CS
5
SG
+5V
6
−
7
−
8
SG
9
RS-232C
connector
(9-pin type)
79
SECTION 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port
This section describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS-422A/485 port of the PT.
5-1
5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1
The Type of Host and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-2
1:1 Connection between RS-422A/485 at the PT and
RS-232C at the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-3
1:N Connection between RS-422A/485 at the PT and
RS-232C at the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-4
Recommended Connectors, Cables, and Crimp Terminals . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-5
Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485 Communications . .
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-1
Host Types and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2
Direct Connection between RS-422A Ports at Both Units . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-3
Direct Connection between RS-485 Ports at Both Units . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-4
1:N Connection among RS-422A Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-5
1:N Connection among RS-485 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-6
Recommended Connectors, Cables and Crimp Terminals . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-7
Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485 Communications . .
82
83
84
88
92
94
95
96
112
115
116
118
120
121
81
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
5-1
5-1
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
The methods for connecting the RS-422A/485 port of the NT631/NT631C and
the RS-232C port of the host are described here. There are the following methods.
The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON PCs
(By using the memory link method, a connection can be made to any arbitrary
RS-232 unit). When making a connection to a host other than OMRON PCs, refer to the PC Connection Manual (V042-E1-j) or NT31/631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual (V060-E1-j).
• Method in which the RS-422A port of the NT631/NT631C and the RS-232C
port of the host are connected in a 1:1 connection via an RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit (page 84).
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to 500 m.
PT
RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit
RS-422A cable
(max. 500 m)
Host
RS-232C
cable
(max. 2 m)
• Method in which the RS-485 port of the NT631/NT631C and the RS-232C port
of the host are connected in a 1:1 connection via an RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (page 84).
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to 500 m.
This connection method can be used only with the NT Link (1:N) method of
type RS-485.
PT
RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit
RS-485 cable
(max. 500 m)
Host
RS-232C
cable
(max. 2 m)
• Method in which the RS-422A ports of multiple NT631/NT631Cs and the
RS-232C port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection via an
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (page 88).
This connection method is used with the RS-422A type NT Link (1:N) method.
PT
RS-232C/RS422A
convertor unit
RS-422A cable
(max. total length
500 m)
Host
RS-232C
cable
(max. 2 m)
• Method in which the RS-485 ports of multiple NT631/NT631Cs and the
RS-232C port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection via an
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (page 88).
This connection method is used with the RS-485 type NT Link (1:N) method
(standard or high-speed).
PT
RS-232C/RS422A
convertor unit
RS-485 cable
(max. total length
500 m)
82
RS-232C
cable
(max. 2 m)
Host
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
5-1
Note One end of the wire must always be connected to the host (PC), and there must
be no branching. Branching will cause problems such as transmission delays
and communication failures.
PC
PC
(At termination)
PC
Relay terminal block
Relay terminal block
Max. 2 m
NT631C
NT631
NT631
(Not at
(Not at
termination) termination) (Not at
termination)
NT631
NT631
NT631C
NT631
NT631
NT631C
NT631
(At
termination)
Example of Good Connection
Examples of Bad Connections
Reference: CS1 series CPUs cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT Link method.
Use the 1:N connection NT Link method (standard or high-speed) instead to
make the 1:1 connection. For details, refer to Using the NT Link (1:N) Method
(page 69) or Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method (page 73).
5-1-1 The Type of Host and Settings
The using condition is the same as the connecting PT side RS-232C and the
host side RS-232C.
For the available type and settings of the host, refer to the pages listed below.
Method
Reference
Host link
Host Link Method (page 52)
NT Link (1:1)
NT Link (1:1) method (page 65)
NT Link (1:N)
Using the NT Link (1:N) Method (page 69)
High-speed NT Link (1:N)
Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method (page 73)
Memory link
Memory Link Method (page 76)
83
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Settings at the
RS-232C/RS-422A
Convertor Unit
(NT-AL001)
5-1
When making a connection between RS-232C and RS-422A/485 ports using an
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit, set the DIP switches on the NT-AL001 as follows.
Example: the terminal resistor is active,
RS-422A, NT Link (1:N).
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
omR on
NT-AL001
Built-in terminal resistor setting (DIP SW1-2)
If at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable, set this switch to ON (to
activate the built-in terminal resistor).
If not at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable, set this switch to
OFF (to inactivate the built-in terminal resistor).
2-wire type/4-wire type selection (DIP SW1-3, SW1-4)
For RS-422A, set both of these switches to OFF (4-wire type).
For RS-485, set both of these switches to ON (2-wire type).
Selection of RS-422A/485 send mode (DIP SW1-5, SW1-6)
For host link or NT Link (1:1), set both of these switches to
OFF. (Always send)
For NT Link (1:N), set SW1-5 to OFF and SW1-6 to ON.
(Sends when CS is H)
Note Read the manual supplied with the NT-AL001 carefully before using the unit.
5-1-2 1:1 Connection between RS-422A/485 at the PT and RS-232C at
the Host
The connection method in which the RS-422A/485 port of an NT631/NT631C
and the RS-232C port of a host are connected via a convertor unit is described
here.
An RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001) is used to convert between
the RS-232C and RS-422A communication methods.
Host link unit/CPU
NT631/NT631C
SYSMAC
CS1 series PC
C-series PC,
CVM1/CV-series PC, SRM1
Serial port B
(RS-422A/485,
terminal block)
RS-422A/485 cable
(max. length: 500 m)
RS-422A terminal block
RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
9-pin connector or
25-pin connector
RS-232C cable
with connectors
9-pin connector
Reference: When using RS-485 as a port for the NT631/NT631C, only NT Link (1:N) method
(standard or high-speed) can be used.
84
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
5-1
Connecting an NT631/NT631C and NT-AL001 (RS-422A)
NT631/NT631C
Host
NT-AL001
RS-422A
RDA
NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation
TRM
RDB
SDA
RS-422A
/485
SDB
terminal
block
NT-AL001 side
Short-circuit
tool
Pin number Abbreviation
RDA (−)
6
RDA (−)
TRM
5
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
4
SDA (−)
SDA (−)
3
SDB (+)
SDB (+)
1
Functional
ground
RS-422A
terminal
block
6
5
4
3
RSA (−)
RSA
8
7
2
RSB (+)
RSB
Functional
ground
1
Shielding wire
24V
+DC
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not make the connection between the
functional ground of the NT-AL001 and the shielding.
Connecting an NT631/NT631C and NT-AL001 (RS-485)
NT631/NT631C
NT-AL001
Host
RS-485
RDA
NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation
TRM
RDB
SDA
RS-422A
/485
SDB
terminal
block
RSA
NT-AL001 side
Short-circuit
tool
Pin number Abbreviation
RDA (−)
6
RDA (−)
TRM
5
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
4
SDA (−)
SDA (−)
3
SDB (+)
SDB (+)
1
Functional
ground
RS-422A
terminal
8
7
block
6
5
4
RSA (−)
3
2
RSB (+)
RSB
1
Functional
ground
Shielding wire
24V
+DC
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not make the connection between the
functional ground of the NT-AL001 and the shielding.
Reference: When using RS-485 as a port for the NT631/NT631C, only NT Link (1:N) method
(standard or high-speed) can be used.
Connecting an NT-AL001 and Host
NT631/NT631C
Host
NT-AL001
RS-232C
Wiring When Connecting a Host Link Unit (25-pin)
Applicable units:
C200H-LK201-V1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C500-LK203
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
CV500-LK201 (communication port 1)
85
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
5-1
Cables with connectors that can be used:
XW2Z-200S (9-pin ⇔ 25-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-500S (9-pin ⇔ 25-pin, 5 m)
CVM1/CV-series host link unit (CV500-LK201) has two types of connector: a
25-pin connector (communication port 1), and a 9-pin connector (communication port 2). When using the communication port, refer to Wiring for Connections
other than Memory Link (page 86).
PC (host link unit) side
NT-AL001 side
1
Abbreviation Pin number
Abbreviation Pin number
6
RS-232C
connector
FG
Connector
hood
Shielding wire
Connector
hood
FG
1
FG
−
1
2
SD
SD
2
3
RD
RD
3
4
RS
RS
4
5
CS
CS
5
6
−
+5V
6
7
SG
−
7
8
−
−
8
−
−
SG
9
−
−
14
13
25
RS-232C
connector
−
(9-pin type)
5
1
9
−
−
20
ER
(25-pin type)
Wiring for Connections Other Than Memory Link
Applicable units:
CV500-LK201 (communication port 2)
CS1W-SCU21
CPM1-10CDR-j
CPM1A-10CDj-j
CPM1A-30CDj-j
CPM1-20CDR-j
CPM1A-20CDj-j
CPM1A-40CDj-j
CPM2A-30CDjj-j
CPM2A-40CDjj-j
CPM2A-60CDjj-j
86
CPM2C-10jjjjjj-j
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CPM2C-20jjjjjj-j
CQM1H-CPU11
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HE-CPU32-E
C200HG-CPU33-E
C200HG-CPU53-E
C200HX-CPU34-E
C200HX-CPU54-E
C200HE-CPU32-ZE
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
C200HE-CPU42-E
C200HG-CPU43-E
C200HG-CPU63-E
C200HX-CPU44-E
C200HX-CPU64-E
C200HE-CPU42-ZE
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
C200HG-CPU33-ZE
C200HG-CPU53-ZE
C200HX-CPU34-ZE
C200HX-CPU54-ZE
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
SRM1-C02-V2
5-1
C200HG-CPU43-ZE
C200HG-CPU63-ZE
C200HX-CPU44-ZE
C200HX-CPU64-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
Usable Cables with Attached Connectors:
• For host link and 1:1 NT Link only (+5 V power wire attached)
SJ45007-102 (9-pin to 9-pin, 0.7 m)
SSJ45007-202 (9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)
• For host link, 1:1 NT Link, or 1:N NT Link (+5 V power supplied from PC)
XW2Z-070T-1 (9-pin to 9-pin, 0.7 m)
XW2Z-200T-1 (9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)
SJ46006-102 (9-pin to 9-pin, 1 m)
SSJ46006-202 (9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)
CVM1/CV-series CPUs whose model names do not have the suffix -EVj cannot be connected by any connection method.
1
6
NT-AL001 side
PC side
RS-232C
connector
5
9
FG
Connector
hood
−
1
1
−
SD
2
2
SD
RD
3
3
RD
RS
4
4
RS
CS
5
5
CS
+5V
6
6
(+5V)
−
7
7
−
−
8
8
−
SG
9
9
SG
(9-pin type)
1
6
Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
FG
hood
Abbreviation Pin number
Shielding wire
(9-pin type)
RS-232C
connector
When there is no +5 V output at the PC side
9
5
When using host link or NT Link (1:1)
When there is +5 V output at the PC side
When using NT Link (1:N)
• When using the host link or NT Link (1:1) method, short the RS and CS terminals at the PC side with each other (leave the RS and CS terminals at the NTAL001 side open).
• When using the NT Link (1:N), cross-connect the RS and CS terminals at the
NT-AL001 and PC sides.
If there is +5 V output at the PC side, no external power supply is required for
the NT-AL001.
87
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
5-1
Wiring for a Memory Link Connection
Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the diagram shown below.
Host side
NT-AL001 side
1
6
RS-232C
connector
FG
Connector
hood
−
1
SD
SD
2
RD
RD
3
RS
RS
4
CS
CS
5
(+5V)
+5V
6
SG
−
7
−
8
SG
9
(9-pin type)
5
Abbreviation
Abbreviation Pin number
Connector
hood
RS-232C
connector
Shielding wire
9
No +5 V output is at the host side
A +5 V output is present at the host side
Since it is necessary to input a voltage of +5 V to the number 6 pin of NT-AL001,
supplying a voltage of 5 V from the host or an external voltage supply for NTAL001 is required.
5-1-3 1:N Connection between RS-422A/485 at the PT and RS-232C at
the Host
The connection method in which the RS-422A/485 ports of multiple NT631/
NT631Cs are connected to the RS-232C port of one host in a 1:N connection is
described here.
An RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001) is used to convert between
the RS-232C and RS-422A/485 communication methods.
Host link unit/CPU
CS1G/H
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
9-pin connector
RS-422A/485 cable
(max. total length: 500 m)
RS-232C cable with
connectors
NT631/NT631C
RS-422A terminal
block
9-pin connector
Serial port B
(RS-422A/485, terminal block)
NT631/NT631C
NT631/NT631C
88
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Connecting an
NT631/NT631C and
NT-AL001 (RS-422A)
5-1
The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay terminal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.
NT631/NT631C
NT-AL001
Host
RS-422A
RDA
NT631/NT631C side
RDB
SDA
SDB
NT-AL001 side
Abbreviation
TRM
RS-422A
/485
terminal
block
Pin number Abbreviation
RDA (−)
6
RDA (−)
TRM
5
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
4
SDA (−)
SDA (−)
3
SDB (+)
SDB (+)
1
Functional
ground
8
7
RS-422A
terminal
block
2
1
RSB (+)
RSB
4
3
RSA (−)
RSA
6
5
Shielding wire
Functional
ground
Next PT
24V
+DC
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not make the connections between the
functional ground of the NT-AL001 and the shielding.
Connecting an
NT631/NT631C and
NT-AL001 (RS-485)
The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay terminal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.
NT631/NT631C
NT-AL001
Host
RS-485
RDA
NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation
TRM
RDB
SDA
RS-422A
/485
SDB
terminal
block
RSA
RDA (−)
6
RDA (−)
TRM
5
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
4
SDA (−)
SDA (−)
3
SDB (+)
SDB (+)
1
Functional
ground
RSA (−)
8
7
RS-422A
terminal
block
6
5
4
3
2
1
RSB (+)
RSB
NT-AL001 side
Pin number Abbreviation
Shielding wire
Functional
ground
Next PT
24V
+DC
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not make the connections between the
functional ground of the NT-AL001 and the shielding.
89
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Connection between
NT631/NT631C Units
(RS-422A)
5-1
The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay terminal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.
NT631/NT631C
Host
NT-AL001
RS-422A
:
RDA
NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation
TRM
RDA (−)
RDB
SDA
RS-422A
/485
SDB
terminal
block
RSA
RSB
24V
+DC
NT631/NT631C side
Short-circuit tool
:
Abbreviation
RDA
TRM
RDA (−)
TRM
TRM
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
SDA (−)
SDA (−)
SDB (+)
SDB (+)
RSA (−)
RSA (−)
RSB (+)
RSB (+)
Functional
ground
Functional
ground
Shielding
wire
RDB
RS-422A
/485
SDA
terminal
block
SDB
RSA
RSB
24V
+DC
* Short TRM and RDA terminals of the NT631/NT631C at the end of the RS-422A
cable (: marked in the above figure) using the short-circuit tool supplied with the
NT631/NT631C.
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, make the connection between the connector hood and the shielding at one side only.
90
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Connection between
NT631/NT631C Units
(RS-485)
5-1
The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay terminal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.
NT631/NT631C
Host
RS-485
:
NT631/NT631C side
NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation
RDA
Short-circuit tool
RDA (−)
TRM
RDB
RS-422A
/485
SDA
terminal
block
SDB
RSA
Abbreviation
:
RDA
RDA (−)
TRM
TRM
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
SDA (−)
SDA (−)
SDB (+)
SDB (+)
RSA (−)
RSA (−)
RSB (+)
RSB (+)
Functional
ground
Functional
ground
TRM
RS-422A
/485
RDB
terminal
block
SDA
SDB
RSA
Shielding wire
RSB
RSB
24V
+DC
24V
+DC
* Short TRM and RDA terminals of the NT631/NT631C at the end of the RS-485
cable (: marked in the above figure) using the short-circuit tool supplied with the
NT631/NT631C.
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, make the connection between the connector hood and the shielding at the one side only.
Connecting an NT-AL001 and Host
NT631/NT631C
Host
NT-AL001
RS-232C
Wiring when connecting a CS1-series CS1G/H Serial Communications
Board, CQM1H Serial Communications Board, or C-series C200HX/HG/
HE(-Z)E Communications Board
Applicable units:
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
CQM1H-CPU51
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
CQM1H-CPU61
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
91
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
5-1
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
Usable Cables with Attached Connectors:
For host link, 1:1 NT Link, or 1:N NT Link (+5 V power supplied from PC)
XW2Z-070T-1 (9-pin to 9-pin, 0.7 m)
XW2Z-200T-1 (9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)
SJ46006-102 (9-pin to 9-pin, 1 m)
SSJ46006-202 (9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)
1
6
NT-AL001 side
PC side
Abbreviation Pin number
RS-232C
connector
5
9
Shielding wire
FG
Connector
hood
Connector
hood
−
1
1
−
SD
2
2
SD
RD
3
3
RD
RS
4
4
RS
CS
5
5
CS
+5V
6
6
+5V
−
7
7
−
−
8
8
−
SG
9
9
SG
(9-pin type)
6
1
Pin number Abbreviation
FG
RS-232C
connector
(9-pin type)
5
9
Since the CS1G/H, CQM1H, and C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E have a +5 V output, no
external power supply is required for the NT-AL001.
5-1-4 Recommended Connectors, Cables, and Crimp Terminals
Connectors and Cables Recommended for RS-232C
When making an RS-232C connecting cable, as far as possible use the recommended parts indicated in the table below. Some units come supplied with one
connector and connector hood.
Check the required parts and prepare them in advance.
Name
Model
Remarks
XM2A-0901
9-pin type
Made by OMRON
CS1-series CS1G/H
C-series CQM1,
C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CVM1/CV-series CPUs
CV500-LK201
XM2A-2501
25-pin type
Made by OMRON
C500-LK203
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C200H-LK201-V1
DB-25P
25-pin type
Made by JAE
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
XM2S-0911
9-pin type
Made by OMRON
C-series CQM1,
C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CVM1/CV-series CPUs
CV500-LK201
XM2S-0913
Made by OMRON 9-pin
XM2S-0911-E
Made by OMRON 9-pin
CS1 series CS1G/CS1H
XM2S-2511
25-pin type
Made by OMRON
C500-LK203
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C200H-LK201-V1
Connector
Connector
hood
DB-C2-J9
92
Delivered with
25-pin type
Made by JAE
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Name
Cable
Model
Remarks
5-1
Delivered with
AWG28 5P
IFVV-SB
Multi-core shielded cable
Made by Fujikura, Ltd.
CO-MA-VV-SB
5P 28AWG
Multi-core shielded cable
Made by Hitachi, Ltd.
Cables with Connectors Made by OMRON
When connecting an NT-AL001 and a PC, use the OMRON cables with connectors indicated in the table below.
Model
Cable Length
XW2Z-200S
2m
XW2Z-500S
5m
XW2Z-200T
2m
XW2Z-500T
5m
1m
SJ45007-102
2m
SJ45007-202
XW2Z-070T-1
0.7 m
2m
XW2Z-200T-1
1m
SJ46006-102
2m
SJ46006-202
Note
Connector Specification
9-pin
9
in ⇔ 25-pin
25 in
Host link, NT Link (1:1)
9 in ⇔ 9-pin
9-pin
9 in
Host link, NT Link (1:1)
9-pin ⇔ 9-pin
Host link, NT Link (1:1)
+5 V power supply wire attached
(Use when the PC does not have a +5 V output.)
9-pin ⇔ 9-pin
Host link, NT Link (1:1), NT Link (1:N)
+5 V power supplied from PC
(Use when the PC has a +5 V output.)
9-pin ⇔ 9-pin
Host link, NT Link (1:1), NT Link (1:N)
+5 V power supplied from PC
(Use when the PC has a +5 V output.)
1. The maximum tensile load of the recommended cable is 30 N. Do not exceed this load.
2. After connecting a connecting cable, always tighten the connector screws.
Recommended Connectors, Cables and Crimp Terminals for RS-422A/485
When making an RS-422A/485 connecting cable, as far as possible use the recommended parts indicated in the table below. Some units come supplied with
one connector and connector hood.
Check the required parts and prepare them in advance.
Name
Model
Maker
XM2A-2501
25-pin type
Made by OMRON
Delivered with the following
units:
C500-LK203
DB-25P F-N
25-pin type
Made by JAE
Delivered with the following
units:
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
XM2S-2511
25-pin type
Made by OMRON
Delivered with the following
units:
C500-LK203
Connector
Connector
hood
DB-C2-J9
Cable
Remarks
TKVVBS4P-03
25-pin type
Made by JAE
Delivered with the following
units:
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
Tachii Electric
Wire Co., Ltd.
93
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Name
Crim
Crimp
terminals
Model
Maker
5-1
Remarks
1.25-N3A
(fork type)
Japan Solderless
Terminal MFG
Y1.25-3.5L
(fork type)
Molex Inc.
Recommended cable size:
AWG22 to
t 18
(0.3 to 0.75 mm2)
The terminal screws of the NT631/NT631C are M3.5 specification. When wiring,
use crimp terminals for M3.5 use. Tighten terminal screws with a tightening
torque of 0.8 [email protected]
Note Always use crimp terminals for wiring.
Examples of applicable terminals
Round type
Fork type
7 mm or less
7 mm or less
5-1-5 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485 Communications
The serial port B connector of the NT631/NT631C has a terminal resistance setting terminal (TRM).
In RS-422A/485 communications, a terminal resistor must be set at the device at
the end of the communication cable, but not at any other device.
The NT631/NT631C has a built-in terminal resistor, and whether or not the terminal resistance is applied is set by shorting or opening the terminal resistance
setting terminals (TRM). The terminal resistance is 120 Ω.
When carrying out RS-422A/485 communications using serial port B, short between TRM and RDA terminals at the NT631/NT631C at the end of the
RS-422A/485 cable. Leave these terminals open at NT631/NT631C units other
than the one at the end of the cable.
When not using RS-422A/485 communications, the terminal resistance setting
is ineffective.
Short-circuit tool
RDA
TRM
RDB
SDA
TRM-RDA terminals
Function
Terminal resistance is applied.
Shorted
Short only at the NT631/NT631C connected to the end of
an RS-422A/485 cable.
Terminal resistance is not applied.
Open
Leave the terminals open when connecting an
NT631/NT631C anywhere other than at the end of the
RS-422A/485 cable.
Note Before connecting or disconnecting cables between devices, make sure that the
power supply to all of the connected devices (NT631/NT631C, PC, etc.) is OFF.
94
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Reference:
5-2
S The internal circuit of the NT631/NT631C is shown below.
–
RDA
Terminal resistor (120 Ω)
TRM
+
Making a connection here inserts a terminator between
+ (RDB) and − (RDA).
RDB
S For details on setting the terminal resistance of NT-AL001, refer to Settings at
the RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit (NT-AL001) (page 84).
5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
The methods for connecting the RS-422A/485 port of the NT631/NT631C and
the RS-422A/485 port of the host are described here. There are the following
methods.
The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON PCs
(By using the memory link method, a connection can be made to any arbitrary
RS-422 unit). When making a connection to a host other than OMRON PCs, refer to the PC Connection Manual (V042-E1-j) or Multi Vendor Connection
Manual (V060-E1-j).
• Method in which the RS-422A ports of the NT631/NT631C and host are connected directly by an RS-422A cable (page 112).
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to 500 m.
PT
Host
RS-422A cable
(max. 500 m)
• Method in which the RS-485 ports of the NT631/NT631C and host are connected by an RS-485 cable (page 115).
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to 500 m.
This connection method can be used only with the NT Link (1:N) method
(standard or high-speed) of type RS-485.
PT
Host
RS-485 cable
(max. 500 m)
• Method in which the RS-422A ports of multiple NT631/NT631Cs and the
RS-422A port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection (page 116).
This connection method is used with the RS-422A type NT Link (1:N) method (standard or high-speed).
PT
Host
RS-422A cable
(max. total length 500 m)
• Method in which the RS-485 ports of multiple NT631/NT631Cs and the
RS-485 port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection (page 118).
95
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
This connection method is used with the RS-485 type NT Link (1:N) method
(standard or high-speed).
PT
Host
RS-485 cable
(max. total length 500 m)
Note One end of the wire must always be connected to the host (PC), and there must
be no branching. Branching will cause problems such as transmission delays
and communication failures.
PC
PC
(At termination)
PC
Relay terminal block
Relay terminal block
Max. 2 m
NT631C
NT631
NT631
(Not at
(Not at
termination) termination) (Not at
termination)
NT631
NT631
NT631C
NT631
NT631
NT631C
NT631
(At
termination)
Example of Good Connection
Examples of Bad Connections
Reference: CS1 series CPUs cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT Link method.
Use the 1:N connection NT Link method (standard or high-speed) instead to
make the 1:1 connection. For details, refer to Using the NT Link (1:N) Method
(page 108) or Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method (page 110).
5-2-1 Host Types and Settings
The types of host that have an RS-422A port and can be connected to the
RS-422A/485 port of the NT631/NT631C, and the settings to be made at the
host, are described here.
When Using the Host Link Method
Compatible Host Units
Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the RS-422A/485 type host link
function built in. With the CS1-series and CQM1H, the host link method can be
used by installing a serial communication board. In addition, some C200HX/HG/
HE(-Z)E devices have an integral CPU that can be connected in the host link
method by installing a communication board.
With the CPM2A and CPM2C, an RS-422A type of 1:1 NT Link can be created
through a CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.
Check the model and series of the PC and the type of the installed Board or Unit
before making a connection.
96
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
The host units featuring the RS-422A/485 type host link function and can be connected to the RS-422A/485 port of the NT631/NT631C are indicated in the table
below.
Units with Built-in Host Link Function
PC Series
CS1 series
Host Link Unit /
Communication Board
CPU
CPUs Connectable with Host
Link Units or Expansion Communication Board
CS1W-SCB41-E
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1
CS1G
CS1H
3G2A6-LK202-EV1
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000H
C2000H
C200H-LK202-V1
C200HS-CPU01/03/21/23/31/33-E
C200HS-CPU01/21-EC
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-E
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-ZE
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E
C200HXCPU34/44/54/64/65/85-ZE
C200HS
C200HE
C200HE-ZE
C200HG
C200HG-ZE
C200HX
C200HX-ZE
C200HE-CPU32/42-E
C200HE-CPU32/42-ZE
C200HE
C200HE-ZE
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE
C200HG
C200HG-ZE
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E
C200HXCPU34/44/54/64/65/85-ZE
C200HX
C200HX-ZE
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000H
C2000H
C500-LK203
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000H
C2000H
C
00
CO 03/06
C200HW-COM03/06-EV1
C series
CPM1-10/20/30CDR-j
+CPM1-CIF11
CPM1
CPM1A-10/20/30/40CDj-j
+CPM1-CIF11
CPM2A-30/40/60CDjj-j
+CPM1-CIF11
(Peripheral port connection)
CPM2A
CPM2C-10/20jjjjjj-j (*1)
CQM1H-SCB41
CV
C
series
se es (*2)
CVM1 series
(*2)
SRM1
Connectable
to
CV500-LK201
C
500
0
CV500-LK201
CPM2C
CQM1H-CPU51/61
CQM1H
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV500
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV1000
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CVM1
SRM1-C02-V1+CPM1-CIF11
SRM1
*1: Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11
RS-422A Adapter to connect.
*2: CPUs of CVM1/CV-series PCs without the suffix -EVj cannot be connected.
The host link method cannot be used when an NT631/NT631C is connected using RS-485. To use the host link method, connect by RS-422A.
Settings at the Host
When using the RS-422A type host link method, the settings shown below must
be made at the host (depending on the unit, some of these settings may not be
necessary, or settings not shown here may be necessary).
97
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Item
5-2
Setting at Host
I/O port
RS-422A
Communications speed
Set the same speed as for the NT631/NT631C. (*1)
Transfer code
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits
Parity
Even
1-to-1/1-to-N
1-to-N(*2)
Instruction level
Level 1, 2, 3
Unit #
00
*1: Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
Comm. Speed memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to Setting
the Host Link Method (page 148).
*2: The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually
possible to connect more than one NT631/NT631C in a single host link.
The setting methods for each type of unit are described in the following.
Connecting to a C Series Host Link Unit
C200H/C200HS/C200HE(-Z)E/C200HG(-Z)E/C200HX(-Z)E
Backplane mounting type: C200H-LK201-V1
Setting the Front Switches
Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the
setting value window agree with the following:
LK201
XMT
RUN
RCV
ERROR
@ Unit # (SW1, SW2)
Set these switches to 0.
SW1
SW2
0
0
5
2
SW3
SW4
@ Instruction level, parity, and transfer code (SW4)
Set this switch to 2.
@ Communications speed (SW3)
Set this switch to 5 to select 9600 bps.
Set this switch to 6 to select 19200 bps.
Setting the Rear Switches
@ Terminator setting (selector switch)
Set this switch to ON.
Terminator
ON
OFF
1-to-1 (ON)
1-to-N (OFF)
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N protocol selection (selector switch)
Set this switch to 1-to-N (OFF).
98
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
C1000H/C2000H rack-mounting type: 3G2A5-LK201-EV1
Setting the Front Switches
Mode
selector
Host Local
@ Mode selector (key switch)
Set this to Host link.
Setting the Rear Switches
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-422A.
I/O port
8
RS-422A
RS-232C
7
6
5
SW1
@ Unit # (DIP SW1)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0).
4
Synchronization
3
2
Internal
External
1
ON
Terminator
@ Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to Internal.
8
7
OFF
ON
6
5
4
CTS
3
0V
External
2
1
ON
SW2
@ Communications speed
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to 0010 to select
19200 bps.
Set these switches to 1010 to select
9600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to 0V (ON).
@ Terminator setting (selector switch)
Set this switch to ON.
99
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
C1000H/C2000H rack-mounting type: C500-LK203
Setting the Rear Switches
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-422A.
5V supply
ON
OFF
8
SW1
7
I/O port
@ Unit #, parity, and transfer code
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-7)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-7 to OFF (0).
6
RS-422A
RS-232C
5
4
3
2
Synchronization
Internal
External
1
ON
Terminator
8
OFF
ON
7
6
5
4
CTS
3
0V
External
2
1
ON
@ Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to Internal.
SW2
@ Communications speed
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to 0010 to select
19,200 bps.
Set these switches to 1010 to select
9,600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to 0V (ON).
@ Terminator setting (selector switch)
Set this switch to ON.
C200H/C1000H/C2000H CPU mounting type: 3G2A6-LK202-EV1
Setting the Rear Switches
@ Unit #, parity, and transfer code
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-5)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0).
* Parity is fixed at Even Parity. Transfer code is
fixed at ASCII 7 data bits and 2 stop bits.
@ Communications speed (DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to 0010 to select 19200 bps.
Set these switches to 1010 to select 9600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
SW1
SW2
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
SW3
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ Terminator setting (DIP SW3-1 to SW3-6)
Set SW3-1, SW3-3, and SW3-5 to ON (1).
Set SW3-2, SW3-4, and SW3-6 to OFF (0).
(Set terminator ON.)
100
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
Connecting to a CVM1/CV Series Host Link Unit
CVM1/CV series rack-mounting type: CV500-LK201
A CVM1/CV series host link unit (CV500-LK201) has two connectors (communication ports 1 and 2). To use the RS-422A type host link method, set communication port 2 to RS-422A.
Communication port 2 is a 9-pin connector which allows selection of the
RS-232C or RS-422A method. When this port is used with the RS-422A method,
the I/O port selector switch on the front of the unit must be set to RS-422A (the
lower position).
CPU Bus Unit Settings
When connecting to a CVM1/CV series host link unit, set the following communication conditions for the CPU bus unit settings.
Item
Setting at Host
Communications speed
Set the same speed as for the NT631/NT631C. (*1)
Transfer code
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits
Parity
Even
1-to-1/1-to-N
1-to-N(*2)
Instruction level
Level 1, 2, 3
*1: Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
Comm. Speed memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to Setting
the Host Link Method (page 148).
*2: The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually
possible to connect more than one NT631/NT631C in a single host link.
Set the CPU bus unit settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g. CX-Programmer).
For details on the CPU bus unit settings, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV-series
Host Link Unit Operation Manual (W205-E1-j).
101
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
Setting the Front Switches
@ Unit # (SW3, SW4)
Set these switches to 0.
Communications port 1
(RS-232C)
Communications port 2
(RS-232C/RS-422A)
I/O port selector switch
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-422A.
RS-232C
RS-422A
@ Communication condition setting (DIP SW1)
Set this switch to OFF.
Communication is executed in accordance with the
CPU bus unit system settings made at the PC. The
initial values for the system settings are as follows.
- Communications speed: 9,600 bps
- Parity: Even
- Xon/Xoff control: Not executed
- Communication method: Full duplex
- Stop bits: 2 stop bits
- Data length: 7 bits
@ Terminator setting (selector switch)
Set this to ON.
Connecting to a CPU Unit
CVM1/CV-series (-EVj) CPUs
• CV500-CPU01-EV1/CV1000-CPU01-EV1/CV2000-CPU01-EV1
• CVM1-CPU01-EV2/CVM1-CPU11-EV2/CVM1-CPU21-EV2
PC Setup
When connecting to a CVM1/CV series CPU, set the following communication
conditions for the PC Setup.
Item
Setting at Host
Communications speed
Set the same speed as for the NT631/NT631C. (*1)
Stop bit
2 stop bits
Parity
Even
Data length
ASCII 7 bits
Unit #
00
*1: Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
Comm. Speed memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to Setting
the Host Link Method (page 148).
Either set the PC Setup directly from a Programming Device (e.g. CX-Programmer), or transmit the PC Setup made at a Programming Device to the CPU.
For details on the PC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV500/CV1000/
CV2000 Operation Manual: Ladder Diagrams (W202-E1-j).
102
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
Setting the Front Switches
@ Host link communication method
selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-422A.
@ Communication type setting (DIP SW3)
Set SW3 to OFF.
(for host link communication)
I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
RS-422A
@ Host link default value settings
(DIP SW4)
To effect the existing DIP switch
settings, set SW4 to ON.
To effect the values set in the PC Setup,
set SW4 to OFF.
Note
For CPUs manufactured before or
during June 1995 (lot No. jj65), the
existing DIP switch settings differ from
the PC Setup default values as follows.
- Existing DIP switch settings:
2,400 bps, 1 stop bit, even parity, 7 bit
data length
- PC Setup default values:
9,600 bps, 2 stop bits, even parity, 7
bit data length
For CPUs manufactured from July 1995
onward (lot No. jj75), the stipulated
values in the DIP switch settings also
are 9600 bps and 2 stop bits.
@ Terminator setting (DIP SW6)
Set this switch to ON.
(Set terminator ON.)
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1H, or SRM1
The connection method depends upon the model of PC being used, as shown in
the following table.
PC model
Connection method
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
• Connect to the RS-422A port (port A) on a Communications
Board.
CQM1H
• Connect to the RS-422A port (port 2) on a Serial Communications Board.
CPM1
• Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF11
RS-422A Adapter.
CPM2A, SRM1
• Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF11
RS-422A Adapter.
CPM2C
• Connect to the peripheral port (on a CPM2C-CN111 or
CS1W-CN114 Connecting Cable) through a CPM1-CIF11
RS-422A Adapter.
(The CPM2C-CN111 splits the Unit’s Communication Port
into a RS-232C port and a peripheral port.)
Reference:
S There are no Communication Boards for the C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E in which
port B is the RS-422A port.
S There are no Serial Communication Boards for the CQM1H in which port 1 is
the RS-422A port.
PC Setup Area Settings
When connecting to a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E or CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C,
CQM1H CPUs or SRM1, set the following communication conditions for the PC
Setup area.
103
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Item
5-2
Setting at Host
I/O port
RS-422A
Communication mode
Host link mode
Communications speed
Set the same speed as for the NT631/NT631C. (*1)
Stop bit
2 stop bits
Parity
Even
Data length
ASCII 7 bits
Unit #
00
*1: Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
Comm. Speed at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to Setting the Host Link
Method (page 148).
Set the PC Setup area settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g. CXProgrammer).
For details on operations relating to the PC Setup area, refer to the manual for
the PC which is used.
The PC Setup area word numbers and settings to be made depending on the
unit to which the connection is made are shown below.
When using port A of the communication board of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
DM6555
0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6556
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
DM6558
When using a CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
DM6650
0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6651
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
DM6653
When using a CQM1H
Word #
Settings
DM6550
0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6551
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
DM6553
104
Writing Value
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
Connecting to a CPM2C
The CPM2C PCs do not have the same kind of port connectors found on
CS1-series PCs. The CPM2C’s communication port handles both RS-232C and
peripheral port connections which are divided internally. Therefore, when using
the CPM2C, it is necessary to select RS-232C or peripheral port connections,
according to the kind of cable and port (on the cable) used, as shown in the following table. Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual for more details.
Peripheral port
CPM2C-CN111
CPM2C
CPM2C
CS1W-CN114
Peripheral port
RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)
Setting Switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communication Board
Set the switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E communication board as follows.
Switch 1: Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A)
Switch 2 : Set to ON for terminator ON (termination resistance applied)
Setting Switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board
Set the switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows.
Wire selection (WIRE): Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A)
Terminator (TERM):
Set to ON for termination ON.
Serial Communications Board
(Inner Board slot 1)
Terminator Switch (TERM)
Set to ON (right side).
Wire Selection Switch (WIRE)
Set to 4 (right side).
Setting the Switches on an RS-422A Adapter
CPM1CIF11
CPM1
Set the terminator selector switch to ON (upper position).
Connecting to a CS1 Series Serial Communication Board
Serial Communications Board with RS-422A/485 port equipped for CS1 series
CPU Type :
CS1W-SCB41 (The port 2 is RS-422A/485 port.)
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of
the CPU. After the settings are written, they become effective by turning the
power ON, restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or executing
the STUP command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the settings
are shown.
105
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Allocation
DM area (CH)
Writing Value
5-2
Settings
Port 2
DM32010
8000
Host link mode, 2 stop bits,
data length 7 bits, even parity,
DM32011
0000
Communication speed
9600 bps.
0007
Communication speed
19200 bps.
DM32012
0000
Transmit delay time
0 ms.
DM32016
0000
No CTS control
Unit No.0 for host link
Using the NT Link (1:1) Method
Compatible Host Units
Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the RS-422A type NT Link (1:1)
function built in.
• The C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E CPUs can be connected by the RS-422A type NT
Link (1:1) method by installing a Communications Board.
• The CQM1H CPUs can be connected by the RS-422A type NT Link (1:1) method by installing a Serial Communications Board.
Check the model and series of the PC against the type of CPU before making the
connections.
The host units that can be connected to the RS-422A port of the NT631/NT631C
by the RS-422A type NT Link (1:1) method are indicated in the table below.
PC Series
C series
CV series (*3)
CVM1 series (*3)
CPUs with Built-in RS-422A type NT
Link (1:1) Function
Model Name
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*1)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E(*1)
C200HE(-Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG(-Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE(*1)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE(*1)
C200HX(-Z)E
CQM1H-CPU51/61
CQM1H
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV500
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV1000
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CVM1
*1: One of the following communication boards is required:
C200HW-COM03-EV1 or C200HW-COM06-EV1.
*2: A CQM1H-SCB41-E Serial Communication Board is required.
*3: CPUs of CVM1/CV series PCs without the suffix -EVj cannot be connected.
The NT Link (1:1) method cannot be used using RS-485. To use the NT Link
(1:1) method, connect by RS-422A.
The 1:1 NT Link connection using RS-422A/485 is not possible with the CPM1,
CPM2A, or CPM2C.
106
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
Settings at the Host
The setting methods for each type of unit are described in the following.
• Connecting to a CVM1/CV-series (-EVj) CPUs
• CV500-CPU01-EV1/CV1000-CPU01-EV1/CV2000-CPU01-EV1
• CVM1-CPU01-EV2/CVM1-CPU11-EV2/CVM1-CPU21-EV2
PC Setup
When connecting to the CVM1/CV series CPU by the NT Link (1:1) method, no
particular settings are required at the PC Setup.
Setting the Front Switches
@ Host link communication method selection
(selector switch)
Set this to RS-422A.
I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
RS-422A
@ Communication type setting (DIP SW3)
Set this switch to ON.
(for communication by NT Link)
@ Terminator setting (DIP SW6)
Set this switch to ON.
(Set terminator ON.)
• Connecting to a C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
PC Setup Area Settings
Write the PC Setup area (data memory) settings directly from a Programming
Device (e.g. CX-Programmer) in accordance with the host model.
Host Model
Word #
Writing Value
Setting
Port A of
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E*1
DM6555
4000
Use NT Link (1:1)
( )
Port 2 of
CQM1H*2
DM6550
4000
*1: RS-422A port of the communication board
*2: RS-422A port of the Serial Communications Board
For details on operations relating to the PC Setup area, refer to the manual for
the PC you are using.
Setting the DIP Switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communication Board
Set the switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E communication board as follows.
Switch 1: Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A)
Switch 2 : Set to ON for terminator ON (termination resistance applied)
Setting Switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board
Set the switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows.
Wire selection (WIRE): Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A)
107
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Terminator (TERM):
5-2
Set to ON for termination ON.
Serial Communications Board
(Inner Board slot 1)
Terminator Switch (TERM)
Set to ON (right side).
Wire Selection Switch (WIRE)
Set to 4 (right side).
Using the NT Link (1:N) Method
Compatible Host Units
The OMRON PCs that can be connected using the RS-422A/485 type NT Link
(1:N) method are the CS1G/H, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, and CQM1H models only.
A Serial Communications Board or a communications board must be installed to
make the connection.
Check the model and series of the PC against the type of CPU or communications board before making the connections.
The host units that can be connected to the RS-232C port of the NT631/NT631C
by the RS-422A type NT Link (1:N) function via a convertor are indicated in the
table below.
PC
Series
CPUs with Built-in
RS-422A type
NT Link (1:1) Function
CS1
series
C series
CPU that becomes connectable
by installing a communication
board
Model Name
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1(*1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1(*1)
CS1G
CS1H
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*2)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E(*2)
C200HE
(-Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE(*2)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE(*2)
C200HX
(-Z)E
CQM1H-CPU51/61(*3)
CQM1H
*1: The serial CS1W-SCB41-E communication board is required.
*2: A C200HW-COM03-V1 or C200-COM06-V1 communication board is required.
*3: A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communication Board is required.
Settings at the Host
C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
PC Setup Area Settings
Write the communication conditions directly into the PC Setup area (data
memory) using a Programming Device (e.g. CX-Programmer).
Make the setting indicated in the word shown below.
108
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Connection to
Word #
Writing Value
Port A of a C200HX/
HG/HE(-Z)E*1
DM6555
5j00
Port 2 of a CQM1H*2
DM6550
5j00
5-2
Setting
Use NT Link (1:N)
j = highest unit number of the
connected PTs ((1 to 7))*3
*1: The Communications Board’s RS-422A/485 port
*2: The Serial Communications Board’s RS-422A/485 port
*3: When using C200HE(-Z)E, the maximum PT unit number is 3.
For details on setting the PC Setup area settings, refer to the PC’s operation
manual.
Reference:
S There are no Serial Communication Boards for the C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E in
which port B is the RS-422A/485 port.
S There are no Serial Communication Boards for the CQM1H in which port 1 is
the RS-422A/485 port.
Setting the DIP Switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communication Board
Set the switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E communication board as follows.
Switch 1: Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A), or
Set to 2 (2-wire type, for RS-485)
Switch 2 : Set to ON for terminator ON (termination resistance applied)
Setting Switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board
Set the switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows.
Wire selection (WIRE): Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A)
or
Set to 2 (2-wire type, for RS-485)
Terminator (TERM):
Set to ON for termination ON.
Serial Communications Board
(Inner Board slot 1)
Terminator Switch (TERM)
Set to ON (right side)
Wire Selection Switch (WIRE)
When using RS-422A: Set to 4 (right side) for 4-wire type.
When using RS-485: Set to 2 (left side) for 2-wire type.
Connecting to CS1 Series Serial Communication Board
Serial Communications Board with RS-422A/485 port equipped for CS1 series
CPU type :
CS1W-SCB41 (The port 2 is RS-422A/485 port.)
109
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
Setting the Front Switches
RDY
COMM1
COMM2
Port 1
RS-232C
PORT1
Terminal resistance setting switch (TER)
Set to ON (Terminal resistance is present.)
(right side)
OFF
2
Port 2
RS-422A/485
ON TERM
4
WIRE
PORT2
(RS422/
RS485)
Two wire type/four wire type changeover switch (WIRE)
For RS-422A : 4 (4 wire type) (right side)
For RS-485 : 2 (2 wire type) (left side)
SCB41
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of
the CPU. After settings are written, they become effective by turning the power
ON, restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or executing the
STUP command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are
shown.
Allocation DM
area (CH)
Writing Value
Settings
Port 2
DM32010
8200
NT Link (1:N) mode
DM32011
0000 to 0009 (*1)
Communications baud rate (standard)
DM32016
000j
j = The largest model number of the connected PT (0 – 7)
*1: Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between
0000 and 0009 Hex.
For example, when connecting PTs with model numbers 3, 4, 5, and 6 to port 2 in
the NT Link (1:N), set a value of 8200 Hex for D32010, 0000 Hex for DM32011,
and 0006 Hex for D32016.
Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method
Compatible Host Units
Only OMRON’s CS1H and CS1G PCs support the high-speed 1:N NT Link
through RS-422A/RS-485. The high-speed 1:N NT Link must be established
through a CS1W-SCB41-E Serial Communications Board. (If a Serial Communications Board is used, even CS1-series Units without the “-V1” suffix can be
connected via high-speed 1:N NT Link.)
Be sure to check the model number of the PC and Board/Unit before trying to
establish the high-speed 1:N NT Link.
110
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
The following table shows which CS1-series PCs can be connected to an
NT631/NT631C with the high-speed 1:N NT Link through RS-422A/RS-485.
PCs supporting direct connection to
the CPU Unit
PCs supporting connection through a
Serial Communication Board
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1) (*1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1) (*1)
---
*1: A CS1W-SCB41-E Serial Communication Board is required.
Settings at the Host
Connecting to a CS1 Series Serial Communication Board
Serial Communications Board equipped with an RS-422A/485 port for CS1-series CPU Units:
CS1W-SCB41 (Port 2 is an RS-422A/485 port.)
Reference: Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units with lot number 991220 (12/20/99) and later support the high-speed 1:N NT Link. Boards and
Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used.
Setting the Front Switches
RDY
COMM1
COMM2
Port 1
RS-232C
PORT1
Terminator Switch (TERM)
Set to ON (right side)
OFF
2
ON TERM
4
WIRE
PORT2
(RS422/
RS485)
Port 2
RS-422A/485
Wire Selection Switch (WIRE)
RS-422A: Set to 4 (right side) for 4-wire type.
RS-485: Set to 2 (left side) for 2-wire type.
SCB41
Allocation DM area settings for CPU
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of
the CPU. After settings are written, they become effective by turning the power
ON, restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or executing the
STUP command.
In the following table, the relevant word addresses in the allocation DM area and
settings are shown.
Allocation DM area
Port 2
Writing
Value
Settings
DM32010
8200
NT Link (1:N) mode
DM32011
000A
Communications baud rate (high-speed)
DM32016
000j
j = The largest model number of the
connected PT (0 – 7)
For example, when connecting PTs with model numbers 3, 4, 5, and 6 to port 2,
set the value 8200 Hex to DM32010, 000A Hex to DM32011, and 0006 Hex to
DM32016.
111
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
When using the Memory
Link Method
5-2
With the memory link method, the connection can be made to a personal computer and an FA computer with RS-422A.
When connecting to the host with the memory link method, it is necessary to
create a program for the memory link at the host side.
The following are the communication conditions that can be used with the
memory link method. For the host (a personal computer, an FA computer, etc.),
its setting should be compatible to one of the communication conditions listed in
the following table. Set the same communication conditions at the
NT631/NT631C by the memory switch. (page 155).
Item
Setting at Host
Input/Output board
RS-422A
Communication speed
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps.
Data bits length
7 bits, 8 bits
Stop bits length
1 bit, 2 bits
Parity
None, even, odd
Flow control
None, XON/XOFF
5-2-2 Direct Connection between RS-422A Ports at Both Units
The connection method in which the RS-422A ports of an NT631/NT631C and a
host are connected is described here.
Host link/CPU/
Communication unit
NT631/NT631C
SYSMAC
CS1 series PLC,
C series PLC,
CVM1/CV series
PLC, SRM1
Serial port B
(RS-422A/485, terminal block)
9-pin connector or
25-pin connector
RS-422A cable with connectors (max. length: 500 m)
Connecting an NT631/NT631C and Host (RS-422A)
Host
NT631/NT631C
RS-422A
112
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
Wiring When Connecting a C-series Host Link Unit or CPM1 (Host Link)
Applicable units:
C200H-LK202-V1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C500-LK203
3G2A6-LK202-EV1
RDA
NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation
TRM
RDB
SDA
RS-422A
/485
SDB
terminal
block
RSA
RSB
Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
hood
FG
TRM
1
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
2
−
SDA (−)
3
SG
SDB (+)
4
−
RSA (−)
5
SDB (+)
RSB (+)
6
RDA (−)
Functional
ground
7
RDA (−)
RS-422A
terminal
block
FG
8
−
9
Functional
ground
9
5
(9-pin type)
24V
+DC
6
1
PLC side
Short-circuit tool
Shielding wire
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT631/NT631C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
Wiring When Connecting CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, or SRM1
Applicable units:
CPM1-10CDR-j
CPM1A-10CDj-j
CPM1A-30CDj-j
CPM2A-30CDjj-j
CPM2A-60CDjj-j
CPM2C-10jjjjjj-j
CPM1-20CDR-j
CPM1A-20CDj-j
CPM1A-40CDj-j
CPM2A-40CDjj-j
CPM2C-20jjjjjj-j
SRM1-C02-V2
Connect to the PC through a CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.
RDA
NT631/NT631C side
TRM
Abbreviation
RDA (−)
RDB
SDA
SDB
RS-422A/
485
connector
RSA
RSB
PLC side
Short-circuit tool
Shielding wire
Abbreviation
FG
FG
SG
TRM
SG
RDB (+)
SDB (+)
RS-422A
terminal
SDA (−)
SDA (−)
block
SDB (+)
RDB (+)
RSA (−)
RDA (−)
RSB (+)
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA
(9-pin type)
Functional
ground
24V
+DC
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT631/NT631C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
Wiring When Connecting a CS1-series CS1G/H Serial Communications
Board, C series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communication Board, CQM1H Serial Communications Board, or CVM1/CV-series Host Link Unit
Applicable units:
CS1G-CPU42-EV1
CS1G-CPU44-EV1
CS1H-CPU63-EV1
CS1G-CPU43-EV1
CS1G-CPU45-EV1
CS1H-CPU64-EV1
113
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
CS1H-CPU65-EV1
CS1H-CPU67-EV1
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
5-2
CS1H-CPU66-EV1
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
CV500-LK201 (communication port 2)
RDA
Abbreviation
TRM
RDA (−)
RDB
SDA
SDB
RS-422A/
485
Short-circuit tool
Shielding wire
Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
FG
hood
TRM
1
SDA (−)
RDB (+)
2
SDB (+)
SDA (−)
3
−
SDB (+)
4
−
RSA (−)
5
−
RSB (+)
6
RDA (−)
Functional
ground
7
−
8
RDB (+)
interface
RSA
RSB
6
1
PLC side
NT631/NT631C side
RS-422A
interface
−
9
(9-pin type)
24V
+DC
9
5
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT631/NT631C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
Wiring When Connecting a CVM1/CV-series CPU
Applicable units:
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EVj
CVM1-CPU21-EVj
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU11-EVj
CVM1/CV-series CPUs whose model names do not have the suffix -EVj cannot be connected by any connection method.
RDA
Abbreviation
TRM
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
RS-422A/
485
Short-circuit tool
Shielding wire
Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
hood
FG
TRM
1
SDA (−)
RDB (+)
2
SDB (+)
SDA (−)
3
−
SDB (+)
4
PS
RSA (−)
5
CS
RSB (+)
6
RDA (−)
Functional
ground
7
−
8
RDB (+)
RDA (−)
interface
9
24V
+DC
6
1
PLC side
NT631/NT631C side
RS-422A
interface
−
(9-pin type)
5
9
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT631/NT631C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
114
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
Wiring for a Memory Link Connection
Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the following diagram.
RDA
NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation
TRM
RDA (−)
RDB
SDA
SDB
RS-422A/
485
Short-circuit tool
Shielding wire
Host side
Abbreviation
Connector
hood
TRM
SDA (−)
RDB (+)
SDB (+)
SDA (−)
RS
RS-422A
connector
interface
RSA
RSB
SDB (+)
CS
RSA (−)
RDA (−)
RSB (+)
RDB (+)
Functional
ground
24V
+DC
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT631/NT631C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
5-2-3 Direct Connection between RS-485 Ports at Both Units
The connection method in which the RS-485 ports of an NT631/NT631C and a
host are connected is described here.
NT631/NT631C
CPU
CS1G/H
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Serial port B
(RS-422A/485, terminal block)
9-pin connector
RS-485 cable with connectors (max. length: 500 m)
Reference: When RS-485 is used at the PT side, only the NT Link (1:N) method (standard or
high-speed) can be used.
Connecting an NT631/NT631C and Host
Host
NT631/NT631C
RS-485
Wiring When Connecting a CS1-series CS1G/H Serial Communications
Board and C Series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communications Board, or
CQM1H Serial Communications Board
Applicable units:
CS1G-CPU42-EV1
CS1G-CPU44-EV1
CS1H-CPU63-EV1
CS1H-CPU65-EV1
CS1H-CPU67-EV1
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
CS1G-CPU43-EV1
CS1G-CPU45-EV1
CS1H-CPU64-EV1
CS1H-CPU66-EV1
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
115
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
Abbreviation
TRM
RDB
RS-422A/
485
SDA
Short-circuit tool
Shielding wire
Connector
hood
FG
1
SDA (−)
RDB (+)
2
SDB (+)
SDA (−)
3
−
SDB (+)
4
−
RSA (−)
5
−
RSB (+)
6
RDA (−)
Functional
ground
7
−
8
RDB (+)
interface
SDB
RSA
RSB
6
Pin number Abbreviation
TRM
RDA (−)
1
PLC side
NT631/NT631C side
RDA
5-2
RS-422A
interface
−
9
5
9
(9-pin type)
24V
+DC
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT631/NT631C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
5-2-4 1:N Connection among RS-422A Ports
The connection method in which the RS-422A ports of multiple
NT631/NT631Cs and one host are connected in a 1:N connection is described
here.
CPU
CS1G/H
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
9-pin connector
RS-422A cables
(max. total length 500 m)
NT631/NT631C
Serial port B
(RS-422A/485, terminal block)
NT631/NT631C
NT631/NT631C
Reference:
S Communication using the RS-422A type standard NT Link (1:N) method is
possible only when a CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed
in a CS1 series CS1G/H, a Communications Board is installed in a C200HX/
HG/HE(-Z)E, or a CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed
in a CQM1H.
S Communication using the RS-422A type high-speed NT Link (1:N) method is
possible only when a CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed
in a CS1 series CS1G/H.
116
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
Connecting between NT631/NT631C Units
NT631/NT631C
Host
RS-422A
:
NT631/NT631C side
RDA
NT631/NT631C side
Short-circuit tool
Abbreviation
Abbreviation
TRM
RDA (−)
RDB
RS-422A/
485
SDA
:
TRM
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
SDA (−)
SDA (−)
SDB (+)
SDB (+)
RSA
RSA (−)
RSA (−)
RSB (+)
RSB (+)
Functional
ground
Functional
ground
RSB
RDB
RS-422A/
485
interface
interface
SDB
TRM
RDA (−)
TRM
Shielding wire
RDA
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
24V
+DC
24V
+DC
* Short TRM and RDA terminals of the NT631/NT631C at the end of the RS-422A
cable (: marked in the above figure) using the short-circuit tool supplied with the
NT631/NT631C.
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, connect the functional ground of only one of
the NT631/NT631C units to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
Connecting an NT631/NT631C and a Host
NT631/NT631C
Host
RS-422A
Wiring When Connecting a CS1-series CS1G/H Serial Communication
Board, C Series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communication Board, or CQM1H
Serial Communications Board
Applicable units:
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
117
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
PLC side
NT631/NT631C side
RDA
Abbreviation
TRM
RS-422A/
485
SDA
Shielding wire
Connector
hood
FG
TRM
1
SDA (−)
RDB (+)
2
SDB (+)
SDA (−)
3
−
SDB (+)
4
−
RSA (−)
5
−
RSB (+)
6
RDA (−)
Functional
ground
7
−
8
RDB (+)
interface
SDB
RSA
RSB
6
Pin number Abbreviation
RDA (−)
RDB
1
5-2
Next PT
9
RS-422A
interface
−
(9-pin type)
24V
+DC
5
9
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT631/NT631C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
5-2-5 1:N Connection among RS-485 Ports
The connection method in which the RS-485 ports of multiple NT631/NT631Cs
and one host are connected in a 1:N connection is described here.
CPU
CS1G/H
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
9-pin connector
RS-485 cables
(max. total length 500 m)
NT631/NT631C
Serial port B
(RS-422A/485, terminal block)
NT631/NT631C
NT631/NT631C
Reference:
S Communication using the RS-485 type standard NT Link (1:N) method is
possible only when a CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed
in a CS1 series CS1G/H, a Communications Board is installed in a C200HX/
HG/HE(-Z)E, or a CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed
in a CQM1H.
S Communication using the RS-485 type high-speed NT Link (1:N) method is
possible only when a CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed
in a CS1 series CS1G/H.
118
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
Connecting between NT631/NT631C Units
NT631/NT631C
Host
RS-485
:
NT631/NT631C side
NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation
RDA
Short-circuit tool
RDA (−)
TRM
RDB
RS-422A
/485
SDA
terminal
block
SDB
RSA
Abbreviation
:
RDA
RDA (−)
TRM
TRM
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
SDA (−)
SDA (−)
SDB (+)
SDB (+)
RSA (−)
RSA (−)
RSB (+)
RSB (+)
Functional
ground
Functional
ground
TRM
RS-422A
/485
RDB
terminal
block
SDA
SDB
RSA
Shielding wire
RSB
RSB
24V
+DC
24V
+DC
* Short TRM and RDA terminals of the NT631/NT631C at the end of the RS-485
cable (: marked in the above figure) using the short-circuit tool supplied with the
NT631/NT631C.
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT631/NT631C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
Connecting an
NT631/NT631C and a
Host
The relay terminal block is not included in this figure. Insert the relay terminal
block so as to achieve the wiring configuration shown below.
NT631/NT631C
Host
RS-485
Wiring When Connecting a CS1-series CS1G/H Serial Communication
Board, C Series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communication Board, or CQM1H
Serial Communications Board
Applicable units:
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
119
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
RDA
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
RS-422A/
485
SDB
terminal
block
6
Pin number Abbreviation
Shielding wire
Connector
hood
FG
TRM
1
SDA (−)
RDB (+)
2
SDB (+)
SDA (−)
3
−
SDB (+)
4
−
RSA (−)
5
−
RSB (+)
6
RDA (−)
Functional
ground
7
−
8
RDB (+)
RDA (−)
SDA
1
PLC side
Abbreviation
RDB
RSB
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
NT631/NT631C side
TRM
RSA
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
5-2
9
Next PT
RS-422A
connector
−
5
(9-pin type)
24V
+DC
9
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT631/NT631C to the shielding of the RS-485A cable.
5-2-6 Recommended Connectors, Cables and Crimp Terminals
Connectors and Cables Recommended for RS-422A/485
When making an RS-422A/485 connecting cable, as far as possible use the recommended parts indicated in the table below. When using the memory link
method, however, use a connector that matches with the RS-422A port at the
CPU (CP) side. Some units come supplied with one connector and connector
hood.
Check the required parts and prepare them in advance.
Name
Connector
Model
XM2A-0901
Maker
9-pin type
Made by OMRON
9-pin type
XM2S-0911
Connector
hood
Made by
OMRON
9-pin type
XM2S-0911-E
Cable
Crim
Crimp
terminals
Made by
OMRON
TKVVBS4P-03
Tachii Electric
Wire Co., Ltd.
1.25-N3A
(fork type) *1
Japan Solderless
Terminal MFG
Y1.25-3.5L
(fork type) *1
Molex Inc.
*1: Crimp terminals of common use for M3 and M3.5
120
Remarks
Delivered with the following
units:
CS1 series CS1G/H
C series C200HS
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Delivered with the following
units:
CVM1/CV series CPU unit
CV500-LK201
Delivered with the following
units:
C series C200HS
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Delivered with the following
units:
CVM1/CV series CPU unit
CV500-LK201
Delivered with the following
units:
CS1 series CS1G/H
Recommended cable size:
AWG22 to
t 18
(0.3 to 0.75 mm2)
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
The terminal screws of the NT631/NT631C are M3.5 specification. When wiring,
use crimp terminals for M3.5 use. Tighten terminal screws with a tightening
torque of 0.8 [email protected]
The terminal screws of the RS-422A adaptor (CPM1-CIF11) are M3 specification. When wiring, use crimp terminals for M3 use. Tighten terminal screws with
a tightening torque of 0.5 [email protected]
Note
1. Make sure to tighten screws at the connectors after cable connection.
2. Always use crimp terminals for wiring at terminal blocks.
Examples of Applicable Terminals
• For M3.5
Round type
Fork type
7 mm or less
7 mm or less
• For M3
Round type
Fork type
6.2 mm or less
6.2 mm or less
5-2-7 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485 Communications
The serial port B connector of the NT631/NT631C has a terminal resistance setting terminal (TRM).
In RS-422A/485 communications, a terminal resistor must be set at the device at
the end of the communication cable, but not at any other device.
The NT631/NT631C has a built-in terminal resistor, and whether or not the terminal resistance is applied is set by shorting or opening the terminal resistance
setting terminals (TRM). The terminal resistance is 120 Ω.
When carrying out RS-422A/485 communications using serial port B, short between terminals at the NT631/NT631C at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable.
Leave these terminals open at NT631/NT631C units other than the one at the
end of the cable.
When not using RS-422A/485 communications, the terminal resistance setting
is ineffective.
Short-circuit tool
RDA
TRM
RDB
SDA
TRM-RDA
terminals
Function
Terminal resistance is applied.
Shorted
Short only at the NT631/NT631C connected to the end of an
RS-422A/485 cable.
Terminal resistance is not applied.
Open
Leave the terminals open when connecting an NT631/NT631C
anywhere other than at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable.
Note Before connecting or disconnecting cables between devices, make sure that the
power supply to all of the connected devices (NT631/NT631C, PC, etc.) is OFF.
121
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Reference:
5-2
S The internal circuit of the NT631/NT631C is shown below.
–
+
RDA
Terminal resistor (120 Ω)
TRM
Making a connection here inserts a terminator between
+ (RDB) and − (RDA).
RDB
S For details on setting the terminal resistance of the host unit, refer to Setting
methods for each type of the communication.
122
SECTION 6
System Menu Operation
This section describes the operation of the System Menu, focusing on the procedure to start up the NT631/NT631C.
Functions which are convenient when using the NT631/NT631C and those that are useful for system maintenance are also
explained here.
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
System Menu Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-1
Operation at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation Modes and the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-1
Relationships among Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-2
Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-3
Operations with the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-1
Clearing Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-2
Initializing Display History Record Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-3
Initializing Alarm History Record Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-4
Initializing the Recipe Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-5
Initializing the Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-6
Initializing the Memory Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operations in the System Installer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-1
Setting the Display Language in the System Installer Mode . . . . . . . .
6-5-2
Clearing/Installing the System Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-3
Changing the System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-4
Clearing Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmitting the Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches .
6-7-1
About Communication Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-2
Setting the Host Link Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-3
Setting the NT Link (1:1) Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-4
Setting the NT Link (1:N) Method (Standard/High-speed) . . . . . . . . .
6-7-5
Setting the Memory Link Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-6
Setting the Communication Type for Serial Port B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Various System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-1
Memory Switch Setting Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-2
Setting the Start-up Wait Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-3
Setting the Key Press Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-4
Setting the Buzzer Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-5
Setting the Printer Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-6
Setting the Print Method (NT631C Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-7
Setting Screen Saver Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-8
Setting the Screen Saver Start-up Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-9
Setting the History Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-10
Setting the Resume Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-11
Setting the Automatic Reset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-12
Setting the Time-out Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-13
Setting the Retry Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
125
126
126
127
127
128
129
131
131
133
134
136
137
138
140
140
140
142
143
144
147
147
150
152
152
155
157
158
158
159
159
160
161
162
164
165
166
168
170
172
174
176
177
123
Section 6
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
124
System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-1
I/O Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-2
Displaying/Setting the Calendar and Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-3
Checking the PT Setting Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-4
Displaying and Printing the Display History Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-5
Displaying and Printing the Alarm History Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-6
Checking Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-7
Device Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-8
Checking Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Console Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12-1
Usable Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12-2
Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12-3
Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Monitor Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13-1
Compatible Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13-2
Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13-3
Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14-1
Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
181
181
185
187
188
190
192
195
205
211
212
213
214
217
218
218
219
219
220
System Menu Operation Flow
6-1
Section
6-1
System Menu Operation Flow
Follow the procedure below when using the NT631/NT631C for the first time or
changing the system program.
Create the Screen Data
Create the data to be displayed on the NT631/NT631C by using the Support
Tool.
For details on creating screen data, refer to the NT-series Support Tool Ver. 4.1
for Windows Operation Manual (V061-E1-j).
Start Up the
NT631/NT631C (Display
the System Menu) (page
126)
Turn ON the power to the NT631/NT631C.
If no screen data has been registered, an error message is displayed. In this
case, press the OK touch switch on the error message screen to display the System Menu.
If screen data has been registered and the RUN mode is established, perform
the appropriate operations on the touch panel to display the System Menu.
Initialize the Memory
(page 131)
If necessary, initialize the memory of the NT631/NT631C by operation from the
System Menu.
Transmit the Screen Data
(page 144)
Connect the Support Tool to the NT631/NT631C and transmit the screen data
from the Support Tool to the NT631/NT631C.
For details on connecting the Support Tool, refer to 3-2 Connecting to the Support Tool (page 33).
Set the Memory Switches
(pages 147, 158, 177)
Select the System Menu and set the operations of the NT631/NT631C — for example the conditions for communication with the host — using the memory
switches.
Start Operation (page
158)
Connect the NT631/NT631C to the host and start operation.
System Maintenance
(page 181)
If an error occurs during operation, check the I/Os, settings, etc., by referring to
this guide.
125
Section
Starting the NT631/NT631C
6-2
6-2
Starting the NT631/NT631C
After checking that the hardware has been connected correctly, switch on the
power to the NT631/NT631C to start it up.
This section describes the operation of the NT631/NT631C when it is started up.
6-2-1 Operation at Startup
The NT631/NT631C operates as follows when the power is switched ON, or
when it is reset.
Initial Processing
Self diagnosis — including a check on the internal memory of the
NT631/NT631C and a system program check — and the internal processing required for startup, are performed.
If an error occurs during initial processing, an error screen is displayed.
If there is an error in the system program, the system program must be reinstalled. For details on the installation procedure, refer to 6-5 Operations in the
System Installer Mode (page 140).
Memory Unit Check and
Processing
Check if a memory unit is installed. If a memory unit is installed, processing
(screen data and system program reading/writing) is executed in accordance
with its DIP switch settings (pages 36, 44).
If there is an error in the screen data, an error screen is displayed. Pressing the
OK touch switch on the error screen will return the display to that immediately
before the error occurred. It is also possible to display the System Menu from the
error screen by pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously. If there is an error in the system program, the main menu of the system installer mode is displayed. If this is the case, reinstall the proper system program.
Initialize the memory or change the settings as required.
Start of Communication
with the Host
Communication with the host starts in accordance with the communication
method set in the system memory of the NT631/NT631C. During the interval until communication is established, the system initialization screen (screen No.
9000) is displayed.
For details, refer to 6-8 Starting Operation (page 158).
If the system initialization screen remains on, display the System Menu by
pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously, and check
the settings for the communication conditions for communication with the host.
Operation Start
The RUN mode is established, and operation starts in accordance with the
screen data in the NT631/NT631C.
When changing the settings or checking the statuses, perform the appropriate
operation by displaying the System Menu. For details on displaying the System
Menu, refer to 6-3-3 Operations with the System Menu (page 129).
126
Section
Operation Modes and the System Menu
6-3
6-3
Operation Modes and the System Menu
The NT631/NT631C operates in four modes: the RUN, Transmit, Maintenance,
and Expansion modes. These modes are selected from the System Menu.
In addition, the NT631/NT631C also features the System Installer mode which is
used specifically for installing the system program.
The System Installer mode is selected by operation at the panel when the
NT631/NT631C power is switched ON.
6-3-1 Relationships among Modes
The relationships among the System Menu, each of the operation modes, and
the System Installer mode, are indicated in the figure below.
For details on system menu operation, refer to 6-3-3 Operations with the System
Menu (page 129).
[RUN Mode]
[Transmit Mode]
This is the mode in which
the NT631/NT631C
operates.
In this mode the
NT631/NT631C can be
controlled from the host,
and various display and
I/O operations are
possible.
In this mode, screen
data and other data are
transmitted between the
Support Tool and the
NT631/NT631C.
To change system
settings or screen
data contents
When system
settings and screen
data registration have
been completed
To change system
settings or screen
data contents.
SYSTEM MENU
[Maintenance Mode]
In this mode,
NT631/NT631C
maintenance operations,
such as initialization of
the memory, checking
settings, and the I/O
check, are executed.
Quit
Power ON
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Expansion Mode
[Expansion Mode]
In this mode, the
Programming Console
function is used, or check
the version of system
program.
If there is no system
program, or if the
settings for data
control are changed...
[System Installer Mode]
In this mode, the system program of the
NT631/NT631C is installed, display of the
System Menu is enabled or disabled, and
screen data changes are enabled and
disabled, among other operations.
Items in the System
Menu
The items displayed in the system menu and their functions are as follows.
Menu Item
Function
Quit
Clear the System Menu screen and return to the RUN mode
screen.
Transmit Mode
Display the Transmit Mode screen to allow transmission for
screen data between the Support Tool and the
NT631/NT631C. For details on transmission of screen data,
refer to 6-6 Transmitting the Screen Data (page 144).
127
Section
Operation Modes and the System Menu
Menu Item
6-3
Function
Maintenance Mode Display the Maintenance Mode menu to allow system maintenance of the NT631/NT631C, and various NT631/NT631C
settings.
Expansion Mode
Functions of the System
Installer Mode
Display the Expansion Mode menu to allow selection of the
expansion functions supported by the NT631/NT631C. The
following expansion functions are supported:
• Version Display
Displays the version of system program, the date it was
created, and the PT model. For details, refer to 6-14 Version
Display.
• Programming Console Function
Allows the NT631/NT631C to be used as a Programming Console for a CS1G/CS1H, CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1,
CQM1H, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), or SRM1.
For details, refer to 6-12 Programming Console Function.
• Device Monitor Function
Allows the NT631/NT631C to change the PC’s operating mode
and display/change the contents of words in a CS1G/CS1H,
CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HX/HG/
HE(-Z), or SRM1. For details, refer to 6-13 Device Monitor
Function in this manual or 2-16 Device Monitor Function in the
Reference Manual.
The following functions can be executed in the System Installer mode.
• Setting the display language
• Clearing and installing system programs
• Disabling/enabling display of the System Menu.
• Disabling/enabling writing to the screen data memory
• Clearing screen data
For details on these functions, refer to 6-5 Operations in the System Installer
Mode (page 140).
6-3-2 Menu Tree
The System Menu allows the various functions of the NT631/NT631C to be
executed by using touch switches displayed on the touch panel. The menu tree,
starting from the System Menu, is shown below.
For details on System Menu operations, refer to 6-3-3 Operations with the System Menu (page 129).
128
Section
Operation Modes and the System Menu
6-3
The menu tree may differ according to the system program installed in the
NT631/NT631C. The menu tree for the system program that is installed in the
NT631/NT631C on shipment is shown below.
SYSTEM INSTALLER MODE
Exit System Installer
Download System Program (page 140)
Change System Settings (page 142)
Erase Screen Data (page 143)
SYSTEM MENU
MEMORY INIT. MENU
Quit
Transmit Mode (page 144)
Maintenance Mode
Expansion Mode
Quit
Screen Data (page 131)
Display History (page 133)
Alarm History (page 134)
Recipe Table (page 136)
Memory Table (page 137)
Memory Switch (page 138)
MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU
Quit
Memory Init.
Memory Switch
I/O Settings
Calendar Check (page 185)
PT Settings (page 187)
Display History
Alarm History
Screen Data Disp. (page 192)
I/O Check
MEMORY
SWITCH MENU
Start-up Wait Time (page 159)
Key Press Sound (page 160)
Buzzer Sound (page 161)
Printer Controller (page 162)
Print Method (page 164)
Screen Saver Movement (page 165)
Screen Saver Start up Time (page 166)
Hist. Disp. Method (page 168)
Resume Function (page 170)
Comm. Auto-return (page 172)
Time-out Interval (page 174)
Retry Counts (page 176)
Comm. A Method (page 147)
Comm. B Select (page 157)
Comm. B Method (page 147)
I/O SETTINGS MENU
I/O CHECK MENU
Quit
Contrast Adjust (page 181)
Brightness Adjust (page 183)
Quit
I/F Check
Device Check
DISPLAY HISTORY MENU
EXPANSION
MODE MENU
I/F CHECK MENU
Quit
Programming Console Function (page 211)
Version Display (page 219)
Device Monitor Function (page 217)
Quit
Tool Comm. (page 205)
Comm. Port A (page 207)
Comm. Port B (page 207)
Printer (page 210)
DEVICE CHECK MENU
Quit
Sort by Occurrence (page 188)
Sort by Frequency (page 188)
ALARM HISTORY MENU
Quit
Sort by Occurrence (page 190)
Sort by Frequency (page 190)
Quit
Buzzer Check (page 195)
LED Check (page 196)
LCD Check (page 198)
Backlight Check (page 199)
Screen Memory (page 199)
Touch Switch (page 202)
Battery (page 204)
6-3-3 Operations with the System Menu
This section describes how to use the menus, including how to call the System
Menu, how to call the System Installer mode, and how to select menu items.
Calling the System Menu
The System Menu can be displayed by either of the following two methods.
• Touching the corners of the touch panel
• Pressing a touch switch that displays the System Menu
129
Section
Operation Modes and the System Menu
Reference:
6-3
S If display of the System Menu is disabled by the setting made in the System
Installer mode, the System Menu cannot be displayed (this does not apply if an
error has occurred).
S At the same as the System Menu is displayed, the operation of the
NT631/NT631C stops and the RUN LED goes OFF.
Touching The Corners of The Touch Panel
When two of the four corners of the touch panel (see the figure below) are
touched simultaneously, the System Menu is displayed.
RUN mode
POWER
[SYSTEM MENU]
RUN
Quit
Press any two of the four
corners at the same time.
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Expansion Mode
Note that the touch switches used to call the System Menu are not displayed at
corners on the screen. If a touch switch displayed in a corner is pressed first, the
touch switch will function and the System Menu will not be displayed. Especially,
when the touch switch has switch screen function, as a result of screen switch
over, it means the corner is not pressed even if it is kept pressing. To successfully
call the System Menu, first press a corner where no touch switch is displayed,
and then press any other corner regardless of the presence of a touch switch.
Reference: With the NT631/NT631C, the System Menu can be displayed even if the screen
has touch switches registered at all four corners.
Pressing a Touch Switch That Displays The System Menu
There is a control key that has the function of displaying the System Menu.
By registering the touch switch for System Menu display ([MENU]) on a screen
when creating it, the System Menu can be displayed just by pressing this switch.
Calling the System
Installer Mode
If the NT631/NT631C has no system program installed, or if the system program
is destroyed, the System Installer mode is automatically established when the
power is switched ON.
To establish the System Installer mode in order to install a system program or
make settings for data management, either turn the power ON, or reset the
NT631/NT631C, while pressing the touch switch at the top left corner of the
touch panel (size: 7.2 mm
7.2 mm).
Switch the power to the NT631/NT631C ON while pressing this touch switch.
POWER
RUN
Selecting Menu Items
130
The menu items in the System Menu are displayed on the NT631/NT631C
screen as touch switches. Menu items can be selected simply by pressing them.
Section
Memory Initialization
6-4
Example:
Displaying the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen by pressing Maintenance
Mode in the System Menu.
Ver 3.10
Switching from the
System Menu to the RUN
Mode
Press Maintenance Mode.
Return to the RUN mode by selecting Quit in the System Menu and other menus.
Reference: Unlike previous PT models, the NT631/NT631C does not return to the RUN
mode automatically if no operations are performed.
6-4
Memory Initialization
The NT631/NT631C has the following initialization functions. Use them as necessary.
• Clearing screen data
Page 131
• Initializing memory tables
Page 137
• Initializing memory switches
Page 138
• Initializing display history record data
Page 133
• Initializing alarm history record data
Page 134
• Initializing recipe tables
Page 136
Reference: If writing to the screen data memory has been disabled by the System Setting
setting in the System Installer mode, memory initialization is not possible.
6-4-1 Clearing Screen Data
Use this function if the screen data has been corrupted and the NT631/NT631C
cannot be started up correctly.
This operation clears (initializes) only the screen data and contents of the calculation tables. The memory switch settings and display history/alarm history record data are retained.
131
Section
Memory Initialization
Reference:
6-4
S When this function is used, all of the screen data contents registered in the
NT631/NT631C up to that point are cleared. Check that the created screens
are backed up at the Support Tool before using it.
S The screen data can be cleared in the System Installer mode too (page 140).
S The following types of data can be initialized individually.
Contents of numeral/character string memory tables (page 134)
Memory switch settings (page 137)
Display history record data (page 133)
Alarm history record data (page 134)
Clear the screen data by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Init..
Select Screen Data.
Select Yes.
The screen data is cleared. During clearance, the message Erasing Now... is displayed.
If No is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU
screen without clearing the screen data.
132
Section
Memory Initialization
6-4
On completion of screen data clearance, the NT631/NT631C returns to the
MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.
After the screen data has been cleared, if an attempt is made to set the
NT631/NT631C to the RUN mode before screen data has been transmitted from
the Support Tool or memory unit, an error message will be displayed and the
RUN mode will not be established.
6-4-2 Initializing Display History Record Data
The display history record function keeps a record of the order of display of the
screens displayed during operation, and the number of times each screen is displayed. These records are kept only for screens for which the History attribute
has been set.
The maximum number of records is 1024 for sort by occurrence (order of display
occurrence) and 255 for sort by frequency (order of the number of times each
screen has been displayed).
Use the display history record initialization function to clear the history record
data to 0, for example when the screen data has been changed, etc. Also, if
Alarm (Use Ring Buffer) under History Setting of System in PT Configuration
(Tools) has not been checked, no more records will be stored after the maximum
number of records has been kept, and therefore the records must be periodically
initialized. If Alarm (Use Ring Buffer) is checked, when the maximum number of
records is reached the oldest record is deleted and the newest data is recorded.
Reference: The NT631/NT631C also allows the display history record data to be initialized
by controlling the PT status control area from the host. For details, refer to 2-2-1
PT Status Control Area in the Reference Manual.
133
Section
Memory Initialization
6-4
Initialize the display history record data by following the menu operation from the
System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Init..
Select Display History.
Select Yes.
The display history record data is initialized.
During initialization, the message Initializing
is displayed.
If No is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU
screen without initializing the display history record data.
On completion of display history record data initialization, the message Finished
is displayed and the NT631/NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU
screen.
6-4-3 Initializing Alarm History Record Data
The alarm history record function continually checks the status of host bits that
have been designated in advance with a bit memory table, and records the time
when any of the bits is set to 1 (comes ON), and the number of times that each bit
comes ON.
The maximum number of records is 256 for sort by occurrence (order of error
occurrence) and 255 for sort by frequency (order of the number of times each
error has occurred).
134
Section
Memory Initialization
6-4
Use the alarm history record initialization function to reset the alarm history record data to 0, for example when the screen data has been changed, etc. Also, if
Screen (Use Ring Buffer) under History Setting in the PT Environment Settings –
System Settings has not been checked, no more records will be stored after the
maximum number of records has been kept, and therefore the records must be
periodically initialized. If Screen (Use Ring Buffer) is checked, when the maximum number of records is reached the oldest record is deleted and the newest
data is recorded.
Reference: The NT631/NT631C also allows the alarm history record data to be initialized by
controlling the PT status control area from the host. For details, refer to 2-2-1 PT
Status Control Area in the Reference Manual.
Initialize the alarm history record data by following the menu operation from the
System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Init..
Select Alarm History.
Select Yes.
The alarm history record data is initialized.
During initialization, the message Initializing
is displayed.
135
Section
Memory Initialization
6-4
If No is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU
screen without initializing the alarm history record data.
On completion of alarm history record data initialization, the message Finished
is displayed and the NT631/NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU
screen.
6-4-4 Initializing the Recipe Tables
You can initialize the recipe tables (i.e., all the recipe data) edited in the
NT631/NT631C. Here, “initializing” the recipe tables means to restore the battery backup memory (“recipe data memory”) to the values in flash memory at
that time. If, after downloading from the Support Tool, you do not upload the data
even once, initialization will restore the initial values set using the Support Tool.
The values will not be cleared.
Initialize the recipe tables by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Init..
Select Recipe Table.
Select Yes.
The recipe tables are initialized. During initialization, the message Initializing is displayed.
136
Section
Memory Initialization
6-4
If No is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen
without initializing the recipe tables.
On completion of memory table initialization, the message Finished is displayed
and the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.
6-4-5 Initializing the Memory Tables
It is possible to initialize the numeral memory tables and character string
memory tables in the NT631/NT631C.
When these tables are initialized, the values are returned to those set by the
Support Tool (they are not cleared).
When the memory tables are initialized, they are returned to their initial values
regardless of the setting made for the resume function (page 170).
If ON is set for the Resume Function memory switch, the initial values set with
the Support Tool will not be recorded in the memory tables unless they are initialized.
Reference:
S If OFF is set for the Resume Function memory switch, the memory tables can
be initialized just by switching the NT631/NT631C power off and back on
again, or by resetting the NT631/NT631C (page 170).
S The bit memory table merely reflects the statuses of bits at the host and therefore cannot be initialized.
137
Section
Memory Initialization
6-4
Initialize the memory tables by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Init..
Select Memory Table.
Select Yes.
The memory tables are initialized. During initialization, the message Initializing is displayed.
If No is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU
screen without initializing the memory tables.
On completion of memory table initialization, the message Finished is displayed
and the NT631/NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.
6-4-6 Initializing the Memory Switches
Initialization returns all the memory switches of the NT631/NT631C to their status on shipment.
138
Section
Memory Initialization
6-4
Initialize the memory switches by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Init..
Select Memory Switch.
Select Yes.
The memory tables are initialized. During initialization, the message Initializing is displayed.
If No is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU
screen without initializing the memory switches.
On completion of memory switch initialization, the message Finished is displayed and the NT631/NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.
After initialization, the memory switch statuses are as follows.
Memory Switch
Status
Start-up Wait Time
00
Key Press Sound
ON
Buzzer Sound
OFF
Printer Controller
ESC/P
Print Method
Tone (NT631C only)
Screen Saver Movement
Display erased
Screen Saver Start up Time
010
139
Section
Operations in the System Installer Mode
Memory Switch
6-5
Status
Hist. Disp. Method
From New Data
Resume Function
OFF
Comm. Auto-return
OFF
Time-out Interval
01
Retry Counts
005
Comm. A Method
Host Link (communications speed = 9600 bps)*
Comm. B Select
RS-232C
Comm. B Method
None
* The communication conditions for a bar code reader are initialized as follows:
Data bits: 7 bits; stop bit: 1 bit; parity: none; flow control: RS/CS.
6-5
Operations in the System Installer Mode
The following functions can be executed in the System Installer mode:
• Setting the display language (see below)
• Clearing/installing the system program (page 140)
• Disabling/enabling display of the System Menu (changing the system settings)
(page 142)
• Disabling/enabling writing to the screen data memory (changing the system
settings) (page 142)
• Clearing screen data (page 143)
For details on calling the System Installer mode, refer to Calling the System Installer Mode (page 130).
6-5-1 Setting the Display Language in the System Installer Mode
The first setting made in the System Installer mode is to select whether the display language is to be English or Japanese.
Select English or Japanese.
From here on, this manual assumes that
English has been selected here.
The System Installer mode menu is displayed.
If there is no system program or the system
program has been corrupted, the message
System Program not exist or incorrect. is
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
6-5-2 Clearing/Installing the System Program
Use this function when the system program of the NT631/NT631C has been corrupted, or when installing a new system program.
140
Operations in the System Installer Mode
Reference:
Section
6-5
S In order to install a system program, the system installer must also be installed
at the Support Tool. The system installer is an accessory with the Support Tool
(NT-ZJCAT1-EV4). When installing the Support Tool in a personal computer,
install the system installer also. For details on the method for installing the system installer at the Support Tool side, and the operating procedure, refer to the
NT-series Support Tool Ver. 4.1 for Windows Operation Manual (V061-E1-j).
S When the system program is cleared by mistake, it becomes impossible to use
the NT631/NT631C at all. Check that the system installer is installed at the
Support Tool side before deleting the program. However, note that the registered screen data and memory switch settings are retained.
S It becomes possible to install the system program inside the memory unit automatically by installing the memory unit at startup (Refer to 3-5 Using Memory
Unit (-Vj Versions)).
Clear/install the system program by following the menu operation from the System Installer mode menu shown below.
Clearing the System Program
Select Download System Program.
Select Yes.
The system program is cleared. During clearance, the message Erasing ... is displayed.
• If Return to Menu is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the System Installer mode menu without clearing the system program.
• If clearance fails, a screen asking whether you wish to try again is displayed.
On completion of system program clearance, the NT631/NT631C enters the
standby status for downloading of the system program.
141
Section
Operations in the System Installer Mode
Downloading the System
Program
6-5
On normal completion of system program clearance, the standby status for system program downloading is automatically established.
When the NT631/NT631C enters this status,
transmit the system program from the system
installer at the personal computer.
During downloading, the progress of transmission is indicated on the screen.
Select Run System.
If Abort is selected during standby for downloading or during downloading, a
screen asking whether you wish to download again is displayed.
When the system program is started, the NT631/NT631C starts up normally. If
no screen data has been registered, an error message will be displayed indicating that screen data hasn’t been registered. Transfer the screen data and proceed.
Reference: If the new system program is not downloaded successfully after deleting a system program, it is not possible to use the NT631/NT631C at all. After deleting the
system program, be sure to download a new one.
6-5-3 Changing the System Settings
The NT631/NT631C allows the following settings to be made to prevent the
screen data and memory switch settings from being changed or deleted by operating errors.
Disabling/enabling System Menu Display
When System Menu display is disabled by this setting, the System Menu cannot
be displayed by touch panel operations or by using the touch switches. However, if a error occurs, the System Menu can be displayed from the error message
screen.
Disabling/enabling Writing to The Screen Data Memory
When writing to the screen data memory is disabled by this setting, it is impossible to use the following System Menu functions.
• Switching to the Transmit mode
• Displaying the memory switch setting screens
• Checking the screen data memory
• Displaying the initialization menu
• Displaying the calendar/time setting screen (the calendar/time display screen
can be displayed)
142
Operations in the System Installer Mode
Section
6-5
Change the system settings by following the menu operation from the System
Installer mode menu shown below.
Select Change System Settings.
Select Display System Menu or Screen
Memory Protect .
Each time either of these items is selected,
the setting switches from Disabled to Enabled or vice versa.
Select OK.
The settings are written to the
NT631/NT631C while the screen is displayed.
• If Cancel is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the System Installer mode
menu without changing the settings. The settings remain as they were before
the operation was started.
• If writing of the settings fails, a screen asking whether you wish to try again is
displayed.
After the settings have been written, the System Installer mode menu screen is
redisplayed.
6-5-4 Clearing Screen Data
If the screen data has been corrupted and the NT631/NT631C cannot be started
normally, use this function to clear the screen data.
Note that only the screen data is cleared (initialized), and the memory switch settings and the display history/alarm history record data are retained.
Reference:
S When this function is used, all of the screen data contents registered in the
NT631/NT631C up to that point are cleared. Check that the created screens
are backed up at the Support Tool before using it.
S The screen data can also be cleared from the System Menu (page 131).
S If the screen data is cleared in the System Installer mode, the message Screen
Data Corrupted may be displayed on switching to the RUN mode. If this happens, initialize the screen data again from the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.
143
Section
Transmitting the Screen Data
6-6
Clear the screen data by following the menu operation from the System Installer
mode menu shown below.
Select Erase Screen Data.
Select Yes.
The screen data is cleared. During clearance, the message Erasing ... is displayed.
• If Return to Menu is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the MEMORY
INIT. MENU screen without clearing the screen data.
• If screen data clearance fails, a screen asking if you wish to try again is displayed.
On completion of screen data clearance, the NT631/NT631C returns to the System Installer mode menu screen.
After the screen data has been cleared, if an attempt is made to set the
NT631/NT631C to the RUN mode before screen data has been transmitted from
the Support Tool or memory unit, an error message will be displayed and the
RUN mode will not be established.
6-6
Transmitting the Screen Data
The screen data is created with the Support Tool and then transmitted to the
NT631/NT631C. This section explains how to transmit the screen data.
For details on how to create the screen data and the operation of the Support
Tool, refer to the Reference Manual and the NT-series Support Tool Ver. 4.1 for
Windows Operation Manual (V061-E1-j).
Reference:
S The screen data can be transmitted also from the memory unit installed in the
NT631/NT631C. For details on this method, refer to 3-5 Using a Memory Unit
(NT631/NT631C with Vj) (page 36) or 3-6 Using Memory Unit
(NT631/NT631C without Vj) (Page 44).
S The screen data can be transmitted at a faster rate by setting High for Baud
Rate on the Comms. Setting... window of the Support Tool.
S If writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting made for System
Setting in the System Installer mode, screen data transmission is not possible.
Screen Data Composition
and Transmission Units
144
The screen data comprises the following types of data.
• User screen data (screen units)
• System memory (memory switch) settings
• Direct connection information
Transmitting the Screen Data
Section
6-6
• Numeral memory table data
• Character string memory table data
• Bit memory table data
• Mathematical table data
• Mark information
• Image/library data
• Recipe table data
It is possible to transmit the screen data (data for all the screens) in file units, or to
transmit individual data or the data of individual screens in data units. (It is not
possible to transmit table data in data units.)
When data is transmitted in file units, all of the screen data in the NT631/NT631C
is cleared and then the new data is transmitted.
When data is transmitted in data units, first the previous data is invalidated, then
the new data is registered as valid data. Since the previous data is not cleared,
free memory area in the NT631/NT631C will be insufficient when transmissions
in data units are repeated. If this happens, write the screen data again by data
transmission in file units.
Transmitting Screen Data
from the Support Tool
1, 2, 3...
To transmit screen data from the Support Tool to the NT631/NT631C, follow the
procedure below.
Operation
1. Connect the NT631/NT631C to a personal computer in which the Support
Tool has been installed and turn the power to the NT631/NT631C ON.
2. Turn ON the power to the personal computer and start up the Support Tool.
145
Section
Transmitting the Screen Data
6-6
3. Establish the Transmit mode by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below at the NT631/NT631C.
Ver 3.10
Select Transmit Mode.
Select Tool Transmit.
4. Open the screen data to be transmitted at the Support Tool, then select
Download (NTST PT) in the Support Tool’s Connect menu and specify the
data to be transmitted.
5. During screen data transmission, the transmission status is displayed.
6. On completion of screen data transmission, press the Quit touch switch.
The NT631/NT631C returns to the Transmit mode.
If the screen data cannot be successfully transmitted from the Support Tool, use
the communication check functions of the NT631/NT631C to check if communication between the NT631/NT631C is normal or not (page 205).
Precautions to Be
Observed When
Transmitting Screen Data
146
If any of the following, or a system error, occurs during transmission of screen
data, the transmitted screen data will not be registered correctly in the
NT631/NT631C. If this happens, the NT631/NT631C may not enter the RUN
mode when started up, or there may be unpredictable malfunctions such as failure to display screens during operation. In this case, the screen data must be
retransmitted in file units to register it correctly.
• The power to the NT631/NT631C is interrupted or the NT631/NT631C is reset.
• The power to the personal computer on which the Support Tool is running is
interrupted or the computer is reset.
• The cable connecting the NT631/NT631C to the personal computer on which
the Support Tool is running is disconnected or has a broken wire.
• The Quit touch switch on the NT631/NT631C screen is pressed to end screen
data transmission.
• Screen data transmission is stopped by operation at the Support Tool.
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section
6-7
Note When transferring the data in units of screens, if there are changes in memory
table and/or direct access, transfer such data along with the screen data.
6-7
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by
Using Memory Switches
The NT631/NT631C can be connected to the host by the following 7 types of
communication methods can be used to communicate with a host.
• Host link
S Memory link method
• NT Link (1:1)
S Mitsubishi A-computer link method
• NT Link (1:N)
S Mitsubishi FX method
• High-speed NT Link (1:N)
The NT631/NT631C has the following two ports, either of which can be used for
communications with the host, depending on the requirements.
• Serial port A (exclusively for RS-232C, 9-pin connector)
• Serial port B (RS-232C/RS-422A (selectable), 25-pin connector)
The method for setting the communication method for communications with the
host is described here.
For details on setting the communication conditions for a bar code reader, refer
to 6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function (page 177).
Reference:
S Apart from the host, it is also possible to connect the Support Tool or a bar code
reader to serial port A. When a bar code reader is connected at serial port A,
the host must be connected at serial port B. When serial port A is being used
for communications with the host, the host must be disconnected so that the
Support Tool can be connected.
S There are four memory switch setting screens. The conditions for communications with the host are set on the fourth screen (the screen on which 4/4 is displayed). For details on setting memory switches other than those for setting the
conditions for communications with the host, refer to 6-9 Various System Settings (page 158).
S When using the Mitsubishi A-computer link method and Mitsubishi FX method,
a system program for multi-venders is required. Install the system program to
the NT631/631C by the system installer (refer to page 140). For details, refer to
PC Connection Manual (V042-E1-j).
S When using PLCs manufactured by Allen-Bradley, GE Fanuc, or Siemens,
refer to NT31/631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual (V060-E1-j).
6-7-1 About Communication Conditions
Items Set for
Communication
Conditions
Setting Item
The following settings are made for the communication conditions for communication between the NT631/NT631C and the host.
Port Communication Method/Communication Type Settings
Function
Comm. A Method Set the communication method used at serial port
A. Depending on the communication method, further
communication condition settings may be necessary.
Setting Options
A system program for OMRON
model.
None/Host Link/NT Link (1:1)/
NT Link (1:N) (standard or highspeed)/Bar-Code Reader
Memory link
Page
Page 150
Page 152
Page 152
Page 155
147
Section
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Comm. B Select
Set whether serial port B is to be used for RS-232C
or RS-422A communication.
Comm. B Method Set the communication method used at serial port
B. Depending on the communication method, further
communication condition settings may be necessary.
6-7
RS-232C/RS-422A
Page 157
A system program for OMRON
model.
None/Host Link/NT Link (1:1)/
NT Link (1:N) (standard or highspeed)
Memory link
Page 150
Page 152
Page 152
Page 155
Communication Condition Settings for The Host Link Method
Setting Item
Comm. Speed
(for host link only)
Function
Setting Options
Sets the communications speed
for communications with the host.
9600 bps/
19200 bps
Page
Page 150
Communication Condition Settings for The NT Link (1:1) Method
No further communication conditions need to be set.
Communication Conditions Settings for The NT Link (1:N) Method
Setting Item
Function
Unit No.
(for NT Link (1:N)
only)
Set the unit number of the
NT631/NT631C.
Comm. Speed
Sets the communications speed
for communications with the host.
Setting Options
Page
0 to 7
Page 152
Standard or
high-speed
Setting The Conditions for Communications with The Memory Link Method
Setting Item
Possible Combinations
of Communication
Method Settings
Function
Setting Options
Data bits
Set the data bits length.
7, 8 bits
Stop bits
Set the stop bits length.
1, 2 bits
Parity
Set the parity.
None, even,
odd
Comm. Speed
Set the communications speed
for communications with the host.
1200, 2400,
4800, 9600,
19200,
38400 bps
Flow control
Set the flow control and its method.
None, RS/
CS, XON/
XOFF
Response
Set whether the response is carried out for normal process of
communication command or not.
Yes, No
Page
Page
g 155
The combinations of communication methods that can be set with the
NT631/NT631C are indicated in the table below. Combinations other than these
listed below cannot be set (when using a system for multi-venders, refer to the
PC Connection Manual (V042-E1-j) or NT31/631 Multi Vendor Connection
Manual (V060-E1-j)).
Serial port A
Serial port B
148
None
Host Link
NT Link
(1:1)
NT Link
(1:N)
Bar-code
reader
Memory
Link
None
f
f
f
f
f
f
Host Link
f
f
NT Link (1:1)
f
f
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
NT Link (1:N)
f
f
Memory Link
f
f
Section
6-7
f: Possible combination
: Impossible combination
Combinations other than those indicated above cannot be set.
Reference: When using serial port B for communication with the host, and serial port A for the
transmission of screen data from the Support Tool, set the settings of serial port A
to None.
149
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section
6-7
6-7-2 Setting the Host Link Method
Set the communication conditions for the host link method at serial port A or serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Display the fourth memory switch screen by
pressing the [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) touch switch.
Press the touch switch corresponding to the
port at which the host link method is to be set
(Comm. A Method or Comm. B Method) to
display the setting option Host Link.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
Press the Set touch switch to the right of the
port at which the setting has been made.
150
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section
6-7
Press the Comm. Speed touch switch to display the communications speed to be set.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
In this example, serial port A is used.
Press Quit.
The communications speed is set.
• To quit the communications speed setting screen without setting the communications speed, press the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C returns to
the memory switch setting screen (4/4) and the previous communications
speed remains in effect.
On completion of communications speed setting, the NT631/NT631C returns to
the memory switch setting screen (4/4).
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
151
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section
6-7
6-7-3 Setting the NT Link (1:1) Method
Set the communication conditions for the NT Link (1:1) method at serial port A or
serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Display the fourth memory switch screen by
pressing the [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) touch switch.
Press the touch switch corresponding to the
port at which the NT Link (1:1) method is to be
set (Comm. A Method or Comm. B Method)
to display the setting option NT Link (1:1).
The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-7-4 Setting the NT Link (1:N) Method (Standard/High-speed)
Set the communication conditions for the NT Link (1:N) method at serial port A or
serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below.
152
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section
6-7
The communications speed determines whether the 1:N NT Link is standard or
high-speed.
Standard:
Standard 1:N NT Link
High-speed:
High-speed 1:N NT Link
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Display the fourth memory switch screen by
pressing the [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) touch switch.
Press the touch switch corresponding to the
port at which the NT Link (1:N) method (standard or high-speed) is to be set (Comm. A
Method or Comm. B Method) to display the
setting option NT Link (1:N).
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
In this example, serial port A is used.
153
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section
6-7
Press the Set touch switch to the right of the
port at which the setting has been made.
In this example, serial port A is used.
Press the Unit No. touch switch to display the
unit number to be set. Press the Comm.
Speed touch switch to display the communications speed, standard or 115.2-kbps
high-speed. (The Comm. Speed setting determines which method of 1:N NT Link is
used.)
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed. In this example, serial port A is used for a standard 1:N NT Link.
Press Quit.
The unit number is set.
• To quit the unit number/communications speed setting screen without confirming the unit number/communications speed settings, press the Abort touch
switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the memory switch setting screen
(4/4) with the previous settings still in effect.
Reference: Unit numbers are numbers assigned to each PT when multiple PTs are connected to one host, so that the host can identify the individual PTs. The units numbers that can be set differ according to the host model, as follows.
S C200HE(-ZE):
Unit numbers 0 to 3 (maximum of 4 PTs per host port)
S C200HG(-ZE), C200HX(-ZE):
Unit numbers 0 to 7 (maximum of 8 PTs per host port)
When making the settings, make sure there is no duplication of unit numbers
among PTs.
On completion of unit number setting, the NT631/NT631C returns to the
memory switch setting screen (4/4).
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
154
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section
6-7
6-7-5 Setting the Memory Link Method
Set the communication conditions for the host link method at serial port A or serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below. Check
the communication settings of the host to be used.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Display the fourth memory switch screen by
pressing the [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) touch switch.
Press the touch switch corresponding to the
port at which the memory link method is to be
set (Comm. A Method or Comm. B Method) to
display the setting option Memory Link.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
In this example, serial port A is used.
Press the Set touch switch to the right of the
port at which the setting has been made.
In this example, serial port A is used.
155
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section
6-7
Display the data bits to be set (7 bits or 8 bits)
by pressing the Data Bit Length touch switch.
Display the stop bits to be set (1 bit or 2 bits)
by pressing the Stop Bit Length touch switch.
Display the parity to be set (None, even, odd)
by pressing the Parity Bit touch switch.
Display the communication speed to be set
(1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps.)
by pressing the Comm. Speed touch switch.
Display the condition of the flow control to be
set (None, RS/CS, XON/XOFF) by pressing
Flow Control touch switch.
If the RS-422A is selected for serial port B
setting, RS/CS is not displayed.
Display presence or absence of the response
by pressing the Response touch switch.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
In this example, serial port A is used.
Press the Quit touch switch.
• To quit the communications speed setting screen without setting the communications speed, press the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C returns to
the memory switch setting screen (4/4) and the previous communications
speed remains in effect.
On completion of communications speed setting, the NT631/NT631C returns to
the memory switch setting screen (4/4).
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
156
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section
6-7
6-7-6 Setting the Communication Type for Serial Port B
Set the communication type (RS-232C or RS-422A) for serial port B by following
the operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Display the fourth memory switch screen by
pressing the [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) touch switch.
Press the Comm. B Select touch switch to
display the communication type to be set.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
Reference: If serial port B is used for RS-485 communications, RS-422A must be set as its
communication type.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
157
Section
Various System Settings
6-8
6-9
Starting Operation
After completing screen data transmission and setting the communication
conditions, connect the NT631/NT631C to the host and start operation.
Note Check the operation of all screen data and host programs carefully before using
them. If incorrect, the system may operate unpredictably.
Switching to the RUN
Mode and Starting
Operation
Press the Quit touch switch on the System Menu screen or other screen. The
NT631/NT631C switches to the RUN mode and starts operation.
The operation at the start is as follows.
Display of The System Initialization Screen
When establishing the communication with a host, the System initializing character string is displayed on the screen. If the communication with the host cannot
be established, the System initializing screen remains up. If this is the case,
check the settings at the host and the PT side, the cables and wiring.
In addition, creating screen number 9000 enables the display of a screen other
than the System initialization screen.
Transmission of The Contents of Memory Tables
If the Resume Function memory switch is set to ON, or if the initial values of the
memory tables are used, the contents of the numeral/character-string memory
tables are copied to the allocated words at the host.
↓
Display of The Startup Screen
The startup screen is displayed on reading the contents (screen number of the
screen to be displayed) of the first word of the PT status control area.
If the contents are not correct for a screen number, or there is no data registered
for the set screen number, an error message is displayed.
Confirming the
Communications
between the
NT631/NT631C and the
Host
Execute the host program and confirm that the following operations are performed normally.
• Confirm that the NT631/NT631C screens switch in accordance with the host
program.
If the screens do not switch correctly, check the connection between the
host and the NT631/NT631C, and also check if the hardware settings are
correct. For details, refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the
RS-232C Port, or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485
Port.
• Confirm that the operation results of touch switch and numeric value/character
string input at the NT631/NT631C are sent to the host correctly by displaying
the contents of the host words and bits using a Programming Device (e.g. CXProgrammer).
If the results of operations at the NT631/NT631C are not sent to the host
correctly, check the setting of the display elements. For details on setting
display elements, refer to the description of each display element in the Reference Manual.
6-9
Various System Settings
The NT631/NT631C allows a variety of functions which are convenient during
operation to be set with memory switches. This section describes the memory
switch settings relating to the operation environment.
Since the memory switch settings are backed up to the flash memory by the battery in the NT631/NT631C, they are not cleared when the power is switched
OFF.
158
Section
Various System Settings
6-9
6-9-1 Memory Switch Setting Screens
There are four memory switch setting screens. The required screen can be displayed by using the [ ] (next screen) and [ ] (previous screen) touch switches.
The four memory switch setting screens are shown below.
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
Memory Switch Settings
A list of the memory switch settings is presented below.
• Start-up Wait Time
page 159
• Key Press Sound
page 160
• Buzzer Sound
page 161
• Printer Controller
page 162
• Print Method
page 164
• Screen Saver Movement
page 165
• Screen Saver Start up Time
page 166
• Hist. Disp. Method
page 168
• Resume Function
page 170
• Comm. Auto-return
page 172
• Time-out Interval
page 174
• Retry Counts
page 176
• Comm. A Method
page 147
(For the bar code reader, refer to page 177.)
• Comm. B Select
page 157
• Comm. B Method
page 147
For details on each setting, refer to the pages indicated.
6-9-2 Setting the Start-up Wait Time
The Start-up Wait Time is the time lapse until the NT631/NT631C switches to the
RUN mode after its power has been switched ON or after it has been reset. Set
this item if it takes some time for the host to start operation. Nothing is displayed
during the Start-up Wait Time.
The setting range is 0 to 10 seconds. The default (factory) setting is 00sec.
159
Section
Various System Settings
6-9
Set the system start-up wait time by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press Start-up Wait Time to display the required time lapse.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed, according to the following sequence.
01 02 03 .... 09 10 00 01 ....
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-3 Setting the Key Press Sound
It is possible to set whether or not the key sound is sounded when a touch switch
on the NT631/NT631C screen is pressed.
• ON:
When a touch switch is pressed, the key sound sounds for 0.2 seconds.
• OFF: The key sound does not sound when touch switches are pressed.
The default (factory) setting is ON.
160
Section
Various System Settings
6-9
Set the key press sound by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press Key Press Sound to display ON or
OFF.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-4 Setting the Buzzer Sound
The NT631/NT631C has a function for sounding a buzzer in response to an
instruction from the host, or when an error occurs. It is possible to set whether or
not the buzzer actually sounds with the memory switches.
• ON:
The buzzer sounds in response to instructions and when an error occurs.
• OFF:
The buzzer does not sound in response to instructions or when errors occur.
• ERROR ON:
The buzzer sounds only when an error occurs.
The default (factory) setting is OFF.
161
Section
Various System Settings
Reference:
6-9
S There are other instructions and settings relating to the buzzer, but this
memory switch setting has the highest priority.
S For details on the buzzer, refer to 2-15-5 Buzzer Function in the Reference
Manual.
Set the buzzer sound by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press Buzzer Sound to display ON, OFF,
or ERROR ON.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-5 Setting the Printer Controller
The NT631/NT631C has a function for printing out data at a printer connected to
it in response to an instruction from the host or operation at the NT631/NT631C.
Three types of printer can be connected to the NT631/NT631C: select the type
used with this memory switch setting.
• ESC/P:
Printers that conform to Epson’s ESC/P 24-J83C (color) printer control
specifications or printers that conform to Epson’s ESC/P 24-J82 (monochrome) control specifications.
162
Section
Various System Settings
6-9
• PC-PR201H:
Printers that can emulate the PC-PR201H, made by NEC Corp.
• PCL 5:
Printers that conform to the PCL 5 printer control specifications.
Note that the NT631 can only be used with the monochrome Tone setting and
does not support color printing.
For the NT631, the Print Method is fixed as Tone.
The default (factory) setting is ESC/P.
Reference:
S In addition to this setting, NT631C has the Print Method setting (page 164).
S For details on the print function, refer to 2-15-7 Print Function in the Reference
Manual.
Set the printer controller setting by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press Printer Controller to display the required printer type.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
163
Section
Various System Settings
6-9
6-9-6 Setting the Print Method (NT631C Only)
The NT631/NT631C has a function for printing out data at a printer connected to
it in response to an instruction from the host or operation at the NT631/NT631C.
When using the NT631C, the currently displayed screen image or other data can
be printed out in color. You can select whether screen data is actually printed out
in color, or in monochrome tones that represent colors, with this memory switch
setting.
When PCL 5 is set for Printer Controller, the setting is fixed as Tone.
• Color: Color images are printed in color.
• Tone:
Color images are printed in monochrome tones.
The default (factory) setting is Tone.
Reference:
S In addition to this setting, NT631C has the Printer Controller setting (page
162).
S For details on the print function, refer to 2-15-7 Print Function in the Reference
Manual.
Set the print method setting by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press Print Method to display the required
printing method.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
164
Section
Various System Settings
6-9
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-7 Setting Screen Saver Movement
The NT631/NT631C has a function to prevent the formation of an afterimage by
turning off the screen display if no operation is performed for a certain period of
time, and then displaying character strings at random positions and in random
colors (the colors only change for the NT631C).
The Screen Saver Movement setting determines whether or not these character
strings are displayed while the screen display is off.
If Display is selected, the character string stored in character string memory
table No. 0 is displayed.
If Display erase is selected, the character string is not displayed, and the backlight is also turned off while the screen display is off.
The default (factory) setting is Display erased.
The screen saver can be canceled, and former screen redisplayed, by any of the
following operations.
• Touching any part of the touch panel
• Screen switching due to PT status control area operations
• Screen switching due to bit memory table operations
• Execution of any of the following PT status control bit operations:
• Changing the backlight mode
• Screen printing (change from OFF to ON)
• Screen display (change from OFF to ON)
Reference:
S The time before the screen is turned OFF is set by the Screen Saver Start up
Time setting. For details, refer to 6-9-8 Setting the Screen Saver Start-up Time
(page 166).
S Even if its operation has been set with the Screen Saver Movement setting, the
screen saver function will not be executed if 000 is set for Screen Saver Start
up Time.
S Screen saver function is enabled only through RUN mode of NT631/NT631C.
In System Menu or System Installer mode, this function is not started.
165
Section
Various System Settings
6-9
Set the screen saver operation by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the second memory switch
setting screen.
Press Screen Saver Movement to display
Display or Display erased.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-8 Setting the Screen Saver Start-up Time
The NT631/NT631C has a function to maximize the service life of the backlight
and prevent the formation of an afterimage by turning off the screen display and
the backlight if no operation is performed for a certain period of time.
166
Various System Settings
Section
6-9
The Screen Saver Start up Time setting determines the time interval before the
screen saver function operates.
The setting range is 0 to 255 minutes. The default (factory) setting is 10 minutes.
If 000 is set, the screen saver function does not operate.
The screen saver can be canceled, and previous screen redisplayed, by any of
the following operations.
• Touching any part of the touch panel
• Screen switching due to PT status control area operations
• Screen switching due to bit memory table operations
• Execution of any of the following PT status control bit operations:
• Changing the backlight mode
• Screen printing (change from OFF to ON)
• Screen display (change from OFF to ON)
Reference:
S It is possible to display the character string stored in character string memory
table No. 0 at random positions and in random colors while the screen display
is off. For details, refer to 6-9-7 Setting Screen Saver Movement (page 165).
Note however that, when this feature is used, the backlight does not go off.
S For details on the screen saver function, refer to 6-9-7 Setting Screen Saver
Movement (page 165).
S Screen saver function is enabled only through RUN mode of NT631/NT631C.
In System Menu or System Installer mode, this function is not started.
167
Section
Various System Settings
6-9
Set the screen saver start-up time by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the second memory
switch setting screen.
Set a time in the input field to the right of
Screen Saver Start up Time.
Each of the digits can be incremented or
decremented by pressing the associated +
and − keys.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-9 Setting the History Display Method
The NT631/NT631C features the display history record function, which records
the time at which screens are displayed during operation and the number of
times they are displayed, and the alarm history record function, which continual-
168
Various System Settings
Section
6-9
ly monitors bit statuses at the host and records the time when bits come ON and
the number of times they come ON.
The Hist. Disp. Method setting determines whether — when these record data
are displayed in sort by occurrence — the records are displayed in a progression
from newest to oldest or from oldest to newest.
• From Old Data:
The records are displayed in sequence from the oldest to newest.
• From New Data:
The records are displayed in sequence from the newest to oldest.
The default (factory) setting is From New Data.
Reference:
S When the voltage of the NT631/NT631C’s built-in battery becomes low, the
history record contents cannot be retained.
S For details on the display history record function and the alarm history record
function, refer to 2-15-1 Display History Record Function and 2-15-2 Alarm
History Record Function in the Reference Manual.
169
Section
Various System Settings
6-9
Set the history display method by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the second memory switch
setting screen.
Press Hist. Disp. Method to display the required display order.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-10 Setting the Resume Function
The NT631/NT631C has a function to keep the contents of the memory tables
even when the power to the NT631/NT631C is OFF and write back them to the
host when the power is turned ON.
170
Various System Settings
Section
6-9
If the resume function is OFF, the memory tables are initialized to these initial
values on switching to the RUN mode. If the resume function is ON, these are not
initialized and are kept the battery-backed up contents.
When the memory table is initialized, its contents are reset to the initial state that
is set by the Support Tool.
When the system is started up the next time, the screen is displayed using the
previous contents of the memory table.
• ON:
The resume function is used.
• OFF: The resume function is not used.
The default (factory) setting is OFF.
Reference:
S When the voltage of the NT631/NT631C’s built-in battery becomes low, the
memory table contents cannot be retained even if ON is set for the resume
function.
S For details on the resume record function, refer to 2-15-3 Resume Function in
the Reference Manual.
171
Section
Various System Settings
6-9
Set the resume function by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the second memory switch
setting screen.
Press Resume Function to display the required setting.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-11 Setting the Automatic Reset Function
The NT631/NT631C has a function for ignoring communication errors and automatically returning to the RUN mode when they occur.
The Comm. Auto-return setting determines whether the automatic reset function is effective or not.
172
Various System Settings
Section
6-9
• ON:
When a communication error occurs, the NT631/NT631C automatically returns to the RUN mode without displaying an error screen (the System Initializing screen may be displayed).
• OFF:
When a communication error occurs, an error screen is displayed and operation stops. Pressing OK on the error screen returns the NT631/NT631C to the
RUN mode.
The default (factory) setting is OFF.
Reference:
S If a communication error occurs when OFF is set for Comm. Auto-return, the
NT631/NT631C makes the number of attempts at communication with the
host specified by the setting for the Retry Counts touch switch (page 176). If
communication cannot be re-established in any of these attempts, an error
screen is displayed.
S For details on communication errors, refer to 7-2-5 Communication Errors and
Their Remedies (page 229).
173
Section
Various System Settings
6-9
Set the automatic reset function by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the third memory switch
setting screen.
Press Comm. Auto-return to display the required setting.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-12 Setting the Time-out Interval
The NT631/NT631C goes into the time-out error status if no response is received from the host within a fixed time. The Time-out Interval setting specifies
the time lapse at which time-out is judged to have occurred.
The setting range is 0 to 10 seconds. The default (factory) setting is 1 second.
174
Section
Various System Settings
6-9
Reference: Whether or not an error screen is displayed when a time-out error occurs is determined by the setting for the Comm. Auto-return memory switch.
Set the time-out interval by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the third memory switch
setting screen.
Press Time-out Interval to display the required time lapse.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed, according to the following sequence.
01 02 03 .... 09 10 00 01 ....
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
175
Section
Various System Settings
6-9
6-9-13 Setting the Retry Count
The NT631/NT631C does not immediately display an error screen when a communication error occurs, but tries to re-establish communication. The Retry
Counts setting specifies the number of attempts to be made to re-establish communication. If communication cannot be recovered within this number of attempts, the following happens depending on the setting made for the Comm.
Auto-return memory switch (page 172).
Comm. Auto-return ON:
Operation in the RUN mode is continued without displaying an error screen. Regardless of the setting made for Retry Counts, attempts to re-establish communication are repeated until normal communication is achieved.
Comm. Auto-return OFF:
The RUN mode is ended and an error screen is displayed. On pressing the OK
touch switch on the error screen, the screen displayed immediately before is redisplayed and attempts are made to re-establish communication.
The System Menu can be displayed from the error screen by pressing any two of
the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously.
The setting range is 0 to 255 times. The default (factory) setting is 5 times.
Reference: For details on communication errors, refer to 7-2-5 Communication Errors and
Their Remedies (page 229).
176
Section 6-10
Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function
Set the retry count by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the third memory switch
setting screen.
Set a number of times in the input field to the
right of Retry Counts.
Each of the digits can be incremented or
decremented by pressing the associated +
and − keys.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function
The NT631/NT631C has a bar code reader input function which allows a bar
code reader to be connected and bar code data to read as character strings into
character string input fields.
177
Section 6-10
Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function
This section describes the communication conditions for the bar code reader
and the setting method for confirming the input data.
Reference:
S For details on bar code reader types and connection methods, refer to 3-4
Connecting a Bar Code Reader in this manual and for details on how to use a
bar code reader refer to 3-7 Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings in
the Reference Manual.
S The bar code reader is connected to serial port A. This means that serial port B
must be used for communications with the host.
Communication Condition Settings for Bar Code Readers
Setting Item
Function
Data bit length
Sets the bit length for the data bits.
7* or 8 bits
Page 180
Stop bit length
Sets the stop bit length for the data.
1 or 2* bits
Page 180
Parity bit
Sets the parity bit for the data.
None, odd, even*
Page 180
Communications
speed
Sets the communications speed for the bar code reader
4800, 9600*, or 19200 bps Page 180
Input method
Sets the method for confirming data when it is input to a
character string input field.
Manual: The data is confirmed with a touch switch. The
data can be corrected and character strings can
be added.
Auto:
The data is automatically confirmed when it is input.
* Default (factory) setting
178
Setting Options
Manual*, Auto
Page
Page 180
Section 6-10
Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function
Setting the
Communication
Conditions and Setting
Method
Set the bar code reader communication conditions and method of confirmation
at input by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the fourth memory switch
setting screen.
Press Comm. A Method to select Bar-Code
Reader.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
179
Section 6-10
Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function
Press the Set touch switch to the right of
Comm. A Method.
Display the required setting for each item by
pressing the touch switches.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
Press Quit.
• Pressing Abort on the communication condition/confirmation method setting
screen causes the NT631/NT631C to return to the memory switch setting
screen (4/4) without executing setting (with the previous settings still effective).
On completion of communication condition/confirmation method setting, the
NT631/NT631C returns to the memory switch setting screen (4/4).
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/NT631C
will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
180
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
6-11 System Maintenance
The NT631/NT631C has the following maintenance and check functions.
Item
Function
Page
I/O Settings
Adjustment of display panel contrast and brightness of the backlight.
Page 181
Calendar Check
Display and setting of the time data of the NT631/NT631C clock function.
Page 185
PT Settings
Direct connection setting of the screen data in the NT631/NT631C and display of
the setting statuses of the serial ports.
Page 187
Display history record
Display and printing of display history record data.
Page 188
Alarm history record
Display and printing of alarm history record data.
Page 190
Screen data check
Display of each screen stored in the NT631/NT631C.
Page 192
Device check Checking of the I/O functions of the NT631/NT631C.
Page 195
I/F check
Page 205
I/O
check
Checking of the communication functions of the NT631/NT631C.
This section describes how to use these functions.
6-11-1 I/O Settings
This function is used to adjust the contrast of the display panel and the brightness of the backlight.
With the NT631/631C, you can adjust the contrast and brightness settings using
either of the following two methods.
Setting from the System Menu
Adjusting the contrast: Select System Menu/Maintenance Mode/I/O Settings/
Contrast Adjust.
Adjusting the brightness: Select System Menu/Maintenance Mode/I/O Settings/
Brightness Adjust.
Setting Using Special Screen During PT Operation
You can set the brightness and contrast by displaying the screen with the following number, using a touch switch with a switch screen function, or by specifying
the display screen in the PT status control area.
Screen number 9030: Brightness and contrast adjustment screen.
Contrast Adjustment (for
NT631C-ST141j-EV1
only)
The NT631C-ST141j-EV1 allows the contrast to be adjusted in 100 steps. The
CONTRAST ADJUST screen enables you to make the adjustment while actually checking the contrast on the screen. Once the contrast has been set, it remains in effect even if the power is turned OFF or the NT631/NT631C is reset
(and even if the voltage of the built-in battery becomes low).
181
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Setting from the System Menu
Adjust the contrast of the display panel by following the menu operation from the
System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Settings.
Select Contrast Adjust.
Adjust the contrast with the touch switches in
the left half of the screen.
[ ]:
Increase 10 steps
[Y]:
Increase 1 step
[B]:
Decrease 1 step
[ ]:
Decrease 10 steps
Press Quit.
The contrast is set and the NT631/NT631C
returns to the I/O SETTINGS MENU screen.
182
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Setting Using Brightness and Contrast Adjustment Screen
Display screen number 9030 using either a touch switch with switch screen function, or by specifying the display screen in the PT status control area.
Adjust the contrast with the touch switches in
the right half of the screen.
[ ]: Increase 10 steps
[Y]:
Increase 1 step
[B]:
Decrease 1 step
[ ]: Decrease 10 steps
Press Quit.
The contrast is set, and the NT631/NT631C
returns to the previous screen.
Backlight Brightness
Adjustment (for
NT631C-ST141j-EVj
only)
Reference:
The NT631C-ST141j-EVj allows the brightness of the backlight to be adjusted in 3 steps. The BRIGHTNESS ADJUST screen enables you to make the
adjustment while actually checking the brightness on the screen.
In the NT631C-ST151j-EVj, adjustment is not possible even though this
screen is displayed.
183
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Adjust the backlight brightness by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Settings.
Select Brightness Adjust.
Adjust the contrast with the High, Middle, and
Low touch switches in the left half of the
screen.
Press Quit.
The contrast is set and the NT631/NT631C
returns to the I/O SETTINGS MENU screen.
184
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Setting Using Brightness and Contrast Adjustment Screen
Display screen number 9030 using either a touch switch with switch screen function, or by specifying the display screen in the PT status control area.
Adjust the brightness with the touch switches
(High, Middle, Low) in the left half of the
screen.
Press Quit.
The brightness is set, and the
NT631/NT631C returns to the previous
screen.
6-11-2 Displaying/Setting the Calendar and Clock
The NT631/NT631C has a clock function for setting and displaying the date and
time.
This section describes how to display and set the clock data by menu operation
from the System Menu.
Reference:
S The clock function does not strictly check the date and day of the week settings. When setting the clock data, be sure to set the correct date and day of
the week. If a mistake is made — for example entering a value in the range 13
to 19 when entering the month — the buzzer sounds three times.
Make sure that the data is correct when the month changes.
S Numeral memory tables 247 to 255 are reserved for the clock function. Clock
data can be displayed and set during operation of the NT631/NT631C by using
these numeral memory tables.
S For details on the clock function, refer to 3-10 Display and Setting of Calendar
Clock in the Reference Manual.
S No clock data is set on shipment from the factory.
S The clock data is backed up by the built-in battery of the NT631/NT631C. If the
battery voltage becomes low, the clock data cannot be retained when the power to the NT631/NT631C is turned OFF or the NT631/NT631C is reset and the
clock function will not operate correctly.
S When writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting made for
System Setting in the System Installer mode, it is not possible to set the date
and time.
185
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Display/set clock data by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Calendar Check.
Press Set.
If you are just checking the display, press Quit
at this point; the NT631/NT631C will return to
the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
Set the date.
Each of the digits of the year, month, date,
hour, minute, and second settings, and the
day of the week setting, are touch switches:
press these touch switches to change the corresponding settings.
Press Quit.
The clock data is set and the NT631/NT631C
returns to the date and time display.
Pressing Abort causes the NT631/NT631C to return to the date and time display
without executing setting (with the previous settings still effective).
186
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
6-11-3 Checking the PT Setting Status
The direct connection settings of the NT631/NT631C screen data, and the settings for serial port A and serial port B, can be checked.
Screen Configuration
and Display Contents
There are the following three PT setting status screens.
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
Display Contents of The First Screen
Item
Meaning
Screen Data Type
The host type set for the screen data
PT Control Area
Word at the host to which the PT status control area is allocated
PT Notification Area
Word at the host to which the PT status notify area is allocated
Window Control
Area
Word at the host to which the window control area is allocated
Numeric Expression
Default for the method of interpretation of the contents of
host words to which numeral memory tables are allocated
(numeric value storage method).
Expansion I/F
Type of unit installed at the expansion interface connector
Compatibility
Sets whether or not to use NT30/620 compatible mode for
screen data. (Sets whether to operate as a normal NT31/631
or emulate many key NT30/620 characteristics.)
Display Contents of The Second Screen
Item
Meaning
Comm. Port A
Communication type set for serial port A (fixed as RS-232C)
Comm. Method
Communication method set for serial port A
Comm. Setting
Communication conditions set for serial port A (display contents differ according to the communication method)
Display Contents of The Third Screen
Item
Meaning
Comm. Port B
Communication type set for serial port B
(RS-232C/RS-422A)
Comm. Method
Communication method set for serial port B
Comm. Setting
Communication settings set for serial port B (display contents differ according to the communication method)
187
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Display Method
Display the PT setting statuses by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select PT Settings.
Switch the screen as required by pressing the
[↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous screen)
touch switch.
Press Quit.
The NT631/NT631C returns to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
6-11-4 Displaying and Printing the Display History Record
The display history record function is a function that records the order of display
of each screen during operation, and the number of times each screen is displayed. Only the screens for which the display history screen attribute has been
set in advance are processed by this function.
The record data can be displayed, and printed out at a printer connected to the
NT631/NT631C by operation from the System Menu.
This section explains how to display and print out the display history record data
recorded in the NT631/NT631C.
Note that there are two display methods sort by occurrence (display time order)
and sort by frequency (order of number of times displayed).
188
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Reference:
S With the NT631/NT631C, the record data can also be displayed by calling
screen No. 9001 (sort by occurrence) or screen No. 9002 (sort by frequency)
during the RUN mode.
S For details on the display history record function, refer to 2-15-1 Display History Record Function in the Reference Manual.
S The order of display for sort by occurrence display (from oldest record or from
newest record) is set with the Hist. Disp. Method memory switch (page 168).
S The printing method and other information must be set in advance with the
Printer Controller (page 162) and Print Method (page 164) memory switches.
Display and print the display history record data by following the menu operation
from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Display History.
Select Sort by Occurrence or Sort by Frequency.
189
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
If necessary, select the next or previous
screen by pressing [↓] (next screen) or [↑]
(previous screen).
The example screen to the left shows a display for the sort by occurrence method
(from oldest record).
If required, press Prt. to print the display history record data.
Press Quit.
The NT631/NT631C returns to the DISPLAY
HISTORY MENU screen.
Example Print-out
All of the recorded data is printed out in the same order as on the currently displayed screen.
Example:
Sort by occurrence, from oldest record
No.
Scrn YY/MM/DD HH:MM Comment
1
1
98/01/12
10:21
Coolant Error
2
2
98/01/12
11:53
Motor Error
3
8
98/01/13
09:35
Compressor Error
4
2000
98/01/13
14:22
Emergency Stop
01/01
6-11-5 Displaying and Printing the Alarm History Record
The alarm history record function is a function that continually monitors, during
operation, the status of bits at the host designated in advance with a bit memory
table, and records the time when these bits come ON, and the number of times
they come ON.
The record data can be displayed, and printed out at a printer connected to the
NT631/NT631C by operation from the System Menu.
This section explains how to display and print out the alarm history record data
recorded in the NT631/NT631C.
Note that there are two display methods sort by occurrence (ON time order) and
sort by frequency (order of number of times the bits have come ON).
190
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Reference:
S With the NT631/NT631C, the record data can also be displayed by registering
an alarm history display element on the screen.
S For details on the alarm history record function, refer to 3-8 Using the Alarm
List/History Function of NT31, NT31C, NT631,and NT631C Reference Manual
(V064).
S The order of display for sort by occurrence display (from oldest record or from
newest record) is set with the Hist. Disp. Method memory switch (page 168).
S The printing method and other information must be set in advance with the
Printer Controller (page 162) and Print Method (page 164) memory switches.
Display and print the alarm history record data by following the menu operation
from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Alarm History.
Select Sort by Occurrence or Sort by Frequency.
191
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
If necessary, select the next or previous
screen by pressing [↓] (next screen) or [↑]
(previous screen).
The example screen to the left shows a display for the sort by occurrence method (from
oldest record).
If required, press Prt. to print the display history record data.
Press Quit.
The NT631/NT631C returns to the ALARM
HISTORY MENU screen.
Example Print-out
All of the recorded data is printed out in the same order as on the currently displayed screen.
Example:
Sort by occurrence method, from oldest record
No. Comment
YY/MM/DD HH:MM 01/01
1
Remote I/O Error
98/02/06
16:02
2
PIC Unit Error
98/02/07
09:21
3
Cycle Time Over
98/02/17
15:44
6-11-6 Checking Screen Data
The NT631/NT631C allows the registered screens (Nos. 1 to 3999) to be displayed and checked by operation from the System Menu.
Reference:
S Window screens cannot be displayed by operation from the System Menu.
S Only the user screens (Nos. 1 to 3999) can be displayed. Screens for system
use cannot be displayed.
192
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Specifying The Display Method
Specify the display method for the screens as indicated in the table below.
Setting Item
Setting
Options
Function
Display of Lamp/
Touch SW No.
Allows designation of whether the bit number of the lamp bit set for a lamp or touch
switch is displayed or not.
The display format is as follows Ljfffffff (j: area type, fffffff: bit
number).
ON, OFF*
Display of Memory
Table No.
Allows designation of whether the table numbers of numeral and character string
memory tables are displayed or not.
The display format for numeral memory tables is Nffff and the display format
for character string memory tables is Sffff.
This function is valid for the following display elements.
- Numeral displays
- Character string displays
- Bar graphs
- Numeral setting input fields (including thumbwheel type)
- Character string input fields
ON, OFF*
Display of image/
Library No.
Allows designation of whether image/library code numbers are displayed or not.
ON, OFF*
Display of Broken
Line Frame
Allows designation of whether or not broken line frames are displayed around the
display elements for showing the positions registered.
ON, OFF*
* Default (factory) setting
Reference: Each setting of the screen data check is effective only on this menu. Exiting from
this screen data check menu resets the settings to the default (all the settings are
set to OFF).
Operations On The SCREEN DATA CHECK Screen
The function shown below can be set on the SCREEN DATA CHECK screen.
Use this function as required when displaying complex screens on which multiple display elements have been registered overlapping each other.
a) Equivalent to 2 touch switches (14.4 mm)
NT631 : 14.4 mm
NT631C : 13.2 mm
c)
b) Equivalent to 2 touch switches (14.4 mm)
NT631 : 14.4 mm
NT631C : 13.2 mm
a) Display the previous display element on the upper most portion of the
screen in the order in which the display elements were registered (excluding fixed display elements).
b) Display the next display element on the upper most portion of the screen
in the order in which the display elements were registered (excluding
fixed display elements).
c) Return to the screen on which screens are specified.
193
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Displaying the SCREEN
DATA CHECK Screen
Display the SCREEN DATA CHECK screen by following the menu operation
from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Screen Data Disp.
Specify the screen to be displayed in the input
field in the middle of the screen.
Each of the digits can be incremented or
decremented by pressing the associated +
and − keys.
Press Set.
Press the touch switches to specify the display method in each case.
The setting option changes each time a touch
switch is pressed.
194
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Press Quit to return to the screen number
selection screen.
Press Disp.
BOILER OPERATION
T 015003
RUN
T 015301
STOP
L 020000
L 020005
Start
Confirmation
Stop
Confirmation
T 016312
ERROR
L 020013
Error
Occurrence
BOILER OPERATION
T 015003
RUN
T 015301
STOP
L 020000
L 020005
Start
Confirmation
Stop
Confirmation
T 016312
ERROR
Touching the top or bottom of the screen
changes the way the display elements overlap each other in the order in which they are
registered.
In this example, the bottom portion of the
touch switch, which is under the lamp, will be
displayed over the lamp.
When you have finished checking the screen,
press the central part of the screen to return to
the screen number selection screen.
L 020013
Error
Occurrence
If you wish to continue by checking another screen, repeat the operation, starting by specifying the screen number.
To end the operation, press Quit on the screen number selection screen. The
NT631/NT631C returns to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
6-11-7 Device Check
The NT631/NT631C provides checks on the functions of the following items.
• Buzzer
Page 195
• LED
Page 196
• LCD
Page 198
• Backlight
Page 199
• Screen data memory
Page 199
• Touch switches
Page 202
• Battery voltage
Page 204
Checking the Buzzer
Check if the buzzer sounds correctly.
195
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Reference: The buzzer will sound in this check regardless of the setting made with the Buzzer Sound memory switch.
Check the buzzer by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown
below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select Device Check.
Select Buzzer Check.
• If the buzzer functions correctly, it will sound continuously. At this time, the
Buzzer Check touch switch will be displayed in reverse video.
• To stop the buzzer while it is sounding, press the Buzzer Check touch switch
again.
Checking the RUN LED
196
Check if the RUN LED functions normally.
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Check the RUN LED by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select Device Check.
Select LED Check.
• If the RUN LED is functioning normally, it will operate as follows. At this time the
LED Check touch switch will be displayed in reverse video.
Lit in green OFF lit in red OFF lit in green...
• To end the LED check, press the LED Check touch switch on the DEVICE
CHECK MENU screen again.
197
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Checking the LCD
(Screen Display)
Check if the LCD display (or EL display for NT631) functions normally by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select Device Check.
Select LCD Check.
• The check screen displays all the dots on the screen: either press anywhere on
the touch panel or wait for three seconds and all the dots will be cleared.
With the NT631C, the display and clearance of all the dots on the screen is
repeated for each color in turn (red green blue magenta cyan yellow white
black).
On completion of the display and clearance of all dots, the NT631/NT631C
returns to the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen.
• To abort the LCD check, press the top right corner of the touch panel. The
NT631/NT631C will return to the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen.
198
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Checking the Backlight
(for NT631C only)
Check if the backlight functions normally with the NT631C by following the menu
operation from the System Menu shown below. This function is not available with
the NT631.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select Device Check.
Select Backlight Check.
• If the backlight is normal, it flashes. At this time, the Backlight Check touch
switch is displayed in reverse video.
• To end the backlight check, press the Backlight Check touch switch again.
Screen Data Memory
Check
Check if the screen data memory is functioning normally.
199
System Maintenance
Reference:
Section 6-11
S In the screen data memory check, a write test is performed on the screen data
memory. Since all the screen data in the NT631/NT631C is lost in this check,
confirm that this data is backed up at the Support Tool or memory unit before
executing it.
S If writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting for System Settings in the System Installer mode, it is not possible to execute a screen data
check.
S Once a screen data check has been started, it cannot be stopped.
200
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Check the screen data memory by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select Device Check.
Select Screen Memory.
Press Execute.
• During the check, the message Checking Now... is displayed.
• On normal completion of the check, the message Memory Check OK is displayed.
• If an error is discovered in the check, the message Memory Check NG is displayed.
201
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
After confirming the result of the check, press Quit. The NT631/NT631C returns
to the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen.
Checking Touch
Switches
Check whether or not the touch switches function normally by following the
menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select Device Check.
Select Touch Switch.
Press the touch switches displayed on the
screen. A touch switch is normal if it is displayed in reverse video while pressed.
202
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
To end the check, press the touch switch at the top right corner (NT631: displayed in reverse video; NT631C: displayed in yellow). The NT631/NT631C will
return to the DEVICE CHECK MENU.
Reference:
S The functions of touch switches pressed during the I/O check are not notified
to the host.
S The check cannot be performed until the touch switch at the top right corner is
displayed in reverse video (for NT631) or displayed in yellow (NT631C). Start
the check after the status of the touch switch at the top right corner has
changed.
203
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Checking the Battery
Voltage
Check the voltage of the NT631/NT631C’s built-in battery by following the menu
operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select Device Check.
Select Battery.
The voltage is within the normal range. or
The voltage is lowered. is displayed.
After confirming the result of the check, press Quit. The NT631/NT631C returns
to the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen.
204
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Note When The voltage is lowered is displayed, replace the built-in battery immediately. For details on the replacement method, refer to 7-3-1 Replacing the Battery (page 237).
6-11-8 Checking Interfaces
The NT631/NT631C allows the following communication functions to be
checked.
• Communication with the Support Tool Page 205
• Communication at serial ports
Page 207
• Communication with printers
Page 210
205
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Checking
Communication with the
Support Tool
Check communication with the Support Tool by following the menu operation
from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select I/F Check.
Select Tool Comm..
The check on communication with the Support Tool starts.
If communication with the Support Tool is normal, data transmitted from the Support Tool is displayed as hexadecimal data when received by the
NT631/NT631C.
206
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
After confirming the result of the test, press Quit. The NT631/NT631C returns to
the I/F CHECK MENU screen.
Checking
Communication at Serial
Ports
Check communication at the serial ports (A, B).
Check Screen
The check screen and check method differ according to the communication
method set for the port to be checked.
For Host Link
Example: Serial port A while using the host link
Press Execute to start the check. The data for checking communication is sent to
the host, and is displayed as the Sending Data in hexadecimal.
• If communication with the host is normal, the reply from the host is displayed at
Received Data in hexadecimal.
• If a communication error occurs while checking the communication conditions
with the host, a communication error screen is displayed. Since this indicates
that there is a communication fault, check the communication cables and settings.
For NT Link (1:1, 1:N Standard, or 1:N High-speed)
Example: Serial port B while using the NT Link (1:N)
Press Execute to start the check. The data for checking communication is sent to
the host, and is displayed as ∗∗ symbols at Sending Data.
• If communication with the host is normal, the reply from the host is displayed at
Received Data as ∗∗ symbols.
• If a communication error occurs while checking the communication conditions
with the host, a communication error screen is displayed. Since this indicates
that there is a communication fault, check the communication cables and settings.
207
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
For Memory Link
Example: Serial port A while using the memory link
The check is started as soon as the check screen is displayed. Send the command from the host.
• If communication with the host is normal, the data received from the host is displayed in hexadecimal text code at Received Data.
• If nothing is displayed at Received Data when the command is sent from the
host, there is a communication fault: check the communication cables and settings.
For a Bar Code Reader
The check starts when the check screen is displayed. Read data with the bar
code reader in this status.
• If communication with the bar code reader is normal, the read character strings
are displayed in hexadecimal text code at Received Data.
• If nothing is displayed at Received Data when data is read with the bar code
reader, there is a communication fault: check the communication cables and
settings.
208
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Check Method
Check communication with the serial ports by following the menu operation from
the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select I/F Check.
Select Comm. Port A or Comm. Port B.
The check screen is displayed (Check
screen, page 207).
After confirming the result of the check, press Quit. The NT631/NT631C returns
to the I/F CHECK MENU screen.
209
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Checking
Communication with a
Printer
Check communication with a printer by following the menu operation from the
System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select I/F Check.
Select Printer.
Confirm that a printer is connected to the
NT631/NT631C, then press Execute: Printer
Interface Check will be printed out at the
printer.
• While data is being sent to the printer, the message Checking Now... is displayed.
• When the sending of data to the printer is completed, Finished Normal by Printer Interface Check is displayed.
210
Programming Console Function
Section 6-12
• If data does not reach the printer within 60 seconds after sending starts, the
message ‘Finished Printer output failed’ is displayed.
After confirming the result of the check, press Quit. The NT631/NT631C returns
to the I/F CHECK MENU screen.
6-12 Programming Console Function
The NT631/NT631C has been equipped with the Programming Console function, which allows it to be used like a C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console
for CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CS1-series CS1G/CS1H, or SRM1 PCs.
Except for recording (saving) ladder programs on cassette tape and replaying
(reading) them, almost all the functions of a Programming Console can be
executed.
Note When the programmable controller functions are used, carefully check that the
system is safe before carrying out the following operations.
• Changing monitor data
• Switching the operating mode
• Forced set or reset
• Changing a present value or set value
211
Section 6-12
Programming Console Function
6-12-1 Usable Systems
The Programming Console function can be used with an NT631/NT631C connected to a PC when using the communication method indicated below.
Communication Method
Communication Type
NT Link (1:1)
RS-232C
NT Link (1:N)
Applicable PCs
Connected Port
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE(*1)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE(*1)
CPM2A-30CDjj-j(*1)
CPM2A-40CDjj-j(*1)
CPM2A-60CDjj-j(*1)
CPM2C-10jjjjjj-j(*2)
CPM2C-20jjjjjj-j(*2)
CQM1-CPU4j-EV1(*1)
CQM1H-CPU21(*1)
CQM1H-CPU51(*1)
CQM1H-CPU61(*1)
SRM1-C02-V2
CPU built-in
RS-232C port
CPM1-10CDR-j
CPM1-20CDR-j
CPM1A-10CDj-j
CPM1A-20CDj-j
CPM1A-30CDj-j
CPM1A-40CDj-j
Peripheral port (*3)
CS1G-CPU42-EV1
CS1G-CPU43-EV1
CS1G-CPU44-EV1
CS1G-CPU45-EV1
CS1H-CPU63-EV1
CS1H-CPU64-EV1
CS1H-CPU65-EV1
CS1H-CPU66-EV1
CS1H-CPU67-EV1
• CPU
built-in
RS-232C port
• Peripheral port
(*4)
*1: The peripheral port Programming Console always has priority. If a Programming
Console is connected later, the Programming Console function of the
NT631/NT631C is invalidated and operation from the NT631/NT631C becomes
impossible.
*2: The CPM2C-CN111 Connecting Cable splits the PC’s Communication Port into a
RS-232C port and a peripheral port.
*3: An RS-232C cable cannot be connected to the peripheral port. An RS-232C
adapter (CPM1-CIF01) is required.
*4: The RS-232C cable cannot be directly connected to the peripheral port. An
RS-232C converting cable (CS1W-CN118) is required.
212
Programming Console Function
Section 6-12
Reference: Note that the Programming Console function cannot be used with CPM1, CQM1,
and C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E PCs of the following lot numbers.
CPM1: jjj5, jj*6
where * is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y.
CQM1: jjj3, jjj4, jjj5, jj*6
where * is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y.
C200HX/HG/HE: jjj5 jj*6
where * is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y.
6-12-2 Connection Method
CQM1, CQM1H,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, or
SRM1
The connection method is exactly the same as for the NT Link (1:1). Refer to
Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to the PC.
* When using the Programming Console function with a CQM1H, turn ON pin 7 of
the DIP switch on the front of the CQM1H’s CPU Unit.
CPM1 or CPM2A
The connection method is the same as for the NT Link (1:1). With a CPM1, connect the RS-232C cable to the peripheral port via a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C
Adapter or CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.
Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to
the PC.
CPM2C
The connection method is the same as for the NT Link (1:1). Connect to the PC’s
communications connector with a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or a CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A
Adapter.
Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to
the PC.
* When using the Programming Console function with a CPM2C, turn ON pin 2 of
the DIP switch on the front of the CPM2C’s CPU Unit.
CS1G/CS1H
The connection method is exactly the same as for the NT Link (1:N) (standard or
high-speed). Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port
or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on
connecting to the PC. The standard or high-speed 1:N NT Link can be used.
The Programming Console function can be used only when the PT’s unit number is set to 0. Only one unit using the Programming Console function can be
connected to each of the PC’s ports (built-in RS-232C port and peripheral port).
With the CS1G/CS1H, the Programming Console function can be used simultaneously at both the built-in RS-232C port and peripheral port. Furthermore, the
Programming Console function can be started at the RS-232C port while a Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port.
213
Section 6-12
Programming Console Function
6-12-3 Method of Use
The Programming Console screen is displayed by operating the system menu
as described below.
Ver 3.10
Select Expansion Mode.
Select Programming Console.
The Programming Console screen is displayed.
Press the Programming Console sheet
keys (touch switches) for the operation.
Press the Quit touch switch to exit the
screen.
An error is displayed if a wrong communication protocol is selected or a Programming
Console is connected to the peripheral
port.(*1)
*1: With the CS1G/CS1H, the Programming Console function can be used
simultaneously at both the built-in RS-232C port and peripheral port.
Reference: When an error screen is displayed, press the Check touch switch on the screen
to return to the system menu. In addition, pressing two of the four corners of the
touch panel simultaneously in the error screen enables the display of the system
menu.
Key Operations
Mode Selection Keys, Mode Lock Key
The display element on the Programming Console screen shown below com-
214
Section 6-12
Programming Console Function
prises the mode selection keys, which change the operation mode of the PC,
and the mode lock key, which prevents unintended mode changes.
Mode selection keys
Mode lock key
The RUN, MONITOR, and PROGRAM mode selection key elements are touch
switches and pressing them causes the PC operation mode to change (unlike an
actual Programming Console, it is possible to switch directly between the RUN
mode and the PROGRAM mode.)
When the Programming Console function is started, the PC operation status is
read and reflected at the PC.
The mode lock key element is also a touch switch, and it alternates between the
lock ON (with no key displayed) and lock OFF (with key displayed) states when
pressed. During the lock ON state, mode selection key operations are ineffective. The mode displays change as indicated in the figures below during the lock
ON status and during the lock OFF status.
When the Programming Console function starts, the lock ON status is established.
If the RUN, MONITOR, or PROGRAM mode selection key is pressed in the lock
OFF status, the mode changes and the lock ON status is established.
During Lock OFF
RUN mode
MONITOR mode
PROGRAM mode
MONITOR mode
PROGRAM mode
During Lock ON
RUN mode
Programming Console Keyboard
The Programming Console keyboard used on the screen when the Programming Console function is used is comprised entirely of touch switches (shown by
the dashed line frames in the figure below). On pressing a touch switch, a key
operation is executed. However, since there is a discrepancy between the size
of the displayed keys and the size of the touch switches, take care to press as
close to the center of the key as possible by referring to the figure below.
In addition, if the connected host is the CS1G/CS1H, the Programming Console
key sheet for the CS1 series is automatically displayed.
215
Programming Console Function
Section 6-12
Standard Programming Console Key Sheet
Programming Console Key Sheet for CS1 Series
Differences with Respect to Programming Consoles
• Programs cannot be stored (recorded) or read (replayed). If it is necessary to
store or read a program, use a Programming Device.
• It is not possible to adjust the volume of the key press sound. Whether or not
the key press sound sounds is determined by the setting for the Key Press
Sound memory switch of the NT631/NT631C. It sounds when the setting is ON
and does not when the setting is OFF (page 160).
• If an error occurs when using the Programming Console function, an error
screen is displayed. Whether or not the buzzer sounds at this time is determined by the setting for the Buzzer Sound memory switch of the
NT631/NT631C (page 161).
Reference: A communications error will occur if you use the Programming Console function
to change the communications settings (in the PC’s PC Setup) that govern the
port to which the NT631/NT631C is connected. In this case, the Programming
Console function will be unusable.
216
Section 6-13
Device Monitor Function
6-13 Device Monitor Function
The NT631/NT631C has been equipped with the Device Monitor function which
can be used to change the PC’s operating mode, read/change words in the PC’s
data areas, and display the PC’s error log of a CS1G/CS1H, CPM1, CPM2A,
CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, or SRM1.
The Device Monitor can perform the following operations:
• Changing the PC’s operating mode
• Displaying/changing the contents of words, displaying/changing the status of
bits, force-setting/force-resetting the status of bits (Registration Monitor)
• Listing the contents of a range of words (Continuous Monitor)
• Displaying the error log and clearing errors (Error Log)
This section provides an overview of the Device Monitor function and explains
how to connect to the PC. For more details, refer to 2-16 Device Monitor Function in the Reference Manual.
! Caution
Be sure that it is safe to proceed before using the Device Monitor function to perform one of the following operations from the PT.
Changing monitored data
Switching the PC’s operating mode
Force setting or force resetting bits
Changing PVs or SVs
Reference:
S The Device Monitor function can be used with Ver. 3.0 and higher versions of
the PT system program only.
S The Device Monitor functions are almost identical to the functions of the Data
Access Console (DAC).
S The Device Monitor function cannot be used with host link or memory link communications.
217
Section 6-13
Device Monitor Function
6-13-1 Compatible Systems
The following table shows the combinations of communications methods and
PCs that can support the PT’s Device Monitor function.
Communications
method
PC model
1:1 NT Link
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
C200HE-CPU32 (-Z)E
C200HE-CPU42 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU33 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU43 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU53 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU63 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU34 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU44 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU54 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU64 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CPM1-10CDR-j*1
CPM1-20CDR-j*1
CPM1A-10CDj-j*1
CPM1A-20CDj-j*1
CPM1A-30CDj-j*1
CPM1A-40CDj-j*1
CPM2A-30CDjj-j
CPM2A-40CDjj-j
CPM2A-60CDjj-j
CPM2C-10jjjjjj-j*2
CPM2C-20jjjjjj-j*2
CQM1-CPU4j-EV1
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
SRM1-C02-V2
1:N NT Link
C200HE-CPU32 (-Z)E
C200HE-CPU42 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU33 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU43 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU53 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU63 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU34 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU44 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU54 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU64 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
SRM1-C02-V2
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
*1: A CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter is required.
*2: Use a Conversion Cable (CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118), CPM1-CIF01
RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter to connect to the PC.
6-13-2 Connection Method
CQM1H or
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
The 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link can be used. The connection method is exactly
the same as for the 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link. Refer to Section 4 Connecting to
the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the
RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to the PC.
CQM1 or C200HS
The 1:1 NT Link can be used. The connection method is exactly the same as for
the 1:1 NT Link. Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C
Port or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details
on connecting to the PC.
CPM1, CPM2A, or SRM1
The 1:1 NT Link can be used in all CPUs and the 1:N NT Link can also be used in
-V2 and higher versions of the SRM1. The connection method is exactly the
same as for the 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link. With a CPM1, connect the RS-232C
cable to the peripheral port via a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter or
CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.
Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to
the PC.
CPM2C
The 1:1 NT Link can be used. The connection method is the same as for the NT
Link (1:1). Connect to the PC’s communications connector with a CPM2CCN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C
Adapter, or a CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.
218
Section 6-14
Version Display
Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to
the PC.
The 1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed) can be used. The connection method
is exactly the same as for the 1:N NT Link.
Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to
the PC.
CS1G/CS1H
6-13-3 Method of Use
The Device Monitor screen is displayed by operating the system menu as described below.
Ver 3.10
Select Expansion Mode.
Select Device Monitor.
An error message will be displayed
if the wrong communications protocol is selected.
The Device Monitor screen is displayed.
Reference: When an error screen is displayed, press the Check touch switch on the screen
to return to the system menu. In addition, pressing two of the four corners of the
touch panel simultaneously in the error screen enables the display of the system
menu.
For more details on operations of the Device Monitor function, refer to 2-16 Device Monitor Function in the Reference Manual.
6-14 Version Display
Use the Version Display function to check the version of the NT631/NT631C’s
system program. The Version Display screen shows the model, creation date,
and version of the system program installed in the NT631/NT631C.
219
Section 6-14
Version Display
6-14-1 Method of Use
The Version Display screen is displayed by operating the system menu as described below.
Ver 3.10
Select Expansion Mode.
Select Version Display.
The system program’s version information will be
displayed as described below. Press the Quit
touch switch to exit the Version Display screen and
return to the Expansion Mode screen.
•
•
•
•
PT Model:
System program:
Version
Date
PT model number
System program name
System program version
Date program was created.
This screen is an example. Actual screens will
show the information specific to the PT and system
program being used.
After checking the version information, press the Quit touch switch to exit the
Version Display screen and return to the Expansion Mode screen.
Reference:
S The PT model always shows the model number of the ivory model of the PT.
The B suffix will not be displayed, even for black models.
S The system program’s version number is also displayed in the upper-right corner of the System Menu.
S The creation date does not always match the file date of the system program
installed with the System Installer.
220
SECTION 7
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
This section describes the action to take when NT631/NT631C errors occur, and how to carry out maintenance and inspection
to prevent the occurrence of errors.
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Responding to Displayed Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-1
Errors Occurring at Start of Operation and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . .
7-2-2
Errors Occurring during Operation and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-3
Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization and Transmission . . . .
7-2-4
Errors in the System Installer Mode and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-5
Communication Errors and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-1
Replacing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
222
225
225
227
228
229
229
231
237
238
221
Section
Troubleshooting
7-1
7-1
Troubleshooting
When a fault relating to the operation of the NT631/NT631C occurs, find the
symptoms in the table below and respond by following the corresponding Remedy indicated in the table.
Note
NT631/NT631C
Symptoms
Power LED fails to come
ON
Nothing is displayed on
the screen.
Cannot communicate with
the Support
Su ort Tool
Cannot communicate with
the host
Cannot switch from the
system initializing screen.
Communication error
message is displayed
when communicating to
the host.
The buzzer has sounded
and the RUN LED is OFF.
The touch panel does not
respond.
res
ond.
The PC mode has
changed to the monitor
mode.
222
1. Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF or resetting.
2. Do not disassemble the PT for repair or modification.
Cause
Remedy
Power is not being supplied.
Check the connections and make sure that power is
supplied correctly. (3-1-3 Power Supply Connection,
page 31)
Power supply fuse has blown.
Contact your OMRON service center.
Screen No. 0 has been read at the
host side.
This is not an error. Change the screen number
from screen number 0. (Setting the screen number
to 0 turns the screen off.)
The system startup waiting time has
not elapsed yet.
This is not an error. The display will appear after the
waiting time has elapsed.
The Transmit mode has not been
established.
Display the System Menu and select the Transmit
mode. (6-6 Transmitting the Screen Data, page 144)
Not connected to the Support Tool.
Check the installation of the connector cable. (3-2
Connecting to the Support Tool, page 33)
The PT model setting and direct
connection setting at the Support
Tool do not match the
NT631/NT631C.
Using the PT Configuration settings of the Support
Tool, set the PT model and direct connection
settings that match the NT631/NT631C.
Memory switch settings do not
match.
Check the communication setting in the Memory
Switch menu of the Maintenance mode, and match
the communication protocol settings for the host and
NT631/NT631C. (6-7 Setting Conditions for
Communications with Host by Using Memory
Switches, page 147)
NT631/NT631C and host are not
correctly connected.
Check that the type, length, and installation of the
connector cable match the specifications. (Section 4
Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port, and
Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the
RS-422A/485 Port)
In an RS-422A/485 connection, the
terminator setting is incorrect.
Make the NT631/NT631C and PC termination
resistance settings correctly. (Section 4 Connecting
to the Host from the RS-232C Port, and Section 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port)
In an NT link (1:N) connection, there
is duplication in the unit numbers.
Make the settings again so that there is no
duplication. (6-7-4 Setting the NT Link (1:N) Method
(Standard/High-speed), page 152)
The power to the NT631/NT631C,
NT-AL001 or host is OFF.
Check the power supply.
Malfunction due to external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 32.
The NT631/NT631 has developed
trouble.
Contact your OMRON service center.
Malfunction due to external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 32.
The touch panel is broken.
Test the touch panel with I/O Check in the
MAINTENANCE MODE menu. If there is an error,
contact your OMRON service center.
The NT631/NT631C changes the
mode when Host Link
communication is used.
This is an NT631/NT631C specification. When
using a PC that can also be connected using the NT
link method, use an NT link connection (there is no
mode change with the NT link method).
Section
Troubleshooting
NT631/NT631C
Symptoms
Cause
7-1
Remedy
The graph display does
not change.
One of the percentage display
settings — −100%, 0%, or 100% —
is incorrect.
Set the −100%, 0%, and 100% values in the
following relationship:
−100% value < 0% value < 100% value
The trend graph display
does not agree with the
actual time axis.
The cycle for graph display update
processing is longer than the set
sampling cycle.
Delete other elements on the same screen as the
trend graph that are allocated to the host and have
a high update frequency. Or lengthen the sampling
cycle.
The Programming
Console function cannot
be used.
The communication settings are
incorrect.
Set the communication method as follows when
using the Programming Console function.
S With C series PLC: 1:1 NT Link
S With CS1 series PLC:
1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed)
A Programming Console is
connected.
It is not possible to use a Programming Console and
the Programming Console function at the same
time. Disconnect the Programming Console.
The PC does not support the
Programming Console function.
Not all PCs support the Programming Console
function. Check the model of PC you are using.
(6-12 Programming Console Function, page 211)
The system program for other
vendor’s PCs has been installed.
(PC models other than OMRON.)
The Programming Console function can be used
only when the system program for OMRON PCs is
installed. Install the correct system program.
The communications settings are not
correct.
Set the communication method as follows when
using the Device Monitor function.
S With C series PLCs: 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link
S With CS1 series PLCs:
1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed)
The PC does not support the Device
Monitor function.
Not all PCs support the Device Monitor function.
Check the model of PC you are using. Refer to 6-13
Device Monitor Function for details.
The system program installed in the
PT is for a PC maker other than
OMRON.
The Device Monitor function can be used only when
the PT is connected to a PT with the system
program for OMRON PCs installed. Install a system
program that supports the Device Monitor function.
Since the memory table is allocated
to the host memory, the display is
updated in accordance with the
contents of the host memory.
When the contents of the memory table are set as a
fixed value, do not allocate the memory table to the
host.
The battery voltage has dropped and
the data in the memory table has
been destroyed.
Replace the battery and execute memory table
initialization. (7-3-1 Replacing the Battery, page 237,
and 6-4-5 Initializing the Memory Tables, page 137)
Since ON is set for the resume
function, the initial values of the
screen data memory are not written
to the memory tables.
Execute memory table initialization. (6-4-5
Initializing the Memory Tables, page 137)
If the resume function does not need to be used,
use the NT631/NT631C with the resume function
OFF. (6-9-10 Setting the Resume Function, page
170)
The numeral memory table is
specified as the destination for a
mathematical table’s results.
Calculations are executed continuously while the PT
is operating and the calculation results are
automatically written to the memory table. Specify
another numeral memory table or a word in the
host.
The Device Monitor
function cannot be used.
The memory table display
contents differ from the
initial value set at the
Support Tool.
223
Section
Troubleshooting
NT631/NT631C
Symptoms
Updating of numeric
values and text is
d l
d
delayed.
Some of the elements
arranged on a normal
screen are not displayed.
Cause
7-1
Remedy
Malfunction due to external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 32.
There are too many numeral/text
displays on the displayed screen.
Reduce the number of numeral/text displays on the
screen for which updating is delayed.
The cycle time is extended due to
heavy processing at the host.
Shorten the host cycle time.
In an RS-422A/485 connection,
there is illegal branching or an
erroneous terminator setting.
Wire correctly by referring to Section 5 Connecting
to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.
The quantity of read data exceeds
the stipulated restriction.
Check the maximum number of elements by
referring to Dis
lay Restrictions in A
endix A of the
Display
Appendix
Reference
f
Manual, creating the screen data again,
and transmitting all of the screen data in a batch to
the NT631/NT631C.
The total of the element coefficients
for the displayed screen is greater
than 1024.
On an overlapping screen, Since the data is transmitted from
some of the set elements the host in screen units, the number
are not displayed.
of elements on the overlapping
screen has exceeded the maximum
permissible without being checked
by the Support Tool.
Check the maximum number of elements by
referring to Display Restrictions in Appendix A of the
Reference Manual, creating the screen data again,
and then sending all the screen data in a batch to
the NT631/NT631C.
The System Menu cannot
be called up.
Display System Menu under Change
System Settings in the System
Installer mode is set to Disabled.
In the System Installer mode, set Display System
Menu to Enabled (page 143).
The following System
Menu operations are not
possible.
- Establishing the
Transmit mode
laying the memory
- Dis
Displaying
switch setting screens
- Screen data memory
check
- Displaying the
initialization menu
- Displaying the
calendar/time setting
screen
Screen Memory Protect under
Change System Setting in the
System Installer mode is set to
Disabled.
In the System Installer mode, set Screen Memory
Protect to Enabled (page 143).
Screen Memory Protect has been
set to Disabled because the PT
power supply was turned OFF during
deletion of screen data.
Do not turn the PT power OFF during deletion of
screen data.
In the System Installer mode, first change the
setting for Screen Memory Protect to Enabled, then
repeat the screen data delete operation (pages 143
and 143)
Cannot input numeric
values
The upper/lower (max./min.) limit
check for numeric value input is in
effect.
Check the screen data’s upper/lower (max./min.)
limit check setting for numeric value input, and
correct it if necessary. Refer to 2-12 Inputting
Numeric Values in the Reference Manual for details.
The display is too faint.
The contrast is too high.
Reduce the contrast (page 181).
Cannot input numeric
values/character strings.
Bit 5 of the PT status control area
(numeral/character string input) is
set to 1 (ON).
Set bit 5 to 0 (OFF). Refer to 2-2-1 PT Status
Control Area (Host ↔ PT) in the Reference Manual
for details.
The interlock function is set for the
input field and the controlling
interlock bit is OFF.
Inputs are prohibited in input fields when the
corresponding interlock bit is OFF. Check the status
of the corresponding interlock bit and turn it ON.
Window screen does not
open
Bit 6 of the PT status control area
(PT window opening) is set to 1
(ON).
Set bit 6 to 0 (OFF). Refer to 2-2-1 PT Status
Control Area (Host ↔ PT) in the Reference Manual
for details.
Cannot switch screens
with touch switches
Bit 4 of the PT status control area
(PT screen switching) is set to 1
(ON).
Set bit 4 to 0 (OFF). Refer to 2-2-1 PT Status
Control Area (Host ↔ PT) in the Reference Manual
for details.
Touch switch does not
work. (Buzzer sounds.)
The interlock function is set for the
touch switch and the controlling
interlock bit is OFF.
Touch switches are disabled when the
corresponding interlock bit is OFF. Check the status
of the corresponding interlock bit and turn it ON.
224
Section
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
NT631/NT631C
Symptoms
The display is dim.
Cause
7-2
Remedy
Insufficient contrast or brightness
Increase the contrast/brightness (pages 181 and
183).
Backlight defective, or its life has
expired
Replace the backlight (page 232).
The display is too faint.
The contrast is too high.
Reduce the contrast (page 181).
The digits in numeral
display come out as *.
The number of digits of a numeric
value in a numeral memory table
exceeds the set number.
• Confirm the values of the PC words allocated to the
numeral memory table.
7-2
• Allocate one PC word to each numeral memory
table.
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
When the NT631/NT631C displays an error message, find the corresponding
symptoms in the appropriate table below and respond by following the Remedy
indicated in the table.
For details of the error messages displayed when using memory unit and corrective action to take for them, refer to 3-5 Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions) in
page 36 or 3-6 Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix) in page
44.
7-2-1 Errors Occurring at Start of Operation and Their Remedies
The table below shows the errors that can occur when the power to the
NT631/NT631C is turned ON and when operation starts, and their remedies.
Message
Cause
Remedy
[No Comm. Protocol]
Set the comm. Protocol by
MAINTENANCE MODE.
No communication protocol has
been set.
Communication protocol and
screen data type are mismatched
Using the memory switches, set the
communication method to be used for
communication with the host. (6-7 Setting
Conditions for Communications with Host
by Using Memory Switches, page 147)
[Screen Data Error]
Screen Data corrupted.
Initialize Screen Memory, and download
Screen Data again.
- The power was switched OFF
during screen data
initialization, checking, or
transmission.
- Transmission of screen data
was interrupted.
- Illegal data has been written to
the screen data memory.
Initialize the screen data memory by
operation at the System Menu, then
re-transmit the screen data. (6-4-1
Clearing Screen Data, page 131)
If the problem persists, contact your
OMRON service center.
[No Screen Data]
No Screen Data is saved in Screen
Memory.
Download Screen Data using by the
Support Tool.
Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT
MODE, and download Screen Data
again.
No screen data is registered.
Transmit screen data from the Support
Tool.
[No Direct Connection Info.]
No Direct Connection Information is set
in Screen Data.
Set Direct Connecting Information in
Screen Data using by the Support Tool.
Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT
MODE and download Screen Data
again.
Allocated words have not been
set for the PT status control area
and PT status notify area.
Allocate words for the PT status control
area and PT status notify area with the
Support Tool and then transmit the direct
connection information to the
NT631/NT631C.
225
Section
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
Message
Cause
7-2
Remedy
[Incorrect Screen Data]
Screen Data in Screen Memory do not
match with the System Program.
Initialize Screen Memory, and download
Screen Data again.
The type of registered screen
data does not match that at the
NT631/NT631C.
Initialize the screen data memory, then
transmit the correct screen data. (6-4-1
Clearing Screen Data, page 131)
[No Starting Screen]
Specified Starting Screen is not saved.
Fix Screen Data using by the Support
Tool.
Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT
MODE and download Screen Data
again.
No data is registered for either
the screen number set in the PT
status control area or the Initial
Screen set with the Support Tool.
Or the screen number which
does not exist are registered.
Either specify a screen number for which
data is registered at the PT status control
area, or set the screen as the Initial
Screen in the System settings under PT
Configuration at the Support Tool.
[Touch Panel is disconnected]
The touch panel cable (film
cable) inside the NT631/NT631C
is disconnected.
If this message appears after the
backlight is replaced, reinstall the touch
panel properly referring to Replacing the
Backlight (page 232). If the message
keeps appearing, contact your OMRON
service center.
[Memory Switch Corrupted]
Because Memory Switch setting was
last. Initialized Memory Switch setting.
Press Confirm to return to the SYSTEM
MENU.
The memory switches have been
initialized due to discovery of an
error in the memory switch
settings.
Set the memory switches again using the
System Menu and the System settings
under PT Configuration at the Support
Tool. (Section 6 System Menu Operation)
If the problem recurs, contact your
OMRON service center.
[Calendar Data Error]
Calendar Data is incorrect.
Set to the MAINTENANCE MODE and
set Calendar Data.
There is an error in the date/time
values due, for example, to low
battery voltage.
Check the battery voltage by checking
the color of the RUN LED and with the
battery check in the System Menu; if the
voltage is low, replace the battery with a
new one. (Checking the Battery Voltage,
page 204, and 7-3-1 Replacing the
Battery, page 237)
If the battery voltage is confirmed to be
normal, set the calendar clock correctly
from the System Menu. (6-11-2
Displaying/Setting the Calendar and
Clock, page 185)
[Backup Data Error]
Memory table and History data was
initialized by backup failure.
It can be caused by lowered voltage of
the battery.
Initialization has been executed
because of an error in the
backup data area.
Check the battery voltage by checking
the color of the RUN LED and with the
battery check in the System Menu; if the
voltage is low, replace the battery with a
new one. (Checking the Battery Voltage,
page 204, and 7-3-1 Replacing the
Battery, page 237) The re-transmit the
memory table data from the Support Tool.
If the voltage is normal and the problem
recurs, contact your OMRON service
center.
[With memory switch setting screen]
Invalid Comm. Method
Protocol settings for serial port A
and serial port B are
mismatched.
Refer to Possible Combinations of
Communication Method Settings in page
148 and set the protocol of serial port A
and serial port B so that their settings are
matched.
* Set serial port A to None when
connecting the Support Tool and the host
at the same time.
226
Section
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
7-2
7-2-2 Errors Occurring during Operation and Their Remedies
The table below shows the errors that can occur during operation of the
NT631/NT631C and their remedies.
Message
Cause
Remedy
[Address Setting Error]
Addressing Error exists in the
Screen.
Correct address setting by the
Support Tool.
The host side allocated words
and bits set with the Support Tool
are incorrect.
Set correct words and bits after checking the
area used at the host side by referring to PC
Memory Map in Appendix D of the Reference
Manual or the Operating Manual for the PC
being used.
[Memory Table No. Error]
Memory table No. is out of limit.
Correct the table No. by the
Support Tool.
The memory table number set
with the Support Tool is outside
the range for the number of
memory tables set in the system
memory.
Either increase the number of memory tables in
the System settings under PT Configuration at
the Support Tool, or set the memory table
number again within the established range.
[Programming Console Error]
Setting of Programming Console
Function is inadequate. It can be
caused by:
S This PLC does not support Prog
g Console Function.
gramming
S Protocol mismatch. Set the PLC
to NT Link.
S “PROGRAMMING CONSOLE”
is connected to PLC.
The communication settings are
incorrect.
Set the communication method/communication
port as follows when using the Programming
Console function.
S With C series PLCs:1:1 NT Link
S With CS1 series PLCs:
1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed)
The PC used does not support
the Programming Console
function.
Not all PCs support the Programming Console
function. Check the model of the PC you are
using. (6-12 Programming Console Function,
page 211)
A Programming Console is
connected.
It is not possible to use a Programming Console
and the Programming Console function at the
same time. Disconnect the Programming
Console.
The connecting cable is
defective.
Check the cable connection and perform a
conductivity test. If there is a fault, replace the
cable.
Malfunction due to external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page
32.
A Programming Console is
connected.
It is not possible to use a Programming Console
and the Programming Console function at the
same time. Disconnect the Programming
Console.
The communication conditions at
the PC have been changed in
accordance with the
NT631/NT631C Programming
Console function.
Set the communication conditions at the PC to
match the conditions set in the System Menu.
[Programming Console Error]
Programming Console Function
does not RUN. It can be caused
by:
S Connecting cable is faulty.
CONSOLE”
S “PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING CONSOLE
is connected to PLC.
S Protocol mismatch between the
PT and PLC. Set the PLC to NT
Link.
227
Section
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
7-2
7-2-3 Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization and Transmission
The table below shows the errors that can occur when the NT631/NT631C data
is initialized, and during data setting and transmission, and their remedies.
Message
Cause
Remedy
[Flash Memory Error]
Flash Memory I/O Error.
If this happens frequently, Flash
Memory may be broken.
Press Reset Switch to restart.
There is a hardware fault, or the
flash memory (memory for
storing screen data) has reached
the end of its service life.
If the same message is displayed even after
clearing the screen data or transmitting screen
data several times, contact your OMRON
service center.
[Calendar Data Error]
Calendar Data is incorrect.
Set to the MAINTENANCE
MODE and set Calendar Data.
Hardware fault, or system
program error
Set the calendar clock again from the System
Menu. If the problem recurs, delete the program
in the System Installer mode, then re-install the
program. (6-5-2 Clearing/Installing the System
Program, page 140)
If this does not solve the problem, contact your
OMRON service center.
[Tool Transmit Error]
∗∗∗∗ Error detected while
downloading by the following
case:
S faulty connecting cable.
S corrupted data by noise.
The connecting cable is
defective.
Check the cable connection and perform a
conductivity test. If there is a fault, replace the
cable. (Appendix F Making the Cable for
Connecting a PC, page 263)
Malfunction due to external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page
32.
[Tool Transmit Error]
Check Sum Error occurs while
downloading by the following
case:
S corrupted data by noise.
Malfunction due to external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page
32.
[Tool Transmit Error]
Time-out Error occurs while
downloading by the following
case:
S faulty connecting cable.
The connecting cable is
defective.
Check the cable connection and perform a
conductivity test. If there is a fault, replace the
cable.
[Tool Transmit Error]
Reception was failed by Buffer
Over Flow Error.
The receive buffer has
overflowed.
Retransmit the data from the Support Tool.
228
Section
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
7-2
7-2-4 Errors in the System Installer Mode and Their Remedies
This section describes the errors that may occur in the System Installer mode of
the NT631/NT631C, and the remedies for these errors.
Message
Cause
Remedy
System Program not exist or
incorrect.
- The system program has not
been installed.
- The system program has been
deleted due to a hardware
fault, or because the flash
memory (memory for storing
the system program) has
reached its life.
Select Download System Program and
download the system program (6-5-2
Clearing/Installing the System Program, page
140).
If this does not solve the problem, contact your
OMRON service center.
Unable to erase System
Program.
Hardware fault, or flash memory
(memory for storing the system
program) has reached its life.
If the same message is displayed on repeating
selection of Download System Program and
attempting to delete the system program several
times, contact your OMRON service center
(6-5-2 Clearing/Installing the System Program,
page 140).
Unable to download System
Program.
- A communication error
occurred during downloading
of the system program.
- Illegal data has been written
into the screen data memory.
- Hardware fault, or flash
memory (memory for storing
the system program) has
reached its life.
Select Download System Program and
download the system program again (6-5-2
Clearing/Installing the System Program, page
140).
Also refer to 7-2-3 Errors Occurring on Screen
Data Initialization and Transmission (page 228),
and take the corrective action described for tool
transmission errors.
If this does not solve the problem, contact your
OMRON service center.
Unable to write System Settings.
Hardware fault, or flash memory
(memory for storing the system
program) has reached its life.
If the same message is displayed on repeating
writing of system settings several times, contact
your OMRON service center.
If writing is normally terminated after the error
message was once displayed, the Memory
Switch setting for system program may have
been altered. In such a case, check and re-set
the setting in the Memory Switch menu of the
Maintenance mode.
Unable to erase Screen Data.
Hardware fault, or flash memory
(memory for storing the system
program) has reached its life.
If the same message is displayed on repeating
screen data deletion several times, contact your
OMRON service center.
7-2-5 Communication Errors and Their Remedies
This section describes the errors relating to communication that can occur during operation, and their remedies.
Operation When a
Communication Error
Occurs
When a communication error occurs, the error message is displayed at the
NT631/NT631C, and the buzzer sounds, provided the setting made for Buzzer
Sound in the System Menu is other than OFF. An error message is displayed
provided the setting for the Comm. Auto-Return memory switch is not ON (note
that some error messages are displayed even if the setting is ON).
Operation When
Communication Errors
Occur
When an error message is displayed, press the OK touch switch displayed on
the screen. The NT631/NT631C will return to the screen that was displayed before the error occurred, and operation will restart.
Display of
Communication Errors
For communication errors, the name of the port at which the error occurred, the
error classification (send or receive error), the details of the error, the probable
cause, and the remedy, are displayed as shown below.
229
Section
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
7-2
Example:
Parity error at serial port A
Receive Errors
The following errors can occur when receiving data.
• Parity error
• Framing error
• Overrun error
• FCS (sum value) error
• Time out error
• Data over flow error
• PC unit No. error (Host Link only)
• NAK received (in the case of the Host Link, the end code is also displayed)
• Undefined command error
Send Errors
The following errors can occur when receiving data.
• Time out error
• Data over flow error
Probable Causes and
Remedies
Error Details
Parity Error
Framing Error
Over-run Error
FCS (Check Sum) Error
230
The remedies to take in accordance with the displayed cause are indicated in the
table below.
Displayed Probable Cause
Remedy
Communication parameters/
conditions set incorrectly.
Check if the settings at the host for parity bit, frame
length, communications speed, stop bit length and
flow control agree with those at the NT631/NT631C.
The connecting cables are not
connected correctly.
Check the communication cable connection and
perform a conductivity test. If there is a fault,
replace the cable. For details on communication
cables, refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host
from the RS-232C Port, and Section 5 Connecting
to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.
Noise caused data corruption during
communication.
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 32.
Noise caused data corruption during
communication.
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 32.
The PC is transmitting incorrect
data.
Check the operation at the host side.
Section
Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C
Error Details
Time-out Error
Displayed Probable Cause
7-3
Remedy
The connecting cables are not
connected correctly. (Send/Receive)
Check the communication cable connection and
perform a conductivity test. If there is a fault,
replace the cable. For details on communication
cables, refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host
from the RS-232C Port, and Section 5 Connecting
to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.
The communication service of the
host is stopped. (Send/Receive)
Check that the host is capable of communicating
with the NT631/NT631C (confirm that the
communication settings of the host and
NT631/NT631C match).
Time-out Interval is too short. (Send)
Set a longer value for Time-out Interval at the host
side.
Time-out Interval is too short.
(Receive)
Set a longer value for Time-out Interval in the
System Menu. (6-9-12 Setting the Time-out Interval,
page 174) It may also be possible to solve the
problem by shortening the host cycle time.
The unit # does not match that set
on the PC.
Re-set the unit number at the host side to 0.
Noise caused data corruption during
communication.
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 32.
NAK received
——
Check the settings for allocated words and bits.
If noise is a possible factor, distance the cable from
sources of noise and insert a noise filter in the
power supply line.
If using the equipment in a location subject to a lot
of noise, use a cable with a high degree of
protection against noise for the transmission route.
Also make the cable as short as possible.
Undefined Command
E
Error
The host is not supported.
Check the PC model used for the host.
Instruction level 3 is not effective.
Check that the instruction level setting for the host is
level 1, 2, 3.
Data Over Flow Error
Communication command from the
host is too long.
(With memory link)
Set flow control method in the host.
Increase transmission interval.
Command transmission to the host
is not possible.
Check the communication cable.
Check the control method at the PT and the host.
Increase the communication on speed when it to
slow.
PC Unit No. Error
7-3
Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C
Carry out maintenance work in order to ensure that the NT631/NT631C is always used in its optimum condition.
WARNING
Do not attempt to take the unit apart and do not touch any internal parts while the power is being supplied. Doing either of
these may result in electrical shock.
Spare PT
It is advisable to have a spare NT631/NT631C available to minimize system
downtime in the event of an NT631/NT631C failure or if the screen display becomes difficult to read due to deterioration of the display unit.
231
Section
Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C
Backlight (for NT631C
only)
7-3
When the backlight in the display is getting dim and the screen cannot be read
easily, replace the backlight. The backlight can be replaced at the rear of the
NT631/NT631C while it is mounted in an operation panel.
Replaceable Backlight Model
NT631C-CFL01 (for NT631C-ST151j-EV2)
NT631C-CFL02 (for NT631C-ST141j-EV2)
Guide to Backlight Replacement
Use the following as a guide to backlight replacement.
NT631C-ST141j-EV2: Approx. 25,000 hours
NT631C-ST151j-EV2: Approx. 30,000 hours
The life of the backlight varies, particularly in accordance with the temperature in
the environment in which it is used. It should be replaced when it becomes dim
and the screen becomes hard to read.
Notes on Replacing the
Backlight
Pay attention to the following points when replacing the backlight.
• Carry out the replacement work in a location where there is no danger that dust
or foreign bodies will enter the unit, and where no water will drip onto it.
Do not touch the printed circuit boards of the NT631/NT631C with your bare
hands.
Also, discharge the static electricity from your body before starting the work.
• Do not carry the backlight unit by holding only its cable, or pull on the cable. Do
not subject the backlight to excessive force or shock.
• Do not disassemble the product to repair or modify it.
Replacing the Backlight
Use the following procedure to replace the backlight.
WARNING
Switch OFF the NT631C power before replacing the backlight.
Otherwise you could sustain an electric shock.
Replace the backlight by following the procedure given below:
NT631C-CFL01 (for NT631C-ST151j-EV2)
Procedure
1, 2, 3...
1. Turn the power supply to the NT631C OFF.
Be sure to do so to avoid an electric shock.
2. Disconnect the terminal block wiring, the communication cable, and the
printer cable. If a memory unit or interface unit is mounted, remove that unit
also.
3. Loosen four screws at corners on the rear face of the NT631C, and remove
the rear case.
Be careful not to lose these screws.
From this step on, exert added care not to touch any electronic parts or
printed circuit boards inside the unit. Otherwise the PT may sustain static
damage.
232
Section
Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C
7-3
4. Disengage two backlight connectors at the top and the bottom, and pull out
the touch panel cable.
Removing and Fitting The Touch Panel Cable
Removing The Touch Panel Cable:
Pull the arrow-marked sections up to the cable side to unlock the connector, and
remove the cable.
Fitting The Touch Panel Cable:
While unlocking the connector, insert the touch panel cable fully. Then, lock the
connector.
Locked
Unlocked
Not locked
completely
5. Loosen two mounting screws, and remove the backlight.
When loosening or tightening screws for backlights, be sure to use a magnetized Phillips screwdriver. If any screw falls inside the unit, it must be extricated without fail.
6. Fit new backlights.
The backlight for the top is different from that for the bottom.
Each backlight has three projections. Slot these projections into slits on the
unit, and tighten the screws while lightly holding the backlight by fingers.
Make sure that the cable does not come out of the backlight. If it comes out,
233
Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C
Section
7-3
put it in the backlight and then tighten the screws.
The tightening torque must be 0.2 NSm.
7. Engage backlight connectors at the top and the bottom respectively in
place. The backlight cable has a polarity; refer to the figure below.
8. Fit the touch panel cable. Be sure to lock the connector as in step 4 after
fitting.
9. Close the rear case, and tighten four screws. Make sure that the internal
cable is not trapped.
10. Reconnect the wiring, cables, and units disconnected in 2, and tighten the
screws at a torque of 0.4 NSm.
Turn the power on, and check that the RUN LED is not flashing and that no
buzzer is sounding.
If the RUN LED flashes at 1-sec intervals and a buzzer sounds intermittently,
the touch panel cable is disconnected. Follow the above steps from 1, and
check the lock status of the connector.
11. Before starting normal operation, confirm that the following tests can be
executed correctly by using the I/O check in the Maintenance menu. Also
perform a communication test with the host.
• Touch switch
• Backlight
12. On confirming that all the tests in 11 can be executed normally, start operation.
234
Section
Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C
7-3
NT631C-CFL02 (for NT631C-ST141j-EV2)
Procedure
1, 2, 3...
1. Turn the power supply to the NT631C OFF.
Be sure to do so to avoid an electric shock.
2. Disconnect the terminal block wiring, the communication cable, and the
printer cable. If a memory unit or interface unit is mounted, remove that unit
also.
3. Loosen four screws at corners on the rear face of the NT631C, and remove
the rear case.
Be careful not to lose these screws.
From this step on, exert added care not to touch any electronic parts or
printed circuit boards inside the unit. Otherwise the PT may sustain static
damage.
4. Disengage two backlight connectors at the top and the bottom, and pull out
two touch panel cables at the top.
Removing and Fitting The Touch Panel Cable
Removing The Touch Panel Cable:
Pull the arrow-marked sections up to the cable side to unlock the connector, and
remove the cable.
Fitting The Touch Panel Cable:
While unlocking the connector, insert the touch panel cable fully. Then, lock the
connector.
Locked
Unlocked
Not locked
completely
5. Loosen mounting screws, and remove backlights.
Shift the backlight to the right, and pull it out.
When loosening or tightening screws for backlights, be sure to use a mag-
235
Section
Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C
7-3
netized Phillips screwdriver. If any screw falls inside the unit, it must be extricated without fail.
6. Fit new backlights.
The backlight for the top is different from that for the bottom.
Fit projections and dents of the backlight with those on the fixture, and shift
the backlight to the left. Check that the backlight is in contact with the left end
of the fixture and the cable comes out from the notch without being trapped.
When the backlight is correctly fit, tighten the screws at a torque of 0.1 NSm.
Top part
Fixture
Backlight fixture on the PT
Cable
Mounting screw
Backlight
Backlight
Bottom part
Backlight fixture on the PT
Cable
Mounting screw
Backlight
Fixture
Backlight
7. Engage backlight connectors at the top and the bottom respectively in
place. The backlight cable has a polarity; refer to the figure below.
White
Red
Red
White
8. Fit two touch panel cables at the top. Be sure to lock the connectors as in
step 4 after fitting.
9. Close the rear case, and tighten four screws. Make sure that the internal
cable is not trapped.
10. Reconnect the wiring, cables, and units disconnected in 2, and tighten the
screws at a torque of 0.4 NSm.
236
Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C
Section
7-3
Turn the power on, and check that the RUN LED is not flashing and that no
buzzer is sounding.
If the RUN LED flashes at 1-sec intervals and a buzzer sounds intermittently,
the touch panel cable is disconnected. Follow the above steps from 1, and
check the lock status of the connector.
11. Before starting normal operation, confirm that the following tests can be
executed correctly by using the I/O check in the Maintenance menu. Also
perform a communication test with the host.
• Touch switch
• Backlight
12. On confirming that all the tests in 11 can be executed normally, start operation.
7-3-1 Replacing the Battery
The NT631/NT631C uses a lithium battery to back up the memory contents.
The battery life is about 5 years if the NT631/NT631C is used in a location where
the ambient temperature is 25_C. If the temperature at the location of use is
higher than this, the battery life will be shorter. Change the battery at suitable
intervals in accordance with the operating environment of the NT631/NT631C.
It is advisable to keep a spare battery so that the battery can be replaced immediately when replacement becomes necessary.
Battery Type
3G2A9-BAT08 (for both NT631 and NT631C)
Guide to Replacement
Replace the battery in the following cases. The battery must be replaced within 5
days.
• When 5 years have passed since the installation of a new battery.
• When the RUN LED is lit in orange (during operation) or in red (when stopped).
• When the message The voltage is lowered. is displayed on switching on the
power or resetting the NT631/NT631C.
• When The voltage is lowered is displayed in the Battery check in the battery
check menu of the Maintenance mode.
Battery Replacement Method
Replace the battery by following the procedure given below.
To protect the contents of the memory, the battery must be replaced within 5 minutes.
Procedure
1, 2, 3...
1. Keep the power ON for at least 5 minutes and then turn it OFF.
Reference: Unless the power is kept ON for at least 5 minutes, the memory contents cannot
be retained for more than 5 minutes without a battery.
2. Insert a flat blade screwdriver at the top of the battery cover located at the left
of the rear face of the NT631/NT631C and pull it toward you.
237
Section
Inspection and Cleaning
7-4
3. Remove the battery that is secured under the battery cover, grip the cable,
and pull the connector straight out.
4. Insert the connector of the new battery into the connector on the
NT631/NT631C and fit the battery under the battery cover.
When inserting the battery connector, make sure that the projection on it
faces to the left, and press it fully home while keeping it straight.
The connector of the new battery must be connected within 5 minutes after
disconnecting the old battery’s connector. However, the battery can be replaced while the NT631/NT631C power is on, and in this case there is no
time restriction.
5. Close the battery cover, making sure that the cable is not trapped.
7-4
Inspection and Cleaning
Clean and inspect the NT631/NT631C regularly to ensure that it is always used
in its optimum condition.
Cleaning Method
If the display is dirty the screen is difficult to see. Clean the screen from time to
time as follows.
• In daily cleaning, wipe the display with a soft dry cloth. If the soiling is particularly heavy, attempting to remove it by wiping with a dry cloth may damage the
front sheet of the unit. In this case, wipe with a damp cloth.
• If the soiling cannot be removed with a dry cloth, wet the cloth with diluted neutral detergent (2%), wring it out well and wipe the display with it.
• If rubber or vinyl products, tape, etc., are left stuck to the display for long periods they will cause staining. If such items are stuck to the display, remove them
during cleaning.
Note Never use volatile solvents such as benzene or thinners, or chemical dusters.
Inspection Method
238
In normal environments, inspect the NT631/NT631C at intervals of between 6
months and a year. In environments that are extremely hot and humid, or very
dusty environments, shorten the inspection interval.
Items Required for The Inspection
Prepare the following items before starting the inspection.
• Screwdrivers (Philips, flat head)
• Tester (or digital voltmeter)
• Industrial alcohol
• 100% cotton cloth
• Hygrometer (required in some cases)
Section
Inspection and Cleaning
7-4
• Thermometer (required in some cases)
• Synchroscope (required in some cases)
• Pen-writing oscilloscope (required in some cases)
Points Inspected
Inspect the following points to determine if there is any divergence from the
stated criteria. If there is, either improve the surrounding environment so that the
values fall within the stated range, or adjust the NT631/NT631C, for example by
re-tightening screws.
Point
Inspected
Inspection Details
Criterion
Power supply
voltage
Fluctuation in power supply terminal
voltage
Ambient
environmental
di i
conditions
Ambient temperature (temperature in the 0 to 50_C
operation panel)
Thermometer
Ambient humidity (humidity in the
operation panel)
35% to 85% RH
Hygrometer
Presence/absence of dust
Dust must not be settled
Visual inspection
Looseness of mounting brackets, etc.
To be no looseness
Philips screwdriver
Connector connections of connecting
cable
To be fully inserted and locked, with
no looseness
Philips screwdriver
Looseness of screws in external wiring
To be no looseness
Philips screwdriver
Mounting
g
conditions
di i
Components
with limited
lives
Permissible voltage fluctuation range
(24 VDC −15% to +10%)
Inspection
Instrument
Tester
Conditions of external connecting cables Faults such as incipient disconnection
Visual inspection
Brightness of the backlight
(NT631C only)
Visual inspection
Note
Must be sufficiently bright.
Backlight life:
(Under the normal range of ambient
temperature and humidity)
NT631C-ST141j-EV2: Approx.
25,000 hours or longer
NT631C-ST151j-EV2: Approx.
30,000 hours or longer
(Brightness setting is not available
for the NT631C-ST151j-EV2.)
1. Do not disassemble for repairs or modification.
2. The disposal of the unit (including batteries to be disposed and backlight)
may be regulated by national or local authorities. Dispose of them in accordance with the laws and regulations of the relevant country and local authority.
Reference: Desire on replacing the NT631/NT631C
When replacing the NT631/NT631C after discovering a fault during inspections,
note the following points:
S Be sure to switch the power OFF before starting replacement.
S After replacement, check that the new NT631/NT631C is not subject to the
same error.
S If a faulty unit is returned for repairs, write as detailed a description of the fault
as possible and send this description together with the unit to the OMRON address indicated on the back cover of this book.
239
Appendix A
Specifications
General Specifications
Specification
Item
NT631-ST211j-EV2
Rated power supply voltage
NT631C-ST141j-EV2
NT631C-ST151j-EV2
24 VDC
Allowable power supply voltage range
20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC (24 VDC –15% to +10%)
Allowable power interruption time
No regulation
Power consumption
30 W max.
18 W max.
Power starting time
200 ms max.
–
Operating ambient temperature
0 to +50_C
0 to +40_C
Storage ambient temperature
0 to +50_C
–20 to +60_C
Operating ambient humidity
35% to 85% (with no condensation)
Operating environment
No corrosive gases
Noise resistance
Common mode: 1000 Vp-p (between power supply terminals and panel)
Normal mode:
300 Vp-p
Pulse width of 100 ns to 1 µs, pulse rise time of 1 ns
Vibration resistance (operating)
- 10 to 57 Hz with
0.075 mm amplitude
for 30 minutes in each of
X, Y, Z directions
Shock resistance (operating)
147 m/s2 {15G}
3 times in each of X, Y, and Z directions
Dimensions
315 (W)
250 (H)
54 (D) mm
(With expansion unit mounted: 315 (W)
Weight
2.5 kg max.
Panel cutout dimensions
184 +0.5 × 131
0
+0.5
0
- 10 to 57 Hz with 0.075 mm amplitude
- 57 to 150 Hz with 1G {9.8 m/s2} acceleration
for 30 minutes in each of X, Y, Z directions
250 (H)
74 (D) mm)
mm
Circle of panel pressure 1.6 to 4.8 mm
Enclosure ratings
Front panel: Equivalent to IP65F (NEMA4)*
Grounding
D-type grounding (Ground to 100 Ω or less)
* The NT631/NT631C may not be used at a location where it is exposed to splashing oil for a long period.
241
Appendix A
Specifications
Performance Specifications
Display Specifications
Specification
Item
NT631-ST211j-EV2
NT631C-ST141j-EV2
NT631C-ST151j-EV2
EL
(monochrome)
Color STN LCD
(with backlight)
Color TFT LCD
(with backlight)
Display device
Number of dots
(resolution)
640 dots horizontally
Size of a standard
character
Effective display area
Display panel
Height 5.28 mm
Width 2.64 mm
Height 5.76 mm
Width 2.88 mm
Height 5.28 mm
Width 2.64 mm
211 mm horizontally
158 mm vertically
(10.4 inches)
229 mm horizontally
172 mm vertically
(11.3 inches)
211 mm horizontally
158 mm vertically
(10.4 inches)
Up/down:
Left:
Right:
Up:
Down:
Left:
Right:
Display color
Black, white
(2 colors)
8 colors (and intermediate colors can be
displayed with tiling patterns)
30,000 hours minimum
(until brightness
reduced by 30%)
50,000 hours minimum
(until brightness reduced by half)
Contrast adjustment
(Not provided)
Adjustable in 100
levels by operation at
the touch panel
(Not provided)
Life expectancy
(at high brightness)
–
25,000 hours
minimum*1
30,000 hours
minimum*1
Replacement
–
RUN
Can be replaced from the rear
Adjustable in 3 levels
(Not provided)
by at the touch panel
Can be set to turn off in 1 to 255 minutes, or to remain on
Brightness adjustment
(Not provided)
POWER (green LED)
Lit while power is being supplied
Lit in green : Running normally, Memory unit automatic transmission done
Flash in green : Memory unit automatic transmission being executed,
memory unit automatic transmission error
Lit in orange : Low battery voltage (during operation)
Flash in red : Low battery voltage (when NT631/NT631C is stopped)
*1: Time taken for brightness to reduce to half at normal temperature and humidity
*2: Sharp brightness adjustment is not available.
242
40_
55_
55_
55_
(No restriction)
Automatic turn-off function
Indicators
"30_
55_
45_
View angle
Life expectancy
Backlight
(white cold
cathode tube)
480 dots vertically
Appendix A
Specifications
Panel Specifications
Item
Specification
Type: Resistive type
Number of switches:
768 (32 horizontally
Maximum number that can be registered on one screen:256
Cell size:
NT631-ST211j-EV2
NT631-ST141j-EV2
NT631-ST151j-EV2
Input:
Pressure-sensitive type
Touch panel
5.9
6.5
5.9
24 vertically)
5.9 mm
6.5 mm
5.9 mm
Operating force: 1 N minimum
Life expectancy: One million operations minimum
External Interface Specifications
Item
Serial communication
Specification
Serial port A
Conforms to EIA RS-232C
D-SUB 9-pin connector (female)
+5 V (250 mA max.) output at pin No. 6
Serial port B
connector*
EIA RS-232C (Serial port B terminal block selectable by memory switch
setting)
D-SUB 9-pin connector (female)
Serial port B terminal
block*
EIA RS-422A/485 (Serial port B connector selectable by memory
switch setting)
Terminal block
Parallel interface
Conforms to Centronics standard, 20-pin half pitch connector
Expansion interface
Dedicated connector
* Serial port B is used for either a connector or terminal block.
Note Check that the current capacity of the equipment to be supplied is within 250 mA before using the +5 V
output of pin No. 6.
The +5 V output of the unit delivers +5 V " 5% and 250 mA maximum.
Programming Environment
Item
Specification
Programming System
Programming support software
Programming Tool
Programming support software
NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.0), made by OMRON
Special Features
Item
Specifications
Buzzer
Three kinds of buzzer sound (continuous, short intermittent, and long intermittent)
ON:
On reception of a command from the host, display of a screen with a
buzzer setting, or display of an error screen such as for a receive error.
OFF:
On reception of a command from the host, or display of a screen with
no buzzer setting.
Setting:
Set “ON” for “Buzzer Sound” in the memory switch menu, or set
“ERROR ON” for the buzzer to sound only when an error occurs.
The buzzer sounds three times in response to prohibited input.
Touch switch input sound
Touch switches
Input sound: Sounding for 0.2 seconds
Setting:
Set “ON” for “Key Press Sound” in the memory switch menu.
243
Appendix A
Specifications
Item
Specifications
Maintenance function
- Memory switch setting
- Self-test functions, such as for the memory and external interface
- Setting condition confirmation function
- Communication check function
- Initialization of internal memory data
- Display of display/alarm history data
- Registered data test display function
Battery backup
- Backup of numeral/character string memory table data in the NT631/NT631C
- Backup of display/alarm history data
- Backup of calendar and clock setting
Battery life:
5 years (at 25_C)
When voltage becomes low: RUN LED lights in orange or red
The communication flag to the PC (BAT LOW) comes
ON (1).
Resume function
Retains the contents of the numeral/character string memory tables (i.e., they are not
initialized) when the power is turned ON, when the NT631/NT631C is reset, and
when the operation mode is changed.
Setting:
Set “ON” for “Resume Function” in the memory switch menu.
Screen print function
Functions: - Prints a hard copy of the screen display
- Prints display/alarm histories
Setting:
Set the printing protocol (“Print Controller”) and printing type (“Print
Method”) in the memory switch menu.
“ESC/P”, “Color”:
Color printing conforming to ESC/P 24-J83C
“PC-PR201H”, “Color”: Color printing conforming to PC-PR201PL
“ESC/P”, “Tone”:
Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels,
conforming to ESC/P 24-J82
“PC-PR201H”, “Tone”: Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels,
conforming to PC-PR201PL
“PCL 5”, “Tone”:
Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels,
conforming to PCL 5
However, the NT631 supports monochrome printing only.
Calendar and clock function
- Displays the current time in accordance with the built-in clock
- Displayed and set with “Calendar Check” in the “MAINTENANCE MODE” menu
Programming Console function
Executes functions equivalent to those of a C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console
for CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1 (-EV1 only), CQM1H,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, and SRM1 (C02-V2 only) PCs.
Executes functions as a Programming Console for CS1 series PLC.
Device Monitor function
The Device Monitor function can be used to change the PC’s operating mode,
read/change words in the PC’s data areas, and display the PC’s error log.
Compatible PCs include the CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, SRM1, and CS1-series PCs.
Mathematical function
Up to 256 calculation expressions can be registered along with the screen data. The
mathematical function reads the required data from numeral memory tables or host
words, executes the registered calculations, and writes the results.
Arithmetic operators, logic operators, bit operators, and comparative operators can
be used.
Transmission
functions
244
System program
transmission
Downloads the system program from the system installer
Downloads/Upload the system program with a memory unit.
Screen data
transmission
- Function for downloading screen data to and uploading screen data from the
Support Tool
- Function for transmitting screen data to and from the memory unit.
History data
uploading
Function for uploading display/alarm history data from PT.
Appendix A
Specifications
Communications Specifications
For a Host Link, RS-232C Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
Communications settings
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed:
Data length:
Stop bit:
Parity:
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A, B)
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m*
9600, 19200 bps
7 bits
2 bits
Even
Communications protocol
C-series SYSWAY (1:N)
* When using an NT-AL001, the specifications are as follows.
• RS-232C cable: Max. 2 m
• RS-422A cable:
Total length 500 m max.
For a Host Link, RS-422A Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-422A
Communications settings
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed:
Data length:
Stop bit:
Parity:
Connector
Terminal Block (serial port B)
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 500 m
Communications protocol
C-series SYSWAY (1:N)
9600, 19200 bps
7 bits
2 bits
Even
For an NT Link, 1:1, RS-232C Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A, B)
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m*
* When using an NT-AL001, the specifications are as follows.
• RS-232C cable: Max. 2 m
• RS-422A cable:
Total length 500 m max.
245
Appendix A
Specifications
For an NT Link, 1:1, RS-422A Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-422A
Connector
Terminal block (serial port B)
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 500 m
For an NT Link, 1:N, RS-232C Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A, B)
Number of units connected
1:1 to 8
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m*
* To connect two or more PTs, NT-AL001 units are required. When using an NT-AL001, the specifications are as follows.
• RS-232C cable: Max. 2 m
• RS-422A/485 cable:
Total length 500 m max.
For an NT Link, 1:N, RS-422A/485 Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-422A/485
Connector
Terminal block
Number of units connected
1:1 to 8
Transmission distance
Max. 500 m
For a High-speed NT Link, 1:N, RS-232C Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A, B)
Number of units connected
1:1 to 8
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m*
* To connect two or more PTs, NT-AL001 units are required. When using an NT-AL001, the specifications are as follows.
• RS-232C cable:
Max. 2 m
• RS-422A/485 cable: Total length 500 m max.
For a High-speed NT Link, 1:N, RS-422A/485 Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-422A/485
Connector
Terminal block (serial port B)
Number of units connected
1:1 to 8
Transmission distance
Max. 500 m
246
Appendix A
Specifications
For a Memory Link, RS-232C Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
Communications settings
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed:
Data length:
Stop bit:
Parity:
Flow control:
Response:
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A, B)
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m*
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400bps
7, 8 bits
1, 2 bits
None, even, odd
None, RS/CS, XON/XOFF
Presence/absence
Communications protocol
Memory link
* When using NT-AL001, specification is as follows:
• RS-232C:
Max. 2 m
• RS-422A:
Max. total length 500 m
For a Memory Link, RS-422A Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-422A
Communications settings
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed:
Data length:
Stop bit:
Parity:
Flow control:
Response:
Connector
Terminal block
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 500 m*
Communications protocol
Memory link
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400bps
7, 8 bits
1, 2 bits
None, even, odd
None, XON/XOFF
Presence/absence
For a Bar Code Reader
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
Communications settings
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed:
Data length:
Stop bit:
Parity:
Flow control:
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A)
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m
Communications protocol
Non-protocol mode
Data format
[STX]
4,800, 9600, 19200 bps
7, 8 bits
1, 2 bits
None, even, odd
RS/CS
Data (0 to 40 bytes)
[ETX]
247
Appendix B
Dimensions
Body
302.5 (11.91)
POWER
RUN
237.5 (9.35)
250 (9.84)
7.5 (0.30)
315 (12.40)
Units: mm (inch)
54 (2.13)
With memory unit
installed (NT-MF261)
237.5 (9.35)
7.5 (0.30)
74 (2.91)
249
Appendix B
Dimensions
Mounting Dimensions
Mounting panel
Mounting fixture
POWER
RUN
140 (5.51)
259 (10.20)
15.5 (0.61)
7.5 (0.30)
240 (9.45)
34 (1.34) (min.)
38 (1.5) (max.)
Units: mm (inch)
324 (12.76)
250
Appendix B
Dimensions
Cable Connection Dimensions (with NT-MF261)
35 (1.38)
96 (3.78)
RESET
RDA
TRM
RDB
SDA
91 (3.58)
SDB
CSA
CSB
20.4
24V
+DC
(0.94)
PRINTER
PORT B
PORT A
31 (1.22)
75 (2.95)
118 (4.65)
Units: mm (inch)
251
Appendix C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
This section outlines the external dimensions, procedure for mounting and removal, and specifications of an
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001-E). Refer to this information when designing the control panel. For
details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the NT-AL001-E.
Dimensions
53.5
(2.11)
110 (4.33)
om Ron
4 (0.16)
74.5 (2.93)
100.2 (3.94)
105 (4.13) max.
NT–AL001-E
(30)
(1.18)
45 (1.77)
30 (1.18)
Units: mm (inch)
30 (W)
114 (H)
100.2 (D) mm:
with the RS-422A terminal block cover closed
30 (W)
114 (H)
119.5 (D) mm:
with the RS-422A terminal block cover open
Methods for Mounting and Removal
The RS-232/RS-422 convertor unit (NT-AL001-E) can be mounted on a DIN rail or in an operation panel.
The RS-422A terminal block of the convertor unit can be easily removed.
Mounting to a DIN Rail
Latch the top part of the rear face of the convertor unit (a in the figure) onto the top edge of the DIN rail, and push the
unit in the direction indicated by b in the figure.
Now fit end plates at the right and left of the convertor unit to secure it and ensure that it cannot shift laterally.
(a)
(b)
253
Appendix C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
Removal from a DIN Rail
Remove the end plates at right and left of the convertor unit and, as shown in the figure below, insert a flat blade
screwdriver into the rail stopper at the bottom face of the convertor unit and prize it free.
Mounting to an Operation Panel
Drill two mounting screw holes in an operation panel with a thickness of at least 2 mm (0.08 inch) and secure the
convertor unit with screws.
30
(1.18)
100
(3.94)
110
(4.33)
21
(0.83)
2-M4
Units: mm (inch)
Note In order to ensure a secure and strong mount, mount the convertor unit in an operation panel with a thickness of at least 2 mm (0.08 inch).
Specifications
The general specifications and communications specifications of the convertor unit are shown below.
General Specifications
Item
Specification
Dimensions
30 (W)
30 (W)
Weight
200 g max.
Operating ambient temperature
0 to 55_C
Operating ambient humidity
10 to 90% RH (with no condensation)
Rated power supply voltage
+5 V " 10% (using pin No. 6 of the RS-232C connector)
Rated power supply current
150 mA max.
Rush current
0.8 A max.
Insulation resistance
20 MΩ or higher, measured between all RS-422A terminal signal lines collectively
and functional ground terminal with a 500 VDC megger
Dielectric strength
1500 VAC for 1 minute between all RS-422A terminal signal lines collectively and
functional ground terminal
Leakage current: 10 mA max.
Operating environment
No corrosive gases
254
114 (H)
114 (H)
100.2 (D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover closed
119.5 (D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover open
Appendix C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
Item
Specification
Storage ambient temperature
−20 to +75_C
Vibration resistance
Conforms to JIS C0911 60 minutes in each of X, Y, and Z directions
Shock resistance
Conforms to JIS C0912 47m/s2, 3 times in each of X, Y, and Z directions
Communications Specifications
RS-232C Interface
Item
Specification
Communications speed
Max. 64k bps
Transmission distance
Max. 2 m
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female)
RS-422A/485 Interface
Item
Specification
Communications speed
Max. 64k bps (depends on the RS-232C communications speed)
Transmission distance
Max. 500 m
Connector
8-terminal detachable terminal block, M3.0
255
Appendix C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
DIP Switch Settings
The convertor unit has 6 digits DIP switch for setting the RS-422A/485 communication conditions.
Before connecting the cable to the convertor unit, make the DIP switch settings.
(Factory settings)
ON
123456
om on
NT–AL001-E
[SW1-1] Not used (always ON)
[SW1-2] Setting for built-in terminal resistance
- OFF Terminator not set
- ON Terminator set
[SW1-3, 4] Selection of 2-wire type/4-wire type
SW1-3
SW1-4
OFF
2-wire type (RS-485)
ON
SW1-3
SW1-4
OFF
4-wire type (RS-422A)
ON
[SW1-5, 6] Selection of the RS-422A send mode
SW1-5
SW1-6
OFF
Continual sending
ON
SW1-5
OFF
ON
SW1-6
SW1-5
OFF
ON
SW1-6
Complies with CS control of RS-232C
(Data sent at CS H)
Complies with CS control of RS-232C
(Data sent at CS L)
When using the host link or NT link (1:1), set the RS-422A send mode to continual sending (set both SW1-5 and 6
OFF).
When using the NT link (1:N), set the RS-422A send mode to complies with CS control of RS-232C (i.e., one of
SW1-5 and SW1-6 must be ON).
Note 1. Do not set both SW1-5 and SW1-6 ON at the same time. This may damage internal circuits.
2. The power supply to the device supplying +5 V must be turned OFF before starting wiring work.
3. Before connecting the RS-232C cable and turning on the power to an RS-232C device such as a PT
(i.e., turning on the power to the convertor unit), check that the cable is wired correctly and that the DIP
switch settings are correct. If the power is turned on while there is a wiring fault, the internal circuits of the
convertor unit or the RS-232C device may be damaged.
4. When the convertor unit is connected to a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E model of OMRON PC as an RS-422A
device, set DIP switches SW1-5 and SW1-6 as indicated below.
SW1-5
OFF
5 6
256
SW1-6
ON
Appendix C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
Pin Arrangement
The convertor unit has a terminal block for an RS-422A/485 interface connection and a connector for an RS-232C
interface connection.
The pin arrangements for the RS-422A/485 terminal block and the RS-232C connector are as follows.
RS-422A/485 Terminal Block
7
5
3
1
8
6
4
2
Terminal
block pin
No.
Signal name
Abbreviation
Signal direction
(convertor unit ⇔ RS-422
device)
CSA
→
8
Request to send (−)
7
Request to send (+)
CSB
→
6
Receive data (−)
RDA
←
5
Receive data (+)
RDB
←
4
Send data (−)
SDA
→
3
Send data (+)
SDB
→
2
Signal ground
SG (GND)
–
1
Functional ground
* The CSB and CSA signals are for specialized applications.
–
RS-232C Connector
Connector
pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
Signal name
Abbreviation
Signal direction
(convertor unit ⇔ RS-232C
device)
6
1
Not used
–
–
7
2
Send data
SD
←
8
3
Receive data
RD
→
4
Request to send
(shorted to CS internally)
RS
←
5
Clear to send
(shorted to RS internally)
CS
→
6
+5 V (150 mA) input for convertor
unit
+5 V
→
7
Data set ready
(shorted to ER internally)
DR
→
8
Data terminal ready
(shorted to DR internally)
ER
←
9
9
Signal ground
SG
* The hood is connected to the functional ground terminal of the RS-422A terminal block.
–
257
Appendix C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
Block Diagram
A diagram showing the internal blocks of the convertor unit is shown below. Refer to this diagram when making
cables yourself, or when connecting devices with special interfaces.
RS-232C side
D-SUB 9P CASE
+5 V
SG
6 Fuse
R
POWER
LED
DC-DC Convertor
L
9
Photocoupler
RS-232C
Dr/Rec
RD
SD
RS
CS
DR
ER
258
3
2
RS-422A/485 side
8P terminal block
RS-422A/485 Dr/Rec
R
R
L
REG
IS_5 V
1
IS_0 V
2
SG
3
4
SDB
SDA
R
2-wire type/
4-wire type
SW1-6
SW1-3
R
7
8
SW1-4
SW1-5
4
5
FG
Terminator
R
5
RDB
6
RDA
7
8
CSB
CSA
SW1-2
RS-422A Dr
Appendix D
Transporting and Storing the NT631/NT631C
• When transporting the NT631/NT631C, use the packaging intended for it.
• When storing the NT631/NT631C, observe the following conditions.
Storage ambient temperature: –20 to +60_C
Storage ambient humidity:
35% to 85%
259
Appendix E
Making the Cable
The procedure for making up the cable is described below.
Also refer to this procedure for making a connecting cable for use with RS-422A/485 type connections.
Cable Preparation
The preparation of the cable differs according to whether or not the shielding wire is to be connected to the FG.
Cable with Shielding Wire Connected to FG
1, 2, 3...
1. Cut the cable to the required length.
2. Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade. Take care not to damage the
shielding underneath.
3. Cut back the shielding wire with scissors.
4. Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire.
5. Fold back the shielding wire.
6. Wrap aluminum foil tape around the folded-back shielding wire.
(1)
(2)
40 (1.57) (RS-232C)
25 (0.98) (RS-422A)
(3)
10
(0.39)
(4)
5
(0.19)
(5)
(6)
Units: mm (inch)
Aluminum foil tape
Cable with Shielding Wire Not Connected to FG
1, 2, 3...
1. Cut the cable to the required length.
2. Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade. Take care not to damage the
shielding underneath.
3. Cut back the shielding wire with scissors.
4. Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire.
261
Appendix E
Making the Cable
5. Wrap vinyl tape over the cut off end of the shielding wire.
(1)
(2)
40 (1.57) (RS-232C)
25 (0.98) (RS-422A)
(3)
(4)
5
(0.19)
(5)
Units: mm (inch)
Vinyl tape
Soldering
1, 2, 3...
1. Slide heat-shrink tube over each wire.
2. Pre-solder each wire and connector terminal.
3. Solder each wire to each connector terminal.
1 mm
Soldering iron
Heat-shrink tube
(F, 1.5 mm dia., é = 10 mm)
4. Push the heat shrink tube over the soldered joint and heat the tube to shrink it in place.
Heat-shrink tube
Hood Assembly
Assemble the connector hood as shown below.
Aluminum foil tape
End connected to FG
262
End not connected to FG
Appendix F
Making the Cable for Connecting a PC
Refer to the following when making a cable for connecting the Support Tool.
Assembly of Connecting Cables
Wiring should be carried out in one of the following ways, depending on the type of RS-232C connector.
25-pin Connector
Personal computer
SD
2
2
SD
RD
3
3
RD
RS
4
4
RS
CS
5
5
CS
SG
7
9
SG
FG
1
6
+5 V
Shielding wire
Connector hood
Connector for peripheral devices on PT
Connector hood
Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable.
Name
Model
Connector
Connector hood
Cable
Remarks
XM2D-2501
25-pin, made by OMRON, for personal computer side
XM2A-0901
9-pin, made by OMRON, for PT side
XM2S-2511
25-pin, made by OMRON, for personal computer side
XM2S-0911
9-pin, made by OMRON, for PT side
AWG28
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Fujikura Ltd.
5P IFVV-SB
CA-MA-VV-SB 5P
28AWG
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
9-pin Connector
Personal computer
RD
2
2
SD
SD
3
3
RD
RS
7
4
RS
CS
8
5
CS
SG
5
9
SG
6
+5 V
Shielding wire
Connector hood
Connector for peripheral devices on PT
Connector hood
Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable.
Name
Connector
Connector hood*
Cable
Model
Remarks
XM2D-0901
9-pin, made by OMRON, for personal computer
XM2A-0901
9-pin, made by OMRON, for PT
XM2S-0911
9-pin, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON
XM2S-0913
9-pin, inch pitch screw, made by OMRON
AWG28
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Fujikura Ltd.
5P IFVV-SB
CA-MA-VV-SB 5P 28AWG
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
* One XM2S-0911 (for PT) and either one XM2S-0911 or -0913 (for your personal computer) are needed.
263
Appendix G
Making the Cable for Connection to a Bar
Code Reader
Refer to the following when making the cable for connection to a bar code reader.
Wiring Method
NT631/NT631C side
Abbr.
Abbr.
1
SD
2
RD
RD
3
RS
RS
4
CS
CS
5
+5 V
6
ER
7
SG
8
+5 V
SD
RS-232C
interface
Bar code reader side
Pin No.
SG
9
When using the +5 V output of serial port A of the NT631/NT631C, limit the cable length to within 2 m. If a cable
longer than 2 m is used, connect an external power supply to the bar code reader.
Connector and Related Parts
Use the parts which are specified by bar code reader and following recommended products when making the
connecting cable.
Name
Model
Remarks
Connector
XM2A-0901
9-pin type, made by OMRON, PT side
Connector hood
XM2S-0911
9-pin, made by OMRON
Cable
AWG28
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Fujikura Ltd.
5P IFVV-SB
CA-MA-VV-SB 5P
28AWG
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
265
Appendix H
Making the Cable for Connection to a Printer
The following product is recommended as the cable for connecting a printer.
NT-CNT121 (made by OMRON, cable length 1.5 m, 20-pin – 36-pin)
Refer to the following when making a cable for connection to a printer.
• Connector pin arrangement and wiring
Connector for a printer
on PT side
11
2
0
1
1
0
Printer
side
Abbr.
Pin No.
Connector hood
Shielding wire
Pin No.
Connector hood
1
8
3
6
20
0V
1
D7
11
9
N.C.
2
N.C.
D6
12
8
D5
3
7
0V
13
21
D4
4
6
N.C
14
N.C.
D3
5
5
0V
15
22
0V
6
23
D2
16
4
N.C.
7
N.C.
D1
17
3
D0
8
2
0V
18
24
STROB
9
1
N.C.
19
N.C.
BUSY
10
11
0V
20
19
1
1
9
267
Appendix I
Relationship between system program and
hardware
Here, relationship between system program and hardware is described.
NT631/NT631C have following models.
NT631-ST211j-E
Conventional product
NT631C-ST141j-E
NT631C-ST151j-E
NT631-ST211j-EV1
NT631C-ST141j-EV1
Version upgrade
g
model of the products above
(12/98)
NT631C-ST151j-EV1
NT631-ST211j-EV2
NT631C-ST141j-EV2
Version upgrade
g
model of the products above
(12/99)
NT631C-ST151j-EV2
System programs indicated below are installed for the models shown above in the default state. Also, system programs are supplied with the Support Tool as follows.
• System programs for NT631-ST211j-E/NT631C-ST141j-E/NT631C-ST151j-E:
System Program Ver. 1.0j
(System programs supplied with NT-ZJ3AT1-EV2/ZJCAT1-EV2)
• System programs for NT631-ST211j-EV1/NT631-ST141j-EV1/NT631-ST151j-EV1:
System Program Ver. 2.0j or 2.1j
(System programs supplied with NT-ZJ3AT1-EV3/ZJCAT1-EV3)
• System programs for NT631-ST211j-EV2/NT631C-ST141j-EV2/NT631C-ST151j-EV2:
System Program Ver. 3.0j
(System programs supplied with NT-ZJCAT1-EV4)
(A system program for the earlier NT30/620 PTs is also included with the NT-ZJCAT1-EV4.)
These system programs have mutual compatibility, therefore, they can be installed and used for the
NT631-ST211j-E/NT631C-ST141j-E, NT631C-ST151j-E,
NT631-ST211j-EV1/NT631C-ST141j-EV1/NT631C-ST151j-EV1,
NT631-ST211j-EV2/NT631C-ST141j-EV2/NT631C-ST151j-EV2 each.
However, there will be a limitation on function depending on the combination. Refer to the following tables.
Limitations of System Program/PT Combinations
The following table shows only the relationship between the hardware and system program.
For details of the relationship with the screen data created using the Support Tool, refer to NT-series Support Tool
for Windows (Ver. 4.1) Operation Manual (V061-E1-j).
269
Appendix I
Relationship between system program and hardware
Combining a -V1 Version and Version without a -Vj Suffix
Hardware
NT631-ST211j-E
NT631-ST211j-EV1
NT631C-ST141j-E
NT631C-ST141j-EV1
NT631C-ST151j-E
System program Ver. 1.0j
NT631C-ST151j-EV1
The following functions can not be used
The following functions can not be used
S Analogue meter
S Analogue meter
S High-definition font display
S High-definition font display
S Installation of system programs using memory unit
S Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs
S Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs
S Memory link
S Memory link
S Window control from the host
S Window control from the host
S Multiple display of window screens
S Multiple display of window screens
S Moving a window
S Moving a window
S Refer to the following table for details on new
functions supported by the -V2 versions.
S Refer to the following table for details on new
functions supported by the -V2 versions.
System program Ver. 2.0j or Ver. 2.1j
* Installation of system programs using memory unit
is possible
The following functions can not be used
S Installation of system programs using memory unit
The new functions supported by the -V2 versions
cannot be used. Refer to the following table for details.
S High-definition font display
S Refer to the following table for details on new
functions supported by the -V2 versions.
* The system program’s version can be checked from the System Menu.
Combining a -V1 Version and -V2 Version
Hardware
System program Ver. 2.0j or Ver. 2.1j
NT631-ST211j-EV1
NT631-ST211j-EV2
NT631C-ST141j-EV1
NT631C-ST141j-EV2
NT631C-ST151j-EV1
NT631C-ST151j-EV2
The following functions (new functions supported by the -V2) cannot be used:
S Additional data areas accessible in CS1-series PCs
S The CS1-series high-speed 1:N NT Link
S Interlock function that controls touch switches, numeral inputs, and character string inputs
S Mathematical function
S Device Monitor function
S NT30/620 compatible mode
S Expanded capabilities for label (guide character) displays, including multiple lines of text, ON/OFF switching
displays, numeral memory table displays, and character string memory table displays
System program Ver. 3.0j
All of the functions described in the Setup Manual and Reference Manual can be used.
* The system program’s version can be checked from the System Menu.
270
Appendix I
Relationship between system program and hardware
Combining a -V2 Version and Version without a -Vj Suffix
Hardware
NT631-ST211j-E
NT631-ST211j-EV2
NT631C-ST141j-E
NT631C-ST141j-EV2
NT631C-ST151j-E
System program Ver. 1.0j
The following functions cannot be used
S Analogue meter
S Analogue meter
S High-definition font display
S High-definition font display
S Installation of system programs using memory unit
S Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs
S Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs
S Memory link
S Memory link
S Window control from the host
S Window control from the host
S Multiple display of window screens
S Multiple display of window screens
S Moving a window
S Moving a window
S Additional data areas accessible in CS1-series PCs
S Additional data areas accessible in CS1-series PCs
S The CS1-series high-speed 1:N NT Link
S The CS1-series high-speed 1:N NT Link
S Interlock function that controls touch switches,
numeral inputs, and character string inputs
S Interlock function that controls touch switches,
numeral inputs, and character string inputs
S Mathematical function
S Mathematical function
S Device Monitor function
S Device Monitor function
S NT30/620 compatible mode
S NT30/620 compatible mode
S Expanded capabilities for label (guide character)
displays, including multiple lines of text, ON/OFF
switching displays, numeral memory table displays,
and character string memory table displays
S Expanded capabilities for label (guide character)
displays, including multiple lines of text, ON/OFF
switching displays, numeral memory table displays,
and character string memory table displays
System program Ver. 3.0j
NT631C-ST151j-EV2
The following functions cannot be used
The following functions can not be used
S Installation of system programs using memory unit
* Installation of system programs using memory unit
is possible
All of the functions described in the Setup Manual and
Reference Manual can be used.
S High-definition font display
* The system program’s version can be checked from the System Menu.
271
Appendix J
Model List
PTs
Model
Specification
NT631-ST211-EV2
High-intensity EL display (yellow), ivory
NT631-ST211B-EV2
High-intensity EL display (yellow), black
NT631C-ST141-EV2
STN color display, ivory
NT631-ST141B-EV2
STN color display, black
NT631C-ST151-EV2
High-intensity STN color display, ivory
NT631C-ST151B-EV2
High-intensity STN color display, black
Host Link Units
Model
Specification
Applicable PC
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
CPU-mounted type with RS-232C connector
C-series
C1000H
C2000H
3G2A6-LK202-EV1
CPU-mounted type with RS-422A connector
C200H-LK201-V1
Rack-mounting unit with RS-232C connector for C200H
C200H-LK202-V1
Rack-mounting unit with RS-422A connector for C200H
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
Features a selectable RS-232C/RS-422A connector
C-series
C1000H
C2000H
C500-LK203
Rack-mounting unit for C500
C-series
C1000H(F)
C2000H
CV500-LK201
Features an RS-232C connector and a selectable
RS-232C/RS-422A connector
Rack-mounting unit for CVM1/CV
CVM1/CV-series
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1
C-series
C200HS
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CompoBus/S Master Control Unit
Model
SRM1-C02-V2
Specification
Features an RS-232C port
Model Name
SRM1
Communications Unit
Model
CS1W-SCU21
Specification
RS-232C (2 ports)
Rack-mounting unit
Applicable PC
CS1-series
CS1G/H
273
Appendix J
Model List
CPU Units for Connection via a Host Link
Model
Specification
PC Type
CPM1-10CDR-j
CPM1-20CDR-j
CPM1A-10CDj-j
CPM1A-20CDj-j
CPM1A-30CDj-j
CPM1A-40CDj-j
RS-232C adapter/RS-422A adapter connected to the peripheral
port
C-series
CPM1
CPM2A-30CDjj-j
CPM2A-40CDjj-j
CPM2A-60CDjj-j
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
C-series
CPM2A
CPM2C-10jjjjjj-j
CPM2C-20jjjjjj-j
The PC’s communications connector can be split into an
RS-232C port and peripheral port with a CPM2C-CN111
Connecting Cable. (The CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cables
convert the connector to a single RS-232C or peripheral port.)
C-series
CPM2C
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1-CPU45-EV1
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
C-series
CQM1
CQM1H-CPU11
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
(The CQM1H-CPU11-E has only a peripheral port.)
C-series
CQM1H
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HS
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HE(-Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E(*)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HG(-Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HX(-Z)E
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin)
CS1-series
CS1G
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin)
CS1-series
CS1H
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
CVM1/CV-series
* Either of the communication boards C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-EV1 is required.
274
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1
Appendix J
Model List
CPU Units for Connection via a 1:1 NT Link
Model
Specification
PC Type
CPM1-10CDR-j
CPM1-20CDR-j
CPM1A-10CDj-j
CPM1A-20CDj-j
CPM1A-30CDj-j
CPM1A-40CDj-j
RS-232C adapter connected to the peripheral port
(RS-422A adapter cannot be used)
C-series
CPM1
CPM2A-30CDjj-j
CPM2A-40CDjj-j
CPM2A-60CDjj-j
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
C-series
CPM2A
CPM2C-10jjjjjj-j
CPM2C-20jjjjjj-j
Connect to the RS-232C port of a CPM2C-CN111 Connecting
Cable.
C-series
CPM2C
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1-CPU45-EV1
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
C-series
CQM1
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
C-series
CQM1H
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HS
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HE(-Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E(*)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HG(-Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HX(-Z)E
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
CVM1/CV-series
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1
* Either of the communication boards C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-EV1 is required.
CPU Units for Connection via a 1:N NT Link
Model
Specification
PC Type
CQM1H-CPU51(*1)
CQM1H-CPU61(*1)
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin)
C-series
CQM1H
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*2)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HE(-Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HG(-Z)E
275
Appendix J
Model List
Model
Specification
PC Type
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HX(-Z)E
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin)
CS1-series
CS1G
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin)
CS1-series
CS1H
*1: A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required.
*2: Either of the communication boards C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-EV1 is required.
CPU Units for Connection via a High-speed NT Link (1:N)
Model
Specification
PC Type
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin)
CS1-series
CS1G
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin)
CS1-series
CS1H
Reference: Serial Communications Boards (CS1W-SCB41) and Serial Communications Units (CS1W-SCU21)
with lot number 991220 (12/20/99) and later support the high-speed 1:N NT Link. Boards and Units
with earlier lot numbers cannot be used to establish a high-speed 1:N NT Link.
RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
Model
NT-AL001
Specification
RS-232C: 9-pin connector
RS-422A: 8-pin terminal block
RS-232C Adaptor, RS-422A Adaptor
Model
Specification
CPM1-CIF01
Links the RS-232C port of an NT631/NT631C and the peripheral port of a CPM1,
CPM2A, CPM2C, or SRM1 (compatible with host link, and NT Link (1:1))
CPM1-CIF11
Links the RS-422A port of an NT631/NT631C and the peripheral port of a CPM1,
CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1 (compatible with host link)
276
Appendix J
Model List
Related Parts and Equipment for PT
Name
Model
Remark
Support Tool*
Options
NT-ZJCAT1-EV4
Compatible with PC/AT personal computers
For Windows 95/98/NT (English version)
CD-ROM
NT631C-CFL01
Replaceable backlight (for NT631C-ST151j-EV1)
NT631C-CFL02
Replaceable backlight (for NT631C-ST141j-EV1)
NT610C-KBA04
Reflection suppressing protective sheet for NT631/NT631C
NT625-KBA01
Chemical-resistant cover for NT631/NT631C
NT-MF261
Memory unit for NT631/NT631C
3G2A9-BAT08
Spare battery
* The Support Tool indicated above includes the system installer and the standard system programs (Ver. 3.0) for the
NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C. System programs for the earlier NT30/620 PTs are also included.
Cables with Connectors for PT ↔ PC/NT-AL001-E
Model
Cable Length
XW2Z-200S
2m
XW2Z-500S
5m
XW2Z-200T
2m
XW2Z-500T
5m
XW2Z-S002
2m
Applicable units
Communication Method
Specification
Host link units with a 25-pin
connector
Serial port A host link
(RS-232C only)
9 pin ↔ 25-pin
9-pin
25 pin
Host link units with a 9-pin
connector
Serial port A host link,, NT link
(1:1) (RS-232C only)
9 pin ↔ 9-pin
9 pin
9-pin
Personal computer with a 9-pin
connector
Serial port A for using NT
Support Tool
9-pin ↔ 9-pin
*1: The following PCs can supply +5 V: C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1H, CPM2A, CPM2C, and CS1G/H.
Cables with Connectors
Model
Cable Length
Specification
CV500-CN228
2m
25-pin (male) ↔ 9-pin (male)
XW2Z-S002
2m
9-pin (female) ↔ 9-pin (male)
Connection Cable
Model
AWG28
Specification
5P IFVV-SB
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P
28AWG
Multicore cable, manufactured by Fujikura, Ltd.
Multicore cable, manufactured by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
Applicable Connectors
Name
Connector
Connector hood
Model
Specification
XM2A-2501
25-pin type (male), made by OMRON
XM2D-2501
25-pin type (female), made by OMRON (for personal computers)
XM2A-0901
9-pin type (male), made by OMRON
XM2D-0901
9-pin type (female), made by OMRON (for personal computers)
DB-25P
25-pin type (male), made by JAE
XM2S-2511
25-pin type, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON
XM2S-2513
25-pin type, inch pitch screw, made by OMRON
XM2S-0911
9-pin type, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON
XM2S-0911-E
9-pin type, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON
XM2S-0913
9-pin type, inch pitch screw, made by OMRON
DB-C2-J9
25-pin type, made by JAE
277
Appendix J
Model List
Printer Cable
Model
NT-CNT121
Specification
Printer cable for half pitch (1.5 m), made by OMRON
Cable for Peripheral Port of CS1-series PC
Model
CS1W-CN118
Specification
Made by OMRON (CS1-series peripheral port ↔ D-sub, 9-pin, female)
Connecting Cable for the CPM2C Communications Connector
Model
CPM2C-CN111
278
Specification
Made by OMRON (CPM2C communications port ↔ D-sub, 9-pin, female, C-series
peripheral port)
Appendix K
Option List
Replaceable Backlights ... NT631C-CFL01 (for NT631C-ST151j-EV2)
These are backlights for NT631C for replacement purposes. Two pieces make a set.
Replaceable Backlights ... NT631C-CFL02 (for NT631C-ST141j-EV2)
Protective Sheet ... NT610C-KBA04
Stuck to the display to prevent irregular reflection or contamination. The entire sheet is colorless and transparent.
The five sheets make a set.
POWER
RUN
279
Appendix K
Option List
Chemical-resistant Cover ... NT625-KBA01
Covers the front panel and protects it from various chemical agents. The entire sheet is milky white and made of
silicone rubber.
The sheet offers protection against the following chemical agents.
Protects against
Does not protect against
Boric acid
Hexane
Sulfuric acid
Lubricating oil
Nitrogen
Benzene
Ammonia gas
Butane
Carbonic acid gas
Carbonic acid
Phenol
Chlorinated solvents
Glycerin
Napthalene
Ammonia water
Soy bean oil
Calcium chloride
Toluene
Developing fluid (hypo)
Acetaldehyde
Lard
For information on chemical agents not listed in the table above, please inquire whether or not protection is offered
(if the chemical agent is one against which silicone rubber is recognized as offering protection, please use this
product even if the agent is not listed in the “Protects against” column of the table above).
Replacement Battery ... 3G2A9-BAT08
This is a lithium battery used for memory backup.
280
Option List
Appendix K
Memory Unit ... NT-MF261
This is a dedicated unit for reading/writing the screen data and the system programs in an NT631/NT631C. Data is
transmitted by DIP switch setting at the memory unit.
281
Index
Numbers
1:N connection among RS−422A ports, 116
1:N connection among RS−485 ports, 118
1:N connection between RS−422A/485 at the
NT631/NT631C and RS−232C at the host, 88
A
Allowable power supply voltage range, 241
Applicable connectors, 277
Automatic transmission (memory unit), 39, 47
B
Backlight (for NT631C only), 232
Backlight brightness adjustment, 183
Battery cover, 28
Before operating, 21
C
Cable connection dimensions, 251
Cable for peripheral port of CS1−series PLC, 278
Cables with connectors, 277
Calling the System Installer mode, 130
Calling the System Menu, 129
Cell size (Touch panel), 243
Changing the system settings, 142
Checking communication at serial ports, 207
Checking communication with a printer, 210
Checking communication with the support tool, 206
Checking interfaces, 205
Checking screen data, 192
Checking the backlight (for NT631 only), 199
Checking the battery voltage, 204
Checking the buzzer, 195
Checking the LCD (screen display), 198
Checking the PT setting status, 187
Checking the RUN LED, 196
Checking touch switches, 202
Chemical−resistant cover, 280
Cleaning method, 238
Clearing screen data, 131, 143
Clearing/installing the system program, 140
Comm. A Method, 147
Comm. B Method, 148
Comm. B Select, 148
Communication board, 53, 66, 70, 73, 97
Communication boards, 106
Communication by Using Memory Link, 19
Communication condition, 147
Communication condition settings for bar code readers,
178
Communication condition settings for the host link
method, 148
Communication errors and their remedies, 229
Communication method for communications with the
host, 147
Communication method settings, 148
Communication methods, 24
Communication port, 24
Communication type, 24
Communication Unit, 273
Communications specifications, 245
Comparison between NT631 and NT631C, 5
Connecting a bar code reader, 34
Connecting a printer, 33
Connecting directly between RS−232C ports, 76
Connecting to other model PCs, 18
Connecting to the Support Tool, 33
Connection cable, 277
Connection method, 24
Contrast adjustment, 181
CPU, 97
CPUs, 66, 70, 73, 106, 108
CPUs (for connection via a host link), 274
CPUs connectable with host link units or expansion com
munication board, 97
D
Device check, 195
Device Monitor function, 217
Dimensions, 241
Direct connection function, 16
Disabling/enabling System Menu display, 142
Disabling/enabling writing to the screen data memory,
142
Display, 27
Display color, 242
Display device, 242
Display specifications, 242
Displaying and printing the display history record, 188
Displaying/setting the calendar and clock, 185
Downloading the system program, 142
E
Effective display area, 242
Enclosure ratings, 241
Error messages, 225
Errors in the system installer mode and their remedies,
229
Errors occurring at start of operation, 225
283
Index
Errors occurring during operation, 227
Errors occurring on screen data initialization and trans
mission, 228
Errors when using a memory unit, 43, 49
Expansion interface connector, 28
Expansion Mode, 128
External interface specifications, 243
F
Functional ground terminal, 32
G
General specifications, 241
GR terminal, 28
Grounding, 32, 241
H
Host link, 17
Host link method, 52, 96
Host link unit, 53, 273
I
I/O settings, 181
In the panel, 4
Initializing alarm history record data, 134
Initializing display history record data, 133
Initializing the memory switches, 138
Initializing the memory tables, 137
Initializing the recipe tables, 136
Inspection method, 238
Installation environment, 30
Installation in the operation panel, 30
L
Life expectancy (backlight), 242
Life expectancy (display panel), 242
Life expectancy (touch panel), 243
M
Maintenance Mode, 128
Making the cable, 261
Making the cable for connecting a PC, 263
Making the cable for connection to a bar code reader,
265
Making the cable for connection to a printer, 267
Manual transmission (memory unit), 41, 48
Manuals, 21
Memory initialization, 131
Memory link method, 76, 112
Memory switch, 147
Memory switch setting screen, 159
284
Memory unit, 281
Menu tree, 128
RUN mode, 127
System Installer Mode, 127
Mounting dimensions, 250
N
Noise resistance, 241
NT link, 17
NT link (1:1) method, 65
NT link (1:N) method, 69, 108
highspeed, 73
highspeed, 110
NT−AL001, 253
Number of dots, 242
Number of switches (touch panel), 243
O
Operating ambient humidity, 241
Operating ambient temperature, 241
Operating environment, 241
Operating force, 243
Operation at startup, 126
Operation modes, 127
P
Peripheral devices that can be connected, 15
Power consumption, 241
Power input terminals, 28
POWER LED, 27
Power supply connection, 31
precautions, ix
Precautions to be observed when transmitting screen
data, 146
Principal Functions of NT631/NT631C, 8
Printer cable, 278
Printer connector, 28
Programming console function, 211
Programming environment, 243
Protective sheet, 279
PT, 273
R
Rated power supply voltage, 241
Recipe function, 6
Recommended printers, 34
Relationship between system program and hardware, 269
Relationships among modes, 127
Replaceable backlight, 279
Replacement battery, 280
Replacing the backlight, 232
Replacing the battery, 237
Reset switch, 28
Index
RS−232C adaptor, 276
RS−232C/RS−422A convertor unit, 84, 276
RS−422A adaptor, 276
RUN, 127
RUN LED, 27
S
Screen data composition and transmission units, 144
Screen data memory check, 199
Selecting menu items, 130
Serial communication board, 52, 70, 73, 96, 111
Serial communication unit, 52
Serial port A, 16, 24
Serial port A connector, 28
Serial port B, 16, 24
Serial port B connector, 28
Set, 150
Setting Screen Saver Movement", 165
Setting the automatic reset function, 172
Setting the bar code reader input function, 177
Setting the "Buzzer Sound", 161
Setting the communication type for serial port B, 157
Setting the conditions for communications with the me
mory link method, 148
Setting the display language in the System Installer mode,
140
Setting the history display method, 168
Setting the host link method, 150
Setting the Key Press Sound", 160
Setting the Memory Link Method, 155
Setting the NT link (1:1) method, 152
Setting the NT link (1:N) method, 152
Setting the Print Method", 164
Setting the Printer Controller", 162
Setting the resume function, 170
Setting the retry count, 176
Setting the screen saver start−up time, 166
Setting the "Start−up Wait Time", 159
Setting the terminal resistance, 94, 121
Setting the time−out interval, 174
Shock resistance (operating), 241
Special features, 243
Starting operation, 158
Starting the NT31/NT31C, 126
Storage ambient temperature, 241
Supplemental functions to V2, 5
Support Tool, 277
Switching from the System Menu to the RUN mode, 131
Switching to the RUN mode, 158
System configuration, 15
System Menu, 127
T
Terminal resistance setting terminals, 94
Transmit Mode, 127
Transmitting the screen data, 144
Transporting and Storing the NT631/NT631C, 259
U
Usable systems (programming console function), 212
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C with V1), 36
Using an RS−232C/RS−422A convertor unit, 253
V
Vibration resistance (operating), 241
View angle, 242
W
Warning label, 28
Waterproof, 4
Weight, 241
285
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement